JVC LCT1215 001A H User Manual

COLOUR TELEVISION

HV-34LPZ

HV-29LPZ

Contents

Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6

Remote control buttons

and functions . . . 8

Using the TV's menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 20

PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 21

SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 24

FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26

INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 36

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

INSTRUCTIONS

LCT1215-001A-H

0402-Ki-NV-JMT

Setting up your TV

CAUTION

• Turn off all the epuipment including the TV

before connecting anything.

Connecting the aerial and VCR

• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good

quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Fig.A

• Read the manual that came with the VCR

before connecting.

If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :

Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket

on this TV .

Back of the TV

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :

1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial

input socket on the VCR, and

connect the VCR and TV with

another aerial cable.

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT

(video output) jack and the TV's

VIDEO jack with a video cable.

AV COMPULINK

To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO

cable:

Fig.B

Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO

output) connector and TV's S connector with an S-

VIDEO cable A, instead of connecting with a

video cable .

Back of the TV

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT

(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's

AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with

an audio cable.

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect

the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack

and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an

audio cable.

• You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if

your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.

For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK

Supported Devices” on page 38.

Setting up your TV

2 Connecting the power cord

Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.

3 Putting the batteries into the

Remote control

Use two AA/R6 batteries.

Insert the batteries from the

end, making sure the

and polaritiles are correct.

• Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.

• If the remote control does not work properly,

replace the batteries.

• The batteries we supply are only for setting up

and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon

as necessary.

4 Making the initial settings

When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial

setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.

1 Press the main power button on the TV

The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.

• If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does

not change to green, your TV is in the standby

mode. Press the POWER button on the remote

control to turn the TV on.

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has

already been turned before. In this case,use the

"LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM" functions

to make the initial settings. For details, see

"INSTALL menu" on page 29.

POWER lamp

Main power button

2 Press the MENU/OK button

The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose

a language for the on-screen language.

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

Setting up your TV

3 Press the

buttons to choose

POWER

TV/VIDEO

ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK

button.

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.

The TV channels you receive are automatically

stored in the programme numbers list.

AUTO PROGRAM

20%

RETURN

:OK

DISP

:BACK

MULTI

• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function, press

the DISPLAY button.

MUTING

4 After the TV channels have been

stored in the programme number (PR)

list, the EDIT menu appears.

EDIT

PIP

SUB-P

CH/CC

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

:OK

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

• You can proceed to edit the programme

numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

• If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in

the programme numbers list, you can register it

using the MANUAL function.

TEXT

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.

• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store a

TV channel to the programme number 0 (AV).

• If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL

function, press the MENU/OK button to close the

EDIT menu.

Now, the setting up is complete.

Please enjoy your new JVC TV!

TV buttons and functions

Turn the main power on

Press the main power button 1 .

The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is

in the standby mode.

To turn the main power off :

press the main power button again.

The POWER lamp 2 goes off.

Turn the TV on from standby

mode

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and

your TV will be turned on.

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• You can also turn on the TV by pressing the

TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby

mode.

8 2

Choose a TV channel

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

Choose a VIDEO terminal

Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or

CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

Adjust the volume

Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .

The volume level indicater appears.

MENU button 6

Press to open the menu.

For details, see "Operation with the buttons on

the TV" on page 19.

(Behind the cover)

OVER

L/MONO

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

IN (VIDEO-4)

Remote control sensor

and ECO sensor 9

6 5 4 3

ECO lamp 7

If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.

TV buttons and functions

SPATIALIZER lamp 8

If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO

or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.

Headphone jack 0

Connect the headphones with a stereo

mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).

When using the headphones, follow the

operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on

page 25.

UDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

UDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-1 terminal =

• See page 3 and 36.

AUDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-2 terminal ~

• See page 36.

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R ^AUDL^I/^OMONO

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

terminal !

OUTPUT

• See page 28 and 36.

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPU LINK

VIDEO-4 terminal -

• See page 36.

OUTPUT terminal @

• See page 36.

Aerial socket #

Connect the aerial cable.

• See page 3.

AV COMPU LINK terminal $

• See page 36 and 38.

Remote control buttons and functions

Turn the TV on from standby mode

Press the POWER button.

The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be

turned on.

POWER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE

MODE

• You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+

buttons or the number buttons.

To turn the TV off:

Press the POWER button again.

The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV

enters standby mode.

RETURN

Choose a TV channel

MULTI

Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has

been set.

MUTING

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the

programme number (PR) with the number

buttons.

• If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,

press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry

system.

PIP

SUB-P

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

• You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For

details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.

MENU/

• If you do not have a clear picture or no colour

appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR

SYSTEM button" on page 11.

• If you cannot hear sound normally even when the

picture appears normally, follow the operation

procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

Adjust the volume

TEXT

Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.

• You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.

Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on

page 25.

Remote control buttons and functions

16:9

Watch images from external

devices

Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external

device has been connected.

This mode converts a normal picture (4:3

aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 as-

pect ratio).

Press the TV/VIDEO button.

• You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the

CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.

To return to a TV channel:

Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+

buttons or the number buttons.

• Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect

ratio that have been squeezed into a

normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you

can restore their original demensions.

MUTING button

Press the MUTING button to turn off

the volume. Pressing the MUTING

button again resumes the previous

volume level.

SPATIALIZER button

You can enjoy Surround sound with a

"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER

function.

Press the SPATIALIZER button to

choose a mode.

ZOOM button

You can change the screen size according to the

picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one

from the following ZOOM modes.

LIVE :

Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo

sound converting it into surround sound

with added depth and ambience.

Press the ZOOM button to choose a

mode.

MONO :

• If you press the ZOOM button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P

signal), “525P” appears on the screen and

the ZOOM function does not operate.

Mono allows you to enjoy normal

monaural sound by converting it into a

stereo-like sound.

OFF :

REGULAR

This function is turned off.

Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as

its original size is.

• The LIVE mode works properly only

with stereo sound.

• The LIVE mode does not work

correctly with headphones.

• The MONO mode works properly only

with monaural sound.

ZOOM

You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect

ratio) to fill the TV screen.

The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under

lisense from Desper Products,Inc.

• The left side and right side of the Wide

picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.

Remote control buttons and functions

To register a TV channel as the

"Return Channel" :

BASS button

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by

using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)

function.

Choose the Programme number to which

the channel you want to register has been

set, and press the RETURN+ button and

hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.

"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is

displayed and the registration is com-

pleted.

Press the BASS button to turn the

SUPER BASS function on or off.

ON :

This function is turned on.

To cancel register a TV channel as the

"Return Channel" :

OFF :

This function is turned off.

while viewing any TV channel, press the

RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3

seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS

CANCELED!" is displayed and the regist-

ration is cancelled.

PICTURE MODE button

You can choose one of three PICTURE

MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to

adjust the picture settings automatically.

• When you turn off the TV, the

registration for the "Return Channel" is

cancelled.

Press the PICTURE MODE button

choose a mode.

• If you want to view the "Return Channel"

and another TV channel alternately, first

choose a channel other than the

"Return Channel". and then press the

RETURN+ button to change the

channel to the "Return Channel" In this

way, you can view two channels

alternately by pressing the RETURN+

button.

BRIGHT :

Heightens contrast and sharpness.

STANDARD :

Standardizes picture adjustment.

SOFT :

Softens contrast and sharpness.

RETURN function :

The TV temporarily memorises the TV

channel that was choosen right before the

current TV channel as the "Last Channel".

By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can

alternately view the current TV channel and

the "Last Channel".

RETURN+ button

The RETURN+ button has two functions;

the RETURN+ function and the RETURN

function. If a channel has been registerd as

the "Return Channel", the RETURN+

function operates. If there is no setting for

the "Return Channel", the RETURN

function operates.

• If you want to view two channels

alternately by using the RETURN

function, first choose one TV channel

and then choose the other TV channel

with the Number buttons. If you choose

the TV channel without using the

Number buttons, there are cases where

a channel other than the one you first

chose is registered as the "Last

Channel".

RETURN+ function :

By registering a channel you frequently

view as the "Return Channel", you can

select that channel at any time simply by

pressing the RETURN+ button.

Remote control buttons and functions

/ button

Choose a TV channel or a

VIDEO terminal

1 Press the DISPLAY button to

When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast

programme, you can choose the sound from

Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When

the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,

you can change from stereo to mono sound

so that you can hear the broadcast more

clearly and easily.

display the PR LIST.

2 Press the

and

buttons

to choose a programme number

or VIDEO terminal.

Then press the MENU/OK

button.

Press the

choose a sound mode.

/ button to

• For programme numbers with the

CHANNEL GUARD function set, the

(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed

next to the programme number in the PR

LIST.

: Stereo sound

: mono sound

: Bilingual I (sub I)

: Bilingual II (sub II)

• The VIDEO terminals are registered after

the programme number PR99.

MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,

and the sound becomes monaural.

• The sound mode you can choose differs

depending on the TV programme.

COLOUR SYSTEM button

The colour system is chosen automatically.

However, if the picture is not clear or no

colour appears, choose the colour system

manually.

• This function does not work in the VIDEO

modes.

Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button

to choose the appropriate colour

system.

DISPLAY button

You can display the PR LIST, programme

number or VIDEO terminal number on the

screen.

AUTO :

Press the DISPLAY button.

Press the DISPLAY button changes the

display as follows:

This function detects a colour system from

the input signal.

• The AUTO mode may not function

properly if you have poor signal quality.

If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO

mode, choose another colour system

manually.

PR LIST

• The AUTO mode detects a colour system

from the input signal and chooses the

appropiate colour system automatically.

No indication

:OK

:EXIT

• When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of

the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour

system of the SUB-picture" on page 15

for details.

-10

+10

Remote control buttons and functions

• For the colour systems in each

BROADCASTING SYSTEMS

For sound sysytem colour system in your country

or rigion, refer to the table below.

country or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on

page 12.

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM button

Area

Country or Region

System

Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,

United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.

Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,

Thailand, India, etc.

The sound system is chosen automati-

cally. However, if you cannot hear the

sound normally even when the picture

appears normally, chooes the sound

system maunually.

PAL

Asia,

China, Vietnam, etc

Hong Kong, etc

PAL

Middle

East

Press the SOUND SYSTEM

button to choose the appropriate

sound system.

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,

Saudi Arabia, etc.

SECAM

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

Russia, etc

B/G : B/G system

Czech Republic, Poland, etc

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc

UK, etc

Europe

: I system

PAL

D/K : D/K system

PAL

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc

: M system

Republic of South Africa, etc

Africa

• This function does not work in the

Nigeria, etc

PAL

VIDEO mode.

Egypt, Morocco, etc

SECAM

• For the sound systems in each

country or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on

page 12.

SOUND SYSTEM

Area

Country or Region

System

Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,

United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.

Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,

Thailand, India, etc.

B/G

Asia,

Middle

East

China, Vietnam, etc

Hong Kong, etc

D/K

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,

Saudi Arabia, etc.

B/G

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc

Russia, etc

D/K

B/G

Czech Republic, Poland, etc

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc

UK, etc

Europe

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc

Republic of South Africa, etc

B/G

Africa

Nigeria, etc

B/G

Egypt, Morocco, etc

Remote control buttons and functions

• If you press the STROBE button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the STROBE function does

not operate.

FREEZE button

You can view the Main picture's forzen image

as the SUB-picture.

Press the FREEZE button.

• You cannot change the TINT setting for

the still images on the screen even if

you are viewing a programme with

NTSC colour system.

Still pictures

MAIN

To cancel the FREEZE function :

Press the FREEZE button again.

Using the MULTI

function

You can display multi-pictures that enable

you to easily find a program you want to

view.

• You cannot use the FREEZE button when

the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are

displayed on the screen.

• If you press the FREEZE button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the FREEZE function does

not operate.

1 Press the MULTI button.

Press the MULTI button changes the

display as follow:

5-pictures multi mode

STROBE button

Still

pictures

You can view the MAIN-picture as 15

consecutive still images.

MAIN

Press the STROBE button.

Moving

picture

16-pictures multi mode

Still

pictures

Moving

picture

Moving

picture

To cancel the STROBE function:

Press the STROBE button to return to the

MAIN-picture.

• If signal level of the MAIN-picture is

weak, the still images become abnormal.

Cancel the MULTI function

• You cannot use the STROBE button

when the SUB-picture or the MAIN-

picture are displayed on the screen.

To display next Multi pictures :

Press the NEXT button.

Remote control buttons and functions

2 Choose the desired picture with

Using the PIP function

You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at

the same time.

the

and

buttons, and

then press the MENU/OK button.

The screen switches to the TV channel or

VIDEO mode of your choice.

Press the PIP button.

Press the PIP button changes the display as

follows:

• Any programme numbers to which no TV

channel has been registered, or

programme numbers to which

CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not

displayed.

Twin pictures mode

• You cannot perform menu operations

such as headphone volume adjustment.

Cancel the MULTI function once to

perform menu operations.

MAIN

SUB

• If you press the MULTI button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the MULTI function does not

operate.

Picture in picture mode

SUB

MAIN

• During the short period that is required

for the Multi-pictures display to close no

sound comes from the television.

Cancel the PIP function

• You cannot view a picture from the same

programme number (or the same VIDEO

terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and

the SUB-picture at the same time.

• If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the

quality of the SUB-picture may also be

poor.

• If the picture standards of both pictures

are different, the top and bottom or one of

them may be missing.

• The ZOOM function does not operate

when viewing pictures using the PIP

function.

• The SUB-picture cannot be output from

TV.

• If you press the PIP button when receiving

the Progressive Video Signal (525P

signal), “525P” appears on the screen

and the PIP function does not operate.

Remote control buttons and functions

• You cannot change the COLOUR

SYSTEM of the SUB-picture using the

COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote

control.

Choose a TV channel for

the SUB-picture

Press the SUB-P -/+ button.

POSITION button

You can adjust the position of the SUB-

Picture when using the Picture in picture

mode.

Listen to the sound of SUB-

picture

You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on

your headphones while listening to the sound

of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.

Press the POSITION button

repeatedly.

For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 25.

Each time you press the button, the SUB-

Picture moves counterclockwise.

Change the colour system

of the SUB-picture

1 While the SUB-picture is dis-

played, press the MENU/OK

button to display the MENU

(main manu).

2 Press the

and

buttons

to choose PICTURE FEATURES,

and then press the MENU/OK

button.

SWAP button

You can replace the MAIN-picture and the

SUB-picture with each other.

3 Press the

buttons to

choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and

then press the MENU/OK button.

Press the SWAP button.

COLOUR SYSTEM

MAIN

SUB

NTSC 3.58

AUTO

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the

choose SUB, and then press the

buttons to choose the

buttons to

• Do not press the SWAP button while you

are recording the TV output on the VCR.

If you do, the output signal will change.

appropriate colour system. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

Remote control buttons and functions

Viewing a teletext

programme

1 Choose a TV channel with a

teletext broadcast.

HOLD button

You can hold a teletext page on the screen

for as long as you want, even while several

other teletext pages are being received.

Press the HOLD button.

2 Press the TV/TEXT button.

The

(hold) are displayed at the top left

Press the TV/TEXT button changes the

mode as follows:

of the screen.

To cancel the Hold function:

Press the HOLD button again.

REVEAL button

Some teletext pages include hidden text

(such as answers to a quiz).

TV mode

TV and

Text mode

You can display the hidden text.

Each time you press the REVEAL

button, text is hidden or revealed.

SIZE button

Text mode

You can double the height of teletext

display.

3 Choose a teletext page by

pressing the CHANNEL-/+

buttons, number buttons or

coloured buttons.

Press the SIZE button.

INDEX button

You can return to the index page instantly.

To return to the TV mode:

Press the TV/TEXT button or TV/VIDEO

button.

Press the INDEX button.

• In the List mode, you can return to the

page number displayed in the lower left

area of the screen.

• If you have trouble receiving tetetext

broadcasts, consult your local dealer or

the broadcast station.

CANCEL button

You can serch for a teletext page while

watching TV.

• In the Text mode, the ZOOM mode is

fixed to the REGULAR mode.

• No menu operations are possible when

viewing a teletext programme.

1 Press the number button to

enter a page number, or press

the coloured button.

• If characters on a teletext programme do

not appear properly, change the

TELETEXT LANGUAGE setting. For

details, see “TELETEXT LANGUAGE” on

page 34.

The TV searches for a teletext page.

Remote control buttons and functions

2 Press the CANCEL button.

Using the List mode

You can store the numbers of your favourite

teletext pages in memory and call them up

quickly using the coloured buttons.

The TV programme appears. When the

TV finds the teletext page, its page

number appears in the upper left of the

screen.

To store the page numbers :

1 Press the MODE button to

engage the List mode.

3 Press the CANCEL button to

return to a teletext page when

the page number is on the

screen.

The stored page numbers are displayed

at the buttom of the screen.

• You cannot return to the TV mode with

the CANCEL button.

2 Press a coloured button to

choose a position. Then press

the number buttons to enter the

page number.

SUBPAGE button

Some teletext pages include sub-pages that

are automatically displayed. You can hold

any sub-page, or veiw it at any time.

3 Press and hold down the

STORE button.

1 Press the SUBPAGE button to

operate the Sub-page function.

The four page numbers blink white to

indicate that they are stored in memory.

Sub-page numbers are displayed at the

left of the screen.

To call up a stored page :

1 Press the MODE button to

engage the List mode.

2 Press a coloured button to

which a page has been as-

signed.

Colour*

Yellow

White

Meaning of sub-page number

Currently being displayed.

Can be displayed.

Cannot be displayed and

it is not sent.

Blue or Red

* : Background color of the sub-page

number.

To exit the List mode :

Press the MODE button again.

2 Press the CHANNEL -/+ buttons

to choose a sub-page number.

To cancel the Sub-page function:

Press the SUBPAGE button again.

Using the TV's menu

This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.

To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating

techniques fully.

Basic operation

POWER

TV/VIDEO

1 Press the MENU/OK button to display

PICTURE

MODE

the MENU (main menu).

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

PICTURE SETTING

PICTURE FEATURES

SOUND SETTING

FEATURES

INSTALL

DEMO

:OK

RETURN

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

MULTI

• The display appearing at the bottom of a menu

indicates buttons on the remote control you

can use when you operate a chosen function.

MUTING

MENU/OK button

TV/VIDEO button

DISPLAY button

PIP

SUB-P

DISP.

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

2 Press the

and

buttons to

choose a menu title, and press the

MENU/OK button.

The menu appears.

To return to the previous menu:

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

Press the DISPLAY button.

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

To exit a menu instantly:

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

Press the TV/VIDEO button.

TEXT

3 Press the

function.

buttons to choose a

• For details of the functions in the menus, see

the following pages.

Using the TV's menu

4 Press the

buttons to

choose the setting of that func-

tion.

• If you want to operate a function which

appears only with its name, follow the

descriptions of that function on the

following pages.

5 Press the MENU/OK button to

comple the setting.

The menu disappears.

• When watching the television with the

NTSC system, the menus are displayed

at about half of their normal verical size.

Operation with the

buttons on the TV

You can also operate the menus using the

buttons on the front panel of the TV.

button

TV/VIDEO

button

buttons

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

• There is no button on the front panel of

the TV that has the function of the

DISPLAY or coloured buttons.

Using the TV's menu

PICTURE SETTING menu

SHARP

You can adjust the picture sharpness.

PICTURE SETTING

: softer

: sharper

PICTURE MODE

CONTRAST

STANDARD

BRIGHT

SHARP

COLOUR

• You cannot select the SHARP function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

TINT

WHITE BALANCE

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

MID

:OK

RESET

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

COLOUR

You can adjust the picture colour.

: lighter

: deeper

PICTURE MODE

You can choose one of three PICTURE

MODEs to adjust the picture settings

automatically.

TINT

You can adjust the picture tint.

: reddish

BRIGHT:

Heightens contrast and sharpness.

: greenish

STANDARD:

Standardizes picture adjustment.

• You can change the TINT setting (picture

tint) only when the colour system is

NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.

SOFT:

• You cannot select the TINT function when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal).

Softens contrast and sharpness.

• You can also operate the PICTURE

MODE function with the PICTURE MODE

button on the remote control.

For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"

on page 10.

To return to the default settings

in each PICTURE MODE :

Press the blue button. Returns the picture

settings in the currently chosen PICTURE

MODE mode to the default settings, and

stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.

Adjusting the picture

You can change the picture settings of each

picture mode as you like. The picture settings

changed are stored in the picture mode.

WHITE BALANCE

You can select one of three WHITE

BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to

adjust the white balance of the picture. Since

white is the colour which is used as a

refernce for all the other colours, changing

the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the

appearance of all the other colours on the

screen.

CONTRAST

You can adjust the picture contrast.

: lower

: higer

BRIGHT

You can adjust the picture brighetness.

: darker

: brighter

COOL:

A bluish white. Using this mode when

watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy

a more vivid and bright picture.

Using the TV's menu

MID:

PICTURE FEATURES menu

The normal white colour.

PICTURE FEATURES

WARM:

DIGITAL VNR

AUTO

DigiPure

PULL DOWN

COLOUR SYSTEM

ZOOM

A raddish white. Using this mode when

watching films allows you to enjoy colours

that are characteristic of films.

PICTIRE TILT

:OK

:EXIT

• You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE

function in the Twin pictures mode or the

16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.

DISP

:BACK

DIGITAL VNR

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the

amount of noise in the original picture.

When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

function to ON, the screen contrast is auto-

matically adjusted to a setting suitable for the

brightness of your room. This reduces eye

strain for you and the power consumption of

the TV.

• You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR

function when receiving the Progressive

Video Signal (525P signal).

AUTO:

The TV will be automatically adjust the level

of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the

amount of noise in the picture, giving you the

best possible picture.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too

high it can make the picture less sharp.

It is recommended to use the AUTO

setting if you can.

DISPLAY :

This function is turned on. Further, clover

marks indicating the brightness of your

room are displayed for several seconds each

time the brightness changes. The number of

clover marks displayed on the screen

MAX:

The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to

the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR

function to AUTO but still notice some noise,

change the setting from AUTO to MAX.

increases as your room becomes darker.

• The MAX setting is not suitable for high-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

MIN:

The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to

the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR

function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness

of the original picture has not been

reproduced fully, change the setting from

AUTO to MIN.

• The MIN setting is not suitable for low-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

Using the TV's menu

MIN:

DigiPure

The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the

minimun. When you set the DigiPure function

to AUTO and notice some noise, change the

setting from AUTO to MIN.

The Digipure function uses the latest in

digital technology to give you a natural

looking picture. The Digipure function

includes the following two functions.

• The MIN setting is not suitable for high-

quality pictures which contain very little

noise.

Digipure function:

This function helps to create a natural looking

picture by eliminating unnecessary edges

from high-contrast and crisp images.

Conversely, for images with low-contrast,

edges are added to produce a sharper, more

detailed picture.

OFF:

The DigiPure function is turned off.

PULL DOWN

The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema

film picture more smoothly and naturally on

the screen.

You can choose from the DigiPure function

settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.

Picture motion compensation

function:

This function displays fast-moving pictures

(for example, the players or ball in a football

game) more smoothly and naturally on the

screen.

AUTO:

This function is turned on. Normally keep this

function set to AUTO.

OFF:

This function is turned off.

• You cannot select the Digipure function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

• The motion may appear unnatural when

viewing images with the NTSC colour

system. To make the motion smoother,

switch the PULL DOWN function from

AUTO to OFF.

AUTO:

The TV will automatically adjust the level of

the DigiPure effect to match the amount of

noise in the picture, giving the best possible

picture.

• You cannot select this function in the

Twin pictures mode or the Picture in

picture mode.

• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on

a low-quality picture that contains a lot of

noise, this may actually make the noise

worse. It is recommended to use the

AUTO setting if you can.

MAX:

The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the

maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to

AUTO but feel that the original picture quality

has not been reproduced fully, change the

setting from AUTO to MAX.

• The MAX setting is not suitable for low-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

Using the TV's menu

COLOUR SYSTEM

The colour system is chosen automatically.

However, if the picture is not clear or no

colour appears, choose the colour system

manually.

ZOOM

You can change the screen size according to

the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum

one of three ZOOM modes.

1 Choose ZOOM, then press the

1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then

press the MENU/OK button.

MENU/OK button.

ZOOM

REGULAR

ZOOM

COLOUR SYSTEM

16:9

PAL

:OK

:EXIT

:OK

DISP

:BACK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons to

2 Press the

buttons to choose

choose a ZOOM mode. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

The picture expands and the chosen

ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5

seconds.

the appropriate colour system.

Then press the MENU/OK

button.

• When changing to the COLOUR

SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see

"Change the colour system of the SUB-

picture" on page 15 for details.

• You can choose a ZOOM mode from

REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For

details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.

• You can also operate the COLOUR

SYSTEM function with the COLOUR

SYSTEM button on the remote control.

For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM

button" on page 11.

• You cannot select the ZOOM function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

PICTURE TILT

There are cases where the Earth's magnetic

force may make the picture tilt. If this

happens, you can correct the picture tilt.

1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then

press the MENU/OK button.

PICTURE TILT

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons until the

picture becomes level. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

Using the TV's menu

SOUND SETTING menu

BALANCE

You can adjust the volume balance between

the left and right speakers.

SOUND SETTING

MONO

STEREO/

BASS

TREBLE

: turn the left speaker's volume level up.

: turn the right speaker's volume level up.

BALANCE

AI VOLUME

BBE

SPATIALIZER

SUPER BASS

HEADPHONE

LIVE

AI VOLUME

:OK

You can prevent the sudden increase or

decrease of sound that occurs when

changing the channel to another channel or

switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO

mode.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

STEREO / I•II

When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast

programme, you can choose the sound from

Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When

the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,

you can change from stereo to mono sound

so that you can hear the broadcast more

clearly and easily.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and

VIDEO mode can be set separetely.

For example, you can set it to be OFF in

TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.

If you set the AI VOLUME function while

viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,

the setting is registered as the setting for

VIDEO mode.

: Stereo sound

: mono sound

: Bilingual I (sub I)

: Bilingual II (sub II)

MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,

and the sound becomes monaural.

• The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate

as expected if the sound input level from

a broadcast station (or video software) is

extremely low.

• The sound mode you can choose differs

depending on the TV programme.

• This function does not work in the VIDEO

modes.

BBE

You can use the BBE function to enjoy easy-

to-listen sound that is faithful to the original

sound recorded.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound to your liking.

ON :

BASS

This function is turned on.

You can adjust the low tone of the sound.

: weaker

: stronger

OFF :

This function is turned off.

Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE

is a registered trademark of BBE

Sound, inc.

TREBLE

You can adjust the high tone of the sound.

: weaker

: stronger

Using the TV's Menu

TV SPEAKER:

SPATIALIZER

You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"

effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.

You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER

modes.

When this function is on, the TV’s speaker

does not shut off the sound even if head-

phones are connected.

If you set this function to off, the TV’s speaker

does not output the sound when the

headphones are connected.

• You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode

from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.

For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "

on page 9.

OUTPUT:

You can choose the sound from the MAIN-

picture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when

using the headphones.

The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under

lisense from Desper Products,Inc.

• The TV’s speaker does not put out the

sound from the SUB-picture.

SUPER BASS

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by

using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)

function.

• The sound of the SUB-picture is mono

only. You cannot use the STEREO/I·II

function for the sound of the SUB-picture.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

HEADPHONE

This function enables you to output the TV’s

sound from your headphones.

1 Choose HEADPHONE, then

press MENU/OK button.

HEADPHONE

VOLUME

TV SPEAKER

OUTPUT

MAIN

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Use the

and the

button to select,

button to set the

HEADPHONE function. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

VOLUME :

You can adjust the volume of the sound

output from your headphones.

Using the TV's menu

FEATURES menu

BLUE BACK

You can set the TV to automatically change

to a blue screen and mute the sound if the

signal is weak or absent, or when there is no

input from an external device.

FEATURES

SLEEP TIMER

BLUE BACK

CHILD LOCK

CHANNEL GUARD

AUTO SHUTOFF

OFF

VIDEO-3 SETTING

COMPONENT

ON :

:OK

This function is turned on.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

OFF:

This function is turned off.

SLEEP TIMER

You can set the TV to automatically turn off

CHILD LOCK

after a set time.

You can disable the front control buttons of

the TV. When this function is set to ON, the

TV can be operated only by using the remoto

control.

1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then

press the MENU/OK button.

Use this function to prevent children from

operating the TV at their own discretion

(without parent consent).

SLEEP TIMER

OFF

ON :

:OK

This function is turned on.

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

OFF:

This function is turned off.

2 Press the

buttons to set the

period of time.

The TV begins count down from the set

time.

CHANNEL GUARD

When there is a TV channel you do not want

your children to watch, you can lock out the

channel. Even when a child chooses a

programme number for a locked out channel

the screen will change to blue and display

so the channel cannot be viewed.

• You can set the period of time a

maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10

minitue steps.

To cancel this function:

Press the button to set a period of time to

"OFF".

To set this function

1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

press the number 0 (AV) button.

The menu disappers.

SET ID NO.

0000

• One minute before this function turns off

the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.

:OK

• This function cannot be used to turn off

:EXIT

the TV's main power.

DISP

:BACK

• When this function is on, you can display

the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm

or change the remaining time.

Using the TV’s menu

2 Set the ID number you want.

To view a locked TV

channel

To choose a number:

Press the

buttons.

1 Choose a programme number in

which a TV channel locked with

the number buttons or PR LIST.

To move a cursor:

Press the

buttons.

The screen changes to blue and the

(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.

3 Press the MENU/OK button.

CHANNEL GUARD

CH / CC

• You cannot choose a locked TV channel

with the

buttons.

GUARD

:OK

2 Press the DISPLAY button to

display " ID NO. " (ID unmber

input screen).

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the

buttons to

choose a TV channel.

• The TV shows the TV programme which

the chosen TV channel is now

broadcasting.

ID NO.:

3 Press the number buttons to

enter the ID number.

5 Press the blue button to set this

function to the TV channel.

The lock is temporarily released so you

can view the TV channel.

(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the

TV channel is locked.

If you have forgotten the ID number:

To cancel this function:

Perform step 1 of "To set this function".

After confirming the ID number, press the

TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.

Press the blue button again.

(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and

the lock is released.

• When you would like to cancel the

CHANNEL GUARD function, you must

perform the operation " To set this

function" again.

6 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

The menu disappears.

Using the TV's menu

AUTO SHUTOFF

You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are

received for about 15 minutes or longer after

the end of a broadcast.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not

turn off the TV's main power.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a

VIDEO mode.

VIDEO-3 SETTING

Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly accord-

ing to the video signal input from the external

device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If

this setting is incorrect, images will not be

displayed.

VIDEO :

If a normal video signal (composite video

signal) is input.

COMPONENT :

If a Component video signal (Y/C /C

signals) is input.

• For detailed connecting methods, see

" Additional preparation " on page 36.

• This Television is compatible with the

Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)

only when the component video signal is

input.

Using the TV’s menu

AUTO PROGRAM

INSTALL menu

INSTALL

20%

LANGUAGE

:OK

AUTO PROGRAM

EDIT/MANUAL

TELETEXT LANGUAGE

DISP

:BACK

:OK

• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,

:EXIT

press the DISPLAY button.

DISP

:BACK

2 After the TV channels have been

stored in the programme number

list, the EDIT menu appears.

LANGUAGE

You can choose the language you want to

use for the on-screen display from the

language list in a menu.

EDIT

CH/CC

1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press

the MENU/OK button.

:OK

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

• You can proceed to edit the programme

numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL

function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"

on page 30.

2 Press the

buttons to

choose a language.

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

• If a TV cannel you want to view is not

stored in the programme numbers list,

you can register it using the MANUAL

function.

The menu disappers.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page

30.

AUTO PROGRAM

You can automatically register the TV

channels which can be received well at

your residence in the TV's programme

numbers by performing the following.

• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not

store a TV channel to the programme

number 0 (AV).

• If you do not need to use the EDIT/

MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK

button to exit from the EDIT menu.

1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then

press the MENU/OK button.

The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.

The TV channels you receive are

automatically stored in the programme

numbers list.

Using the TV's menu

INSERT:

EDIT/MANUAL

This function adds a new TV channel in the

current programme numbers list by using the

CH/CC number.

The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into

two types:

editing of the current programme numbers

(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a

TV channel you want to view to the

programme number (MANUAL function).

DELETE :

This function deletes a unnecessary TV

Channel.

MANUAL :

CAUTION

• Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT

function rewrites the current programme

numbers list.

Resultingly, the programme number of

some of the TV channels will change.

This function manually registers a new TV

channel in a programme number.

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

• For programme number PR 0, "AV"

appears in the programme numbers list.

• When a TV channel which has been

locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD

function, using the MANUAL function for

that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL

GUARD function.

FUNCTIONS

MOVE

1 Press the

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the button to start the

MOVE function.

• When a TV channel has already been

registered in PR 99, using the INSERT

function deletes the TV channel.

buttons to

1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then

press the MENU/OK button.

EDIT

CH/CC

CC 01

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

STORE

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

3 Press the

buttons to

2 Follow the operation description

of a function you want to use and

operate the function.

choose a new programe number.

To cancel the MOVE function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

MOVE :

This function changes a programme number

of a TV channel.

4 Press the button to change the

programme number of a TV

channel to a new programme

number.

ID :

This function registers a Channel name (ID)

to a TV channel.

Using the TV’s menu

MANUAL

CH/CC

1 Press the

buttons to

01(B/G)

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the red button to start the

ID function.

3 Enter a channel name (ID).

:OK

SEARCH+

SEARCH-

FINE+

Press the

buttons to

:EXIT

:BACK

SYSTEM

DISP

choose a character.

FINE-

press the

the cursor.

EDIT

buttons to move

To cancel the MANUAL function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

CH/CC

3 Press the button to choose the

system (sound system) for a TV

channel you want to register.

• For the sound systems in each country

or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on page

12.

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the green or red button to

search for a TV channel.

To cancel the ID function:

Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV

channel. Then the TV channel is

displayed.

Press the DISPLAY button.

4 Press the MENU/OK button to

channel.

5 Press the green or red button

repeatedly until the to TV channel

you want appears.

DELETE

1 Press the

buttons to

If the TV channel reception is poor:

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the yellow button to delete

the TV channel.

Press the bule or yerrow button to

finetune the TV channel.

If you cannot hear the normal sound

even when the picture of the TV channel

appers normally:

The TV channel is deleted from the

programme numbers list.

The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the

button and choose a SYSTEM that has

normal sound.

MANUAL

1 Press the

buttons to

choose a programme number to

which you want to register a new

TV channel.

6 Press the MENU/OK button and

programme number.

2 Press the bule button to activate

the MANUAL function.

The normal EDIT menu is resumed.

At the right side following the CH/CC

number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of

the TV channel appears.

Using the TV's menu

INSERT

PREPARATION

• Find the CH/CC number corresponding

to the channel number of the TV channel

from the on page 33.

1 Press the

buttons to

choose a programme number for

which you will register a new TV

channel.

2 Press the green button to start

the INSERT function.

EDIT

CH/CC

:OK

`-9

:EXIT

:BACK

CH/CC

DISP

3 Press the

buttons to

choose "CC" or "CH" according

to the CH/CC number of the TV

channel.

To cancel the INSERT function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

4 Press the Number buttons to

enter the remaining CH/CC

number.

The TV shifts to registration mode.

When the registration is completed, the

picture of the TV channel appears on the

screen.

• The CH/CC number is a number

indicating the broadcast frequency to the

TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV

channel corresponding to the broadcast

frequency indicated by the CH/CC

number, a picture in the no-signal state

appears.

Using the TV’s menu

CH/CC number

When you want to use the INSERT function on page 32, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel

number of the TV channel from this table.

US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.

CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.

OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.

AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.

Channel

CCIR

OIRT

AUSTRALIA

AU-0

AU-1

AU-2

AU-6

AU-7

AU-8

AU-9

CCIR

OIRT

AUSTRALIA

CH 02

CH 03

CH 04

CH 05

CH 06

CH 07

CH 08

CH 09

CH 10

CH 11

CH 12

CH 13

CH 14

CH 15

CH 16

CH 17

CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 21

CH 22

CH 23

CH 24

CH 25

CH 26

CH 27

CH 28

CH 29

CH 30

CH 31

CH 32

CH 33

CH 34

CH 35

CH 36

CH 37

CH 38

CH 39

CH 40

CH 41

CH 42

CH 43

CH 44

CH 45

CH 46

CH 47

CH 48

CH 49

CH 50

CH 51

CH 52

CH 53

CH 54

CH 55

CH 56

CH 57

CH 58

CH 59

CH 60

CH 61

CH 62

CH 63

CH 64

CH 65

CH 66

CH 67

CH 68

CH 69

CH 70

US-2

CC 01

CC 02

CC 03

CC 04

CC 05

CC 06

CC 07

CC 08

CC 09

CC 10

CC 11

CC 12

CC 13

CC 14

CC 15

CC 16

CC 17

CC 18

CC 19

CC 20

CC 21

CC 22

CC 23

CC 24

CC 25

CC 26

CC 27

CC 28

CC 29

CC 30

CC 31

CC 32

CC 33

CC 34

CC 35

CC 36

CC 37

CC 38

CC 39

CC 40

CC 41

CC 42

CC 43

CC 44

CC 45

CC 46

CC 47

CC 48

CC 49

CC 50

CC 51

CC 52

CC 53

CC 54

CC 55

CC 56

CC 57

CC 58

CC 59

CC 60

CC 61

CC 62

CC 63

CC 64

CC 75

CC 76

CC 77

CC 78

CC 79

CC 95

CC 96

CC 97

CC 98

CC 99

S-1

S-2

AU-5

US-3

US-4

S-3

US-5

S-4

US-6

S-5

US-7

S-6

AU-5A

US-8

S-7

US-9

S-8

US-10

US-11

US-12

US-13

US-14

US-15

US-16

US-17

US-18

US-19

US-20

US-21

US-22

US-23

US-24

US-25

US-26

US-27

US-28

US-29

US-30

US-31

US-32

US-33

US-34

US-35

US-36

US-37

US-38

US-39

US-40

US-41

US-42

US-43

US-44

US-45

US-46

US-47

US-48

US-49

US-50

US-51

US-52

US-53

US-54

US-55

US-56

US-57

US-58

US-59

US-60

US-61

US-62

US-63

US-64

US-65

US-66

US-67

US-68

US-69

E10

E11

E12

R10

R11

R12

AU-10

AU-11

S-9

S-10

S-11

S-12

S-13

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

S-18

S-19

S-20

S-21

S-22

S-23

S-24

S-25

S-26

S-27

S-28

S-29

S-30

S-31

S-32

S-33

S-34

S-35

S-36

S-37

S-38

S-39

S-40

S-41

E21

E22

E23

E24

E25

E26

E27

E28

E29

E30

E31

E32

E33

E34

E35

E36

E37

E38

E39

E40

E41

E42

E43

E44

E45

E46

E47

E48

E49

E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

E57

E58

E59

E60

E61

E62

E63

E64

E65

E66

E67

E68

E69

W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

W+11

W+12

W+13

W+14

W+15

W+16

W+17

W+18

W+19

W+20

W+21

W+22

W+23

W+24

W+25

W+26

W+27

W+28

AU-3

AU-4

Z+1

Z+2

A-5

A-4

A-3

A-2

A-1

Using the TV's menu

• Languages that are not included in the

teletext language group that you select,

the sub-titles of the teletext program will

not be displayed properly.

TELETEXT LANGUAGE

There are 4 types of teletext language

groups. Set the teletext language group that

corresponds to the language of the teletext

program that you want to watch.

1 Choose TELETEXT LANGUAGE,

then press the MENU/OK button.

TELETEXT LANGUAGE

GROUP-1

GROUP-2

GROUP-3

GROUP-4

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons to

choose a group.

Group

Languages

Turkish, Hungarian, English,

German, French, Italian,

Spanish, Portuguese, Greek,

Swedish, Finnish

GROUP-1

Polish, Serbian, Croatian,

Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,

Rumanian, Hungarian,

German, French, Italian,

Swedish, Finnish

GROUP-2

Russian, Bulgarian, Lettish,

Lithuanian, Estonian,

Ukrainan, Serbian, Croatian,

Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,

English, German

GROUP-3

GROUP-4

Arabic, Czech, Slovak.

Hungarian, English, German,

French, Italian, Spanish,

Portuguese, Swedish, Finnish

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

The menu disappears.

Using the TV's menu

DEMO menu

DEMO

OFF

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

The DEMO function automatically demo-

strations some of the TV function.

When the DEMO function is set to

ON:

Each time the TV is turned on, the demon-

stration starts automatically.

If you do not want that to happen, set the

DEMO function to OFF.

1 Press the

choose ON.

buttons to

To cancel the DEMO function,

choose off.

2 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the settings.

The DEMO function is set to ON, and the

demostration will start.

To stop the demonstration:

Press one of the button on the remote

control.

Additional preparation

Connecting the external

devices

Connect the devices to the TV, paying

attention to the following connection

diagram.

Before connecting anything:

• Read the manuals provided with the

devices. Depending on the devices, the

connection method may differ from the

figure. In addition, the device settings

may be changed depending on the

connection method to secure proper

operation.

(Behind the cover)

OVER

L/MONO

IN (VIDEO-4)

• Turn off all the devices including the TV.

• The "Specifications" on page 43 contains

the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you

are connecting a device not listed in the

following connection diagram, see the

"Specifications" to choose the best

VIDEO terminal.

• Note that connecting cables are not

supplied.

• When connecting devices that are

supported by AV COMPU LINK, see

"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported

Devices" on page 38.

AUDIO

L/MONOVIDEO

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

L/MONO

OUTPUT

UDIO

VIDEO

VCR (composite signal)

VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

VCR for recording (composite signal)

DVD player (composite signal)

DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

DVD player (component video signals;

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/C /C )

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

TV game (composite signal)

TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

Camcorder (composite signal)

Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

Headphones

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

AV COMPU LINK cable

Additional preparation

• In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack

is indicated by "V".

Connecting methods

1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack

and the device's VIDEO OUT

(video output) jack with a video

cable.

2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks

(L/MONO and R) and the

device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R

output) jacks with an audio

cable.

If connecting a device to the TV

with an S-VIDEO cabel :

Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO

output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)

connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of

connecting with a video cable.

If the device's sound output is in

mono :

Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and

the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.

Note that the connection with a video cable

will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to

the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO

cable.

Connecting devices to the

OUTPUT terminal

The signals of the images and sound you are

currently viewing with this TV are output

through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting

a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can

record the currently shown image and sound

to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and

OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.

If connecting a DVD player to the

TV with a component video

cable:

Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, C and C ) in

the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's

COMPONENT (component video output)

jacks with a component video cables,

instead of connection with a video cable.

Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPO-

NENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on

page 28.

1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the

OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's

VIDEO IN (video input) jack with

a video cable.

2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and

R) in the OUTPUT terminal and

the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R

input) jacks with an audio cable.

• This Television is compatible with the

Progressive video signal (525P signal).

(When the component video signal is

input.)

If you have a DVD player that outputs

Progressive video signals (525P) as a

component video signal, then by

attaching the device to the television with

a component video cable you can see

the actual images that are recorded on a

DVD disc as an original image source.

• When you turn off the TV, the signals from

the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.

• The component signals input from the

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot

be output through the OUTPUT terminal.

If connecting a device to the

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal

with a video cable:

Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the

device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with

a video cables.

Connecting Headphones

Connect the headphones with a stereo mini

jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Head-

phone jack at the TV front panel.

Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO

according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page

28.

Additional preparation

Connecting AV COMPU

LINK Supported Devices

AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a

system in which related devices are

automatically controlled when you operate

one device.

If you apply this system to the TV, you can

have the TV automatically perform the

required operations by operating one

external device. You don't have to use the

TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or

change the VIDEO modes.

Conditions to use the AV

COMPU LINK remote

control system

• A device equipped with an AV COMPU

LINK terminal is required.

• You must connect the TV and the device

with an AV COMPU LINK cable.

AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied

with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable

is unavailable, connect them with a cable

with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at

both ends.

• You must connect the device to an

appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up

correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK

remote control system will not function

correctly. For details, see “ Setting up the

AV COMPU LINK remote control

system”.

Examples of the AV

COMPU LINK remote

control system operations

Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a

VCR or a DVD player, you can view images

from the device.

• The TV must be in standby mode (the

POWER lamp lighting red). If the TV’s

Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),

the AV COMPU LINK remote control

system does not function.

Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a

tape with the record safety tab removed) to a

VCR, you can view the tape.

Simply by operating the AV Control Rece-

iver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in

standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed

correctly.

Setting up the AV COMPU

LINK remote control system

• The performance of the AC COMPU

LINK remote control system varies

depending on the connected device.

See the device’s instruction manual.

CAUTION:

• With some devices, the setup method

differs from the ones explained here.

Be sure to read the device’s instruction

manual thoroughly before setting it up.

• When you select "TV SOUND" as the

input source with the AV Control

Receiver, there are cases where the TV's

MUTING function automatically operates

and the sound from the TV's speakers is

muted.

In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+

buttons or the MUTING button on the

TV's remote control to cancel the MUT-

ING function. You can regain the sound

from the TV's speakers.

1 Connect the device to the TV’s

VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.

If you want to connect a DVD

player to the TV with a compo-

nent video cable :

Connect the DVD player to the TV’s VIDEO-3

terminal.

• For detailed connecting instructions, see

"Connecting the external devices" on

page 36.

Additional Preparation

2 Connect the TV’s AV COMPU

LINK terminal and the device’s

AV COMPU LINK terminal with

an AV COMPU LINK cable.

3 Change the device’s setting

according to the VIDEO terminal

it is connected to.

If a VCR is connected to the

VIDEO-1 terminal :

Set the VCR’s remote control code to A code.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-1 terminal:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD2.

If a VCR is connected to the

VIDEO-2 terminal:

Set the VCR’s remote control code to B code.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-2 terminal:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD3.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-3 terminal with a

component video cable:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD1.

• For instructions on how to change the

device’s setting, refer to the device’s

instruction manual.

• If the device you are connecting has

neither the remote control code nor the

AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it

to the TV’s VIDEO-1 terminal.

Troubleshooting

If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before

you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if

the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think

there is a problem with the TV itself.

Important:

• This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.

If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to

the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.

• After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the

functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re -

quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the

rearcover of the TV.

Has the TV and aerial been

connected properly?

Has the aerial cable been damaged?

Is the aerial pointed to the right dir-

ection?

If you cannot turn on

the TV

• Is the AC plug connected to the AC

outlet?

Is the aerial itself faulty?

• Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the

• If the TV or aerial receives interference

from the other devices, stripes or noise

may appear in the picture. Move such

device as an amplifier, personal compu-

ter, or a hair drier that can cause inter-

ference away from your TV, or try chan-

ging its location. If the aerial suffers int-

erference from a radio tower or high-

voltage wire, please contact your local

dealer.

Main power button.

No picture/No sound

• Have you chosen a TV channel whose

reception is extremely bad? In this case,

the BLUE BACK function will be activat-

ed, the entire screen becomes blue, and

the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you

want to view the TV channel, follow the

description "BLUE BACK" on page 26 to

try to change the BLUE BACK function

setting to OFF.

• If the TV receives interferences from

signal reflecting from mountains or

building, double-pictures(ghosting) will

occur.

Try to change the aerial’s direction or

replace the antenna with the one with

better directionality.

• Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for

the TV channels correct?

Forrow the description “SOUND SYSTEM

Button” on page 12 to try to solve the

trouble.

• Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for

the TV channels correct? Follow the

description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"

on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.

Poor picture

• If noise totally obscures the picture (sn-

ow), the aerial or aerial cable may have

trouble. Check the following to try to

solve the trouble :

• Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controll-

ed properly? Follow the description

"Adjusting the picture" on page 20 to try

to adjust them properly.

• Videotaping teletext is not recommended

because it may not record correctly.

Troubleshooting

• When a white and bright still image (su-

ch as a white dress) is displayed on the

screen, the white part may look as if it

were coloured.

It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to

the nature of the picture tube itself, and

not due to a TV failure.

When the picture disappears from the

screen, the unnatural colours will also

disappear.

• When you are viewing a teletext progra-

mme, you cannot operate the menus.

Press the TV/VIDEO button to return the

teletext programme to the ordinary TV

programme to try operating the menus.

• Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?

If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,

you cannot operate the TV with the front

control buttons of the TV. Follow the

description "CHILD LOCK" on page 26 to

try to set the CHILD LOCK function to OFF.

• When viewing images from commercially

available video softwear products, or vi-

deos from videotapes which have been

recored improperly, the top of the image

may be distored.

• If the TV operation becomes disabled

suddenly, press the Main power button

on the TV and turn off the main power.

Try to press the Main power button again

to turn on the main power. If the TV

returns to a normal state, it is not a

failure.

This is due to the condition of the video

signal, and not because of malfunction.

Poor sound

• The following functions do not operate

when receiving Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal);

Remote control function:

ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and

STROBE BUTTON

MENU function:

SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure

and ZOOM

• Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE

properly? If not, follow the description

"Adjusting the Sound" on page 24 to try

to adjust them properly.

• When the TV channel reception is poor, it

can be hard to hear the stereo or

bilingual sound. In this case, follow the

description "STEREO / I • II" on page 24

to hear the sound more easily by

Other concerns

changing it to a mono sound.

• When the SLEEP TIMER function or

AUTO SHUTOFF function operates, the

TV is automatically turned off.

Operation disabled

• Have the batteries of the remote control

become exhausted?

If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to

press the POWER button to turn on the

TV once again. At this time, if the TV

resumes a normal state, there is no

problem.

Follow the description "Putting the

Batteries into the Remote Control" on

page 4 and replace them with new

batteries to try solve the problem.

• If you do not want sound emitted from

the TV’s speakers when using

headphones, change the TV SPEAKER

setting in the HEADPHONE menu to OFF.

For details, see “HEADPHONE” on page

25.

• Have you attempted to use the remote

control at the sides or rear of the TV or at

a location more than seven meters apart

from the TV location? Operate the remote

control in the front of your TV or a

location less than seven meters from

your TV to try to solve the ploblem.

Troubleshooting

• If you bring a magnetised device such

as a speaker near to your TV, a picture

may be warped or unnatural colours

appear at the corners of the screen.

In this case, keep the device apart from

your TV. If the speaker causes such

phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded

speaker instead.

• A picture may be tilted due to the influe-

nce of the earth's magnetism. In this

case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page

23 to complete the tilt.

• It takes a short period of time from the

time an operation such as changing

channels is performed until an image is

displayed. This is not a malfunction.

This is the time required for the image to

stabilize before it can be displayed.

• The TV may emit a crackling sound due

to a sudden change in temperature. It

does not matter if a picture or sound

does not show any abnormality. If you

hear crackling sounds frequently while

you are viewing the TV, other causes may

be assumed.

For precautionary purposes, request

your service technician to inspect it.

• Touching the screen may cause you feel

a slight electric shock due to its static

electricity.

It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to

the construction of the picture tube. It is

not a problem with the TV.

You can rest assured that this static dis-

charge does not have harmful influence

over the human boby.

Specifications

Broadcasting systems

Colour systems

Channels and frequencies

B, G, I, D, K, K1, M

PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz

VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz

VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz

UHF channel (U)

=471.25 to 863.25 MHz

Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),

super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).

A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system

FLOF(Fastext), WST(World Standard Text)

Please see the table in the description

"TELETEXT LANGUAGE" on page 34

AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz

Sound-multiplex systems

Teletext systems

Lauguages displayed by

teletext

Power requirements

Audio output

Rated Power output: 20W + 20W

VIDEO-1 terminal

RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1

• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs

are available.

VIDEO-2 terminal

RCA connector X 3

• Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.

RCA connector X 5

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

terminal

• Video input/Component video (Y/C /C ) input and Audio

L/R inputs are available.

• Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.

RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1

• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs

are available.

VIDEO-4 terminal

OUTPUT terminal

RCA connector X 3

• Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.

Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)

Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C214)

Headphone jack

Accessories

AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2

Speakers

HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2

HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2

HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W

HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W

HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm

HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm

HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm

HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm

HV-34LPZ : 75kg

Power consumption

Screen size

(measured diagonally)

Dimensions(W X H X D)

Weight

HV-29LPZ : 48kg

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any

commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent

of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of

This TV does not conform to the PAL-D Chinese broadcasting system.

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

COLOUR TELEVISION

HV-34LPZ

HV-29LPZ

Contents

Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6

Remote control buttons

and functions . . . 8

Using the TV's menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 18

PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 19

SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 22

FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 24

INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 33

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

INSTRUCTIONS

LCT1217-001A-H

0402-Ki-NV-JMT

Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.

To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this

manual thoroughly before you begin.

WARNING:

TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLI-

ANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:

TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING

RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.

1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.

2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,

grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.

3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.

Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.

When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more

than the minimum distances as shown.

15 cm

10 cm

15 cm

4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.

5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.

Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.

6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it

when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,

wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.

Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.

7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to

disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.

Setting up your TV

CAUTION

• Turn off all the epuipment including the TV

before connecting anything.

Connecting the aerial and VCR

• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good

quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Fig.A

• Read the manual that came with the VCR

before connecting.

If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :

Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket

on this TV .

Back of the TV

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :

1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial

input socket on the VCR, and

connect the VCR and TV with

another aerial cable.

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT

(video output) jack and the TV's

VIDEO jack with a video cable.

AV COMPULINK

To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO

cable:

Fig.B

Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO

output) connector and TV's S connector with an S-

VIDEO cable A , instead of connecting with a

video cable.

Back of the TV

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT

(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's

AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with

an audio cable.

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect

the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack

and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an

audio cable.

• You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if

your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.

For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK

Supported Devices” on page 35.

Setting up your TV

2 Connecting the power cord

Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.

3 Putting the batteries into the

Remote control

Use two AA/R6 batteries.

Insert the batteries from the

end, making sure the

and polaritiles are correct.

• Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.

• If the remote control does not work properly,

replace the batteries.

• The batteries we supply are only for setting up

and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon

as necessary.

4 Making the initial settings

When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial

setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.

1 Press the main power button on the TV

The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.

• If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does

not change to green, your TV is in the standby

mode. Press the POWER button on the remote

control to turn the TV on.

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has

already been turned before .In this case,use

the "LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM"

functions to make the initial settings. For details,

see "INSTALL menu" on page 27.

POWER lamp

Main power button

2 Press the MENU/OK button

The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose

a language for the on-screen language.

LANGUAGE

:OK

TV :EXIT

^DISP.:BACK

Setting up your TV

3 Press the

buttons to choose

POWER

TV/VIDEO

ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK

button.

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.

The TV channels you receive are automatically

stored in the programme numbers list.

AUTO PROGRAM

20%

RETURN

:OK

DISP

:BACK

MULTI

• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,

press the DISPLAY button.

MUTING

4 After the TV channels have been

stored in the programme number (PR)

list, the EDIT menu appears.

EDIT

PIP

SUB-P

CH/CC

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

:OK

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

• You can proceed to edit the programme

numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 28.

• If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in

the programme numbers list, you can register

it using the MANUAL function.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 28.

• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store

a TV channel to the programme number 0

(AV).

• If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL

function, press the MENU/OK button to close

the EDIT menu.

Now, the setting up is complete.

Please enjoy your new JVC TV!

TV buttons and functions

Turn the main power on

Press the main power button 1 .

The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is

in the standby mode.

To turn the main power off :

press the main power button again.

The POWER lamp 2 goes off.

Turn the TV on from standby

mode

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and

your TV will be turned on.

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• You can also turn on the TV by pressing the

TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby

mode.

8 2

Choose a TV channel

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

Choose a VIDEO terminal

Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or

CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

Adjust the volume

Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .

The volume level indicater appears.

MENU button 6

Press to open the menu.

For details, see "Operation with the buttons on

the TV" on page 17.

(Behind the cover)

OVER

L/MONO

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

IN (VIDEO-4)

Remote control sensor

and ECO sensor 9

6 5 4 3

ECO lamp 7

If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.

TV buttons and functions

SPATIALIZER lamp 8

If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO

or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.

Headphone jack 0

Connect the headphones with a stereo

mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).

When using the headphones, follow the

operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on

page 23.

UDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

UDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-1 terminal =

• See page 3 and 33.

AUDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-2 terminal ~

• See page 33.

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R ^AUDL^I/^OMONO

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

terminal !

OUTPUT

• See page 26 and 33.

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPU LINK

VIDEO-4 terminal -

• See page 33.

OUTPUT terminal @

• See page 33.

Aerial socket #

Connect the aerial cable.

• See page 3.

AV COMPU LINK terminal $

• See page 33 and 35.

Remote control buttons and functions

Turn the TV on from standby mode

Press the POWER button.

The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be

turned on.

POWER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE

MODE

• You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+

buttons or the number buttons.

To turn the TV off:

Press the POWER button again.

The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV

enters standby mode.

RETURN

Choose a TV channel

MULTI

Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has

been set.

MUTING

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the

programme number (PR) with the number

buttons.

• If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,

press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry

system.

PIP

SUB-P

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

• You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For

details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.

MENU/

• If you do not have a clear picture or no colour

appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR

SYSTEM button" on page 11.

• If you cannot hear sound normally even when the

picture appears normally, follow the operation

procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

Adjust the volume

Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.

• You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.

Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on

page 23.

Remote control buttons and functions

16:9

Watch images from external

devices

Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external

device has been connected.

This mode converts a normal picture (4:3

aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 as-

pect ratio).

Press the TV/VIDEO button.

• You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the

CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.

To return to a TV channel:

Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+

buttons or the number buttons.

• Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect

ratio that have been squeezed into a

normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you

can restore their original demensions.

MUTING button

Press the MUTING button to turn off

the volume. Pressing the MUTING

button again resumes the previous

volume level.

SPATIALIZER button

You can enjoy Surround sound with a

"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER

function.

Press the SPATIALIZER button to

choose a mode.

ZOOM button

You can change the screen size according to the

picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one

from the following ZOOM modes.

LIVE :

Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo

sound converting it into surround sound

with added depth and ambience.

Press the ZOOM button to choose a

mode.

MONO :

• If you press the ZOOM button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P

signal), “525P” appears on the screen and

the ZOOM function does not operate.

Mono allows you to enjoy normal

monaural sound by converting it into a

stereo-like sound.

OFF :

REGULAR

This function is turned off.

Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as

its original size is.

• The LIVE mode works properly only

with stereo sound.

• The LIVE mode does not work

correctly with headphones.

• The MONO mode works properly only

with monaural sound.

ZOOM

You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect

ratio) to fill the TV screen.

The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under

lisense from Desper Products,Inc.

• The left side and right side of the Wide

picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.

Remote control buttons and functions

To register a TV channel as the

"Return Channel" :

BASS button

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by

using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)

function.

Choose the Programme number to which

the channel you want to register has been

set, and press the RETURN+ button and

hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.

"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is

displayed and the registration is com-

pleted.

Press the BASS button to turn the

SUPER BASS function on or off.

ON :

This function is turned on.

To cancel register a TV channel as the

"Return Channel" :

OFF :

This function is turned off.

while viewing any TV channel, press the

RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3

seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS

CANCELED!" is displayed and the regist-

ration is cancelled.

PICTURE MODE button

You can choose one of three PICTURE

MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to

adjust the picture settings automatically.

• When you turn off the TV, the

registration for the "Return Channel" is

cancelled.

Press the PICTURE MODE button

choose a mode.

• If you want to view the "Return Channel"

and another TV channel alternately, first

choose a channel other than the

"Return Channel". and then press the

RETURN+ button to change the

channel to the "Return Channel" In this

way, you can view two channels

alternately by pressing the RETURN+

button.

BRIGHT :

Heightens contrast and sharpness.

STANDARD :

Standardizes picture adjustment.

SOFT :

Softens contrast and sharpness.

RETURN function :

The TV temporarily memorises the TV

channel that was choosen right before the

current TV channel as the "Last Channel".

By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can

alternately view the current TV channel and

the "Last Channel".

RETURN+ button

The RETURN+ button has two functions;

the RETURN+ function and the RETURN

function. If a channel has been registerd as

the "Return Channel", the RETURN+

function operates. If there is no setting for

the "Return Channel", the RETURN

function operates.

• If you want to view two channels

alternately by using the RETURN

function, first choose one TV channel

and then choose the other TV channel

with the Number buttons. If you choose

the TV channel without using the

Number buttons, there are cases where

a channel other than the one you first

chose is registered as the "Last

Channel".

RETURN+ function :

By registering a channel you frequently

view as the "Return Channel", you can

select that channel at any time simply by

pressing the RETURN+ button.

Remote control buttons and functions

/ button

Choose a TV channel or a

VIDEO terminal

1 Press the DISPLAY button to

When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast

programme, you can choose the sound from

Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When

the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,

you can change from stereo to mono sound

so that you can hear the broadcast more

clearly and easily.

display the PR LIST.

2 Press the

and

buttons

to choose a programme number

or VIDEO terminal.

Then press the MENU/OK

button.

Press the

choose a sound mode.

/ button to

• For programme numbers with the

CHANNEL GUARD function set, the

(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed

next to the programme number in the PR

LIST.

: Stereo sound

: mono sound

: Bilingual I (sub I)

: Bilingual II (sub II)

• The VIDEO terminals are registered after

the programme number PR99.

MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,

and the sound becomes monaural.

• The sound mode you can choose differs

depending on the TV programme.

COLOUR SYSTEM button

The colour system is chosen automatically.

However, if the picture is not clear or no

colour appears, choose the colour system

manually.

• This function does not work in the VIDEO

modes.

Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button

to choose the appropriate colour

system.

DISPLAY button

You can display the PR LIST, programme

number or VIDEO terminal number on the

screen.

AUTO :

Press the DISPLAY button.

Press the DISPLAY button changes the

display as follows:

This function detects a colour system from

the input signal.

• The AUTO mode may not function

properly if you have poor signal quality.

If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO

mode, choose another colour system

manually.

PR LIST

• The AUTO mode detects a colour system

from the input signal and chooses the

appropiate colour system automatically.

No indication

:OK

:EXIT

• When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of

the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour

system of the SUB-picture" on page 15

for details.

-10

+10

Remote control buttons and functions

• For the colour systems in each

BROADCASTING SYSTEMS

For sound sysytem colour system in your country

or rigion, refer to the table below.

country or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on

page 12.

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM button

Area

Country or Region

System

Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,

United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.

Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,

Thailand, India, etc.

The sound system is chosen automati-

cally. However, if you cannot hear the

sound normally even when the picture

appears normally, chooes the sound

system maunually.

PAL

Asia,

China, Vietnam, etc

Hong Kong, etc

PAL

Middle

East

Press the SOUND SYSTEM

button to choose the appropriate

sound system.

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,

Saudi Arabia, etc.

SECAM

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

Russia, etc

B/G : B/G system

Czech Republic, Poland, etc

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc

UK, etc

Europe

: I system

PAL

D/K : D/K system

PAL

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc

: M system

Republic of South Africa, etc

Africa

• This function does not work in the

Nigeria, etc

PAL

VIDEO mode.

Egypt, Morocco, etc

SECAM

• For the sound systems in each

country or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on

page 12.

SOUND SYSTEM

Area

Country or Region

System

Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,

United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.

Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,

Thailand, India, etc.

B/G

Asia,

Middle

East

China, Vietnam, etc

Hong Kong, etc

D/K

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,

Saudi Arabia, etc.

B/G

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc

Russia, etc

D/K

B/G

Czech Republic, Poland, etc

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc

UK, etc

Europe

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc

Republic of South Africa, etc

B/G

Africa

Nigeria, etc

B/G

Egypt, Morocco, etc

Remote control buttons and functions

•

If you press the STROBE button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the screen

and the STROBE function does not operate.

FREEZE button

You can view the Main picture's forzen image

as the SUB-picture.

Press the FREEZE button.

•

You cannot change the TINT setting for

the still images on the screen even if you

are viewing a programme with NTSC

colour system.

Still pictures

MAIN

Using the MULTI

function

To cancel the FREEZE function :

Press the FREEZE button again.

You can display multi-pictures that enable

you to easily find a program you want to

view.

• You cannot use the FREEZE button when

the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are

displayed on the screen.

1 Press the MULTI button.

• If you press the FREEZE button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the FREEZE function does

not operate.

Press the MULTI button changes the

display as follow:

5-pictures multi mode

Still

pictures

STROBE button

You can view the MAIN-picture as 15

consecutive still images.

MAIN

Moving

picture

Press the STROBE button.

16-pictures multi mode

Still

pictures

Moving

picture

Moving

picture

To cancel the STROBE function:

Press the STROBE button to return to the

MAIN-picture.

Cancel the MULTI function

• If signal level of the MAIN-picture is

weak, the still images become abnormal.

To display next Multi pictures :

Press the NEXT button.

• You cannot use the STROBE button

when the SUB-picture or the MAIN-

picture are displayed on the screen.

Remote control buttons and functions

2 Choose the desired picture with

Using the PIP function

You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at

the

and

buttons, and

then press the MENU/OK button.

the same time.

The screen switches to the TV channel or

VIDEO mode of your choice.

Press the PIP button.

Press the PIP button changes the display as

follows:

• Any programme numbers to which no TV

channel has been registered, or

programme numbers to which

CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not

displayed.

Twin pictures mode

• You cannot perform menu operations

such as headphone volume adjustment.

Cancel the MULTI function once to

perform menu operations.

MAIN

SUB

• If you press the MULTI button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the MULTI function does not

operate.

Picture in picture mode

SUB

MAIN

• During the short period that is required

for the Multi-pictures display to close no

sound comes from the television.

Cancel the PIP function

• You cannot view a picture from the same

programme number (or the same VIDEO

terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and

the SUB-picture at the same time.

• If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the

quality of the SUB-picture may also be

poor.

• If the picture standards of both pictures

are different, the top and bottom or one of

them may be missing.

• The ZOOM function does not operate

when viewing pictures using the PIP

function.

• The SUB-picture cannot be output from

TV.

• If you press the PIP button when receiving

the Progressive Video Signal (525P

signal), “525P” appears on the screen

and the PIP function does not operate.

Remote control buttons and functions

• You cannot change the COLOUR SYSTEM

of the SUB-picture using the COLOUR

SYSTEM button on the remote control.

Choose a TV channel for

the SUB-picture

Press the SUB-P -/+ button.

POSITION button

You can adjust the position of the SUB-

Picture when using the Picture in picture

mode.

Listen to the sound of SUB-

picture

You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on

your headphones while listening to the sound

of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.

Press the POSITION button

repeatedly.

Each time you press the button, the SUB-

Picture moves counterclockwise.

For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 23.

Change the colour system

of the SUB-picture

1 While the SUB-picture is dis-

played, press the MENU/OK

button to display the MENU

(main manu).

2 Press the

and

buttons

to choose PICTURE FEATURES,

and then press the MENU/OK

button.

SWAP button

You can replace the MAIN-picture and the

SUB-picture with each other.

3 Press the

buttons to

Press the SWAP button.

choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and

then press the MENU/OK button.

COLOUR SYSTEM

MAIN

SUB

NTSC 3.58

AUTO

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

• Do not press the SWAP button while you

are recording the TV output on the VCR.

If you do, the output signal will change.

4 Press the

choose SUB, and then press the

buttons to choose the

buttons to

appropriate colour system. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

Using the TV's menu

This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.

To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating

techniques fully.

Basic operation

POWER

TV/VIDEO

1 Press the MENU/OK button to display

PICTURE

MODE

the MENU (main menu).

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

PICTURE SETTING

PICTURE FEATURES

SOUND SETTING

FEATURES

INSTALL

DEMO

:OK

RETURN

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

MULTI

• The display appearing at the bottom of a menu

indicates buttons on the remote control you

can use when you operate a chosen function.

MUTING

MENU/OK button

TV/VIDEO button

DISPLAY button

PIP

SUB-P

DISP.

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

2 Press the

and

buttons to

choose a menu title, and press the

MENU/OK button.

The menu appears.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

To return to the previous menu:

Press the DISPLAY button.

To exit a menu instantly:

Press the TV/VIDEO button.

3 Press the

function.

buttons to choose a

• For details of the functions in the menus, see

the following pages.

Using the TV's menu

4 Press the

buttons to

choose the setting of that func-

tion.

• If you want to operate a function which

appears only with its name, follow the

descriptions of that function on the

following pages.

5 Press the MENU/OK button to

comple the setting.

The menu disappears.

• When watching the television with the

NTSC system, the menus are displayed

at about half of their normal verical size.

Operation with the

buttons on the TV

You can also operate the menus using the

buttons on the front panel of the TV.

button

TV/VIDEO

button

buttons

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

• There is no button on the front panel of

the TV that has the function of the

DISPLAY or coloured buttons.

Using the TV's menu

PICTURE SETTING menu

SHARP

You can adjust the picture sharpness.

PICTURE SETTING

: softer

: sharper

PICTURE MODE

CONTRAST

STANDARD

BRIGHT

SHARP

COLOUR

• You cannot select the SHARP function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

TINT

WHITE BALANCE

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

MID

:OK

RESET

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

COLOUR

You can adjust the picture colour.

: lighter

: deeper

PICTURE MODE

You can choose one of three PICTURE

MODEs to adjust the picture settings

automatically.

TINT

You can adjust the picture tint.

: reddish

BRIGHT:

Heightens contrast and sharpness.

: greenish

STANDARD:

Standardizes picture adjustment.

• You can change the TINT setting (picture

tint) only when the colour system is

NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.

SOFT:

• You cannot select the TINT function when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal).

Softens contrast and sharpness.

• You can also operate the PICTURE

MODE function with the PICTURE MODE

button on the remote control.

For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"

on page 10.

To return to the default settings

in each PICTURE MODE :

Press the blue button. Returns the picture

settings in the currently chosen PICTURE

MODE mode to the default settings, and

stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.

Adjusting the picture

You can change the picture settings of each

picture mode as you like. The picture settings

changed are stored in the picture mode.

WHITE BALANCE

You can select one of three WHITE

BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to

adjust the white balance of the picture. Since

white is the colour which is used as a

refernce for all the other colours, changing

the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the

appearance of all the other colours on the

screen.

CONTRAST

You can adjust the picture contrast.

: lower

: higer

BRIGHT

You can adjust the picture brighetness.

: darker

: brighter

COOL:

A bluish white. Using this mode when

watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy

a more vivid and bright picture.

Using the TV's menu

MID:

PICTURE FEATURES menu

The normal white colour.

PICTURE FEATURES

WARM:

DIGITAL VNR

DigiPure

AUTO

PULL DOWN

COLOUR SYSTEM

ZOOM

A raddish white. Using this mode when

watching films allows you to enjoy colours

that are characteristic of films.

PICTIRE TILT

:OK

:EXIT

• You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE

function in the Twin pictures mode or the

16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.

DISP

:BACK

DIGITAL VNR

The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

function to ON, the screen contrast is auto-

matically adjusted to a setting suitable for the

brightness of your room. This reduces eye

strain for you and the power consumption of

the TV.

amount of noise in the original picture.

• You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR

function when receiving the Progressive

Video Signal (525P signal).

AUTO:

The TV will be automatically adjust the level

of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the

amount of noise in the picture, giving you the

best possible picture.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too

high it can make the picture less sharp.

It is recommended to use the AUTO

setting if you can.

DISPLAY :

This function is turned on. Further, clover

marks indicating the brightness of your

room are displayed for several seconds each

time the brightness changes. The number of

clover marks displayed on the screen

MAX:

The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to

the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR

function to AUTO but still notice some noise,

change the setting from AUTO to MAX.

increases as your room becomes darker.

• The MAX setting is not suitable for high-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

MIN:

The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to

the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR

function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness

of the original picture has not been repro-

duced fully, change the setting from AUTO to

MIN.

• The MIN setting is not suitable for low-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

Using the TV's menu

MIN:

DigiPure

The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the

minimun. When you set the DigiPure function

to AUTO and notice some noise, change the

setting from AUTO to MIN.

The Digipure function uses the latest in

digital technology to give you a natural

looking picture. The Digipure function

includes the following two functions.

• The MIN setting is not suitable for high-

quality pictures which contain very little

noise.

Digipure function:

This function helps to create a natural looking

picture by eliminating unnecessary edges

from high-contrast and crisp images.

Conversely, for images with low-contrast,

edges are added to produce a sharper, more

detailed picture.

OFF:

The DigiPure function is turned off.

PULL DOWN

The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema

film picture more smoothly and naturally on

the screen.

You can choose from the DigiPure function

settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.

Picture motion compensation

function:

This function displays fast-moving pictures

(for example, the players or ball in a football

game) more smoothly and naturally on the

screen.

AUTO:

This function is turned on. Normally keep this

function set to AUTO.

OFF:

This function is turned off.

• You cannot select the Digipure function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

• The motion may appear unnatural when

viewing images with the NTSC colour

system. To make the motion smoother,

switch the PULL DOWN function from

AUTO to OFF.

AUTO:

The TV will automatically adjust the level of

the DigiPure effect to match the amount of

noise in the picture, giving the best possible

picture.

• You cannot select this function in the

Twin pictures mode or the Picture in

picture mode.

• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on

a low-quality picture that contains a lot of

noise, this may actually make the noise

worse. It is recommended to use the

AUTO setting if you can.

MAX:

The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the

maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to

AUTO but feel that the original picture quality

has not been reproduced fully, change the

setting from AUTO to MAX.

• The MAX setting is not suitable for low-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

Using the TV's menu

COLOUR SYSTEM

The colour system is chosen automatically.

However, if the picture is not clear or no

colour appears, choose the colour system

manually.

ZOOM

You can change the screen size according to

the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum

one of three ZOOM modes.

1 Choose ZOOM, then press the

1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then

press the MENU/OK button.

MENU/OK button.

ZOOM

REGULAR

ZOOM

COLOUR SYSTEM

16:9

PAL

:OK

:EXIT

:OK

DISP

:BACK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons to

2 Press the

buttons to

choose a ZOOM mode. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

The picture expands and the chosen

ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5

seconds.

choose the appropriate colour

system. Then press the MENU/

OK button.

• When changing to the COLOUR

SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see

"Change the colour system of the SUB-

picture" on page 15 for details.

• You can choose a ZOOM mode from

REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For

details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.

• You can also operate the COLOUR

SYSTEM function with the COLOUR

SYSTEM button on the remote control.

For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM

button" on page 11.

• You cannot select the ZOOM function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

PICTURE TILT

There are cases where the Earth's magnetic

force may make the picture tilt. If this

happens, you can correct the picture tilt.

1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then

press the MENU/OK button.

PICTURE TILT

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons until the

picture becomes level. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

Using the TV's menu

SOUND SETTING menu

BALANCE

You can adjust the volume balance between

the left and right speakers.

SOUND SETTING

MONO

STEREO/

BASS

TREBLE

: turn the left speaker's volume level up.

: turn the right speaker's volume level up.

BALANCE

AI VOLUME

BBE

SPATIALIZER

SUPER BASS

HEADPHONE

LIVE

AI VOLUME

:OK

You can prevent the sudden increase or

decrease of sound that occurs when

changing the channel to another channel or

switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO

mode.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

STEREO / I•II

When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast

programme, you can choose the sound from

Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When

the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,

you can change from stereo to mono sound

so that you can hear the broadcast more

clearly and easily.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and

VIDEO mode can be set separetely.

For example, you can set it to be OFF in

TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.

If you set the AI VOLUME function while

viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,

the setting is registered as the setting for

VIDEO mode.

: Stereo sound

: mono sound

: Bilingual I (sub I)

: Bilingual II (sub II)

MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,

and the sound becomes monaural.

• The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate

as expected if the sound input level from

a broadcast station (or video software) is

extremely low.

• The sound mode you can choose differs

depending on the TV programme.

• This function does not work in the VIDEO

modes.

BBE

You can use the BBE function to enjoy easy-

to-listen sound that is faithful to the original

sound recorded.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound to your liking.

ON :

BASS

This function is turned on.

You can adjust the low tone of the sound.

: weaker

: stronger

OFF :

This function is turned off.

Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE

is a registered trademark of BBE

Sound, inc.

TREBLE

You can adjust the high tone of the sound.

: weaker

: stronger

Using the TV's Menu

TV SPEAKER:

SPATIALIZER

You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"

effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.

You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER

modes.

When this function is on, the TV’s speaker

does not shut off the sound even if head-

phones are connected.

If you set this function to off, the TV’s speaker

does not output the sound when the

headphones are connected.

• You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode

from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.

For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "

on page 9.

OUTPUT:

You can choose the sound from the MAIN-

picture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when

using the headphones.

The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under

lisense from Desper Products,Inc.

• The TV’s speaker does not put out the

sound from the SUB-picture.

SUPER BASS

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by

using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)

function.

• The sound of the SUB-picture is mono

only. You cannot use the STEREO / I • II

function for the sound of the SUB-picture.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

HEADPHONE

This function enables you to output the TV’s

sound from your headphones.

1 Choose HEADPHONE, then

press MENU/OK button.

HEADPHONE

VOLUME

TV SPEAKER

OUTPUT

MAIN

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Use the

and the

button to select,

button to set the

HEADPHONE function. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

VOLUME :

You can adjust the volume of the sound

output from your headphones.

Using the TV's menu

FEATURES menu

BLUE BACK

You can set the TV to automatically change

to a blue screen and mute the sound if the

signal is weak or absent, or when there is no

input from an external device.

FEATURES

SLEEP TIMER

BLUE BACK

CHILD LOCK

CHANNEL GUARD

AUTO SHUTOFF

OFF

VIDEO-3 SETTING

COMPONENT

ON :

:OK

This function is turned on.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

OFF:

This function is turned off.

SLEEP TIMER

You can set the TV to automatically turn off

after a set time.

CHILD LOCK

You can disable the front control buttons of

the TV. When this function is set to ON, the

TV can be operated only by using the remoto

control.

1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then

press the MENU/OK button.

Use this function to prevent children from

operating the TV at their own discretion

(without parent consent).

SLEEP TIMER

OFF

ON :

:OK

This function is turned on.

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

OFF:

This function is turned off.

2 Press the

buttons to set the

period of time.

The TV begins count down from the set

time.

CHANNEL GUARD

When there is a TV channel you do not want

your children to watch, you can lock out the

channel. Even when a child chooses a

programme number for a locked out channel

the screen will change to blue and display

so the channel cannot be viewed.

• You can set the period of time a

maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10

minitue steps.

To cancel this function:

Press the button to set a period of time to

"OFF".

To set this function

1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

press the number 0 (AV) button.

The menu disappers.

SET ID NO.

0000

• One minute before this function turns off

the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.

:OK

• This function cannot be used to turn off

the TV's main power.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

• When this function is on, you can display

the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm

or change the remaining time.

Using the TV’s menu

2 Set the ID number you want.

To view a locked TV

channel

To choose a number:

Press the

buttons.

1 Choose a programme number in

which a TV channel locked with

the number buttons or PR LIST.

To move a cursor:

Press the

buttons.

The screen changes to blue and the

(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.

3 Press the MENU/OK button.

CHANNEL GUARD

CH / CC

• You cannot choose a locked TV channel

with the

buttons.

GUARD

:OK

2 Press the DISPLAY button to

display " ID NO. " (ID unmber

input screen).

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the

buttons to

choose a TV channel.

• The TV shows the TV programme which

the chosen TV channel is now

broadcasting.

ID NO.:

3 Press the number buttons to

enter the ID number.

5 Press the blue button to set this

function to the TV channel.

The lock is temporarily released so you

can view the TV channel.

(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the

TV channel is locked.

If you have forgotten the ID number:

To cancel this function:

Perform step 1 of "To set this function".

After confirming the ID number, press the

TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.

Press the blue button again.

(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and

the lock is released.

• When you would like to cancel the

CHANNEL GUARD function, you must

perform the operation " To set this

function" again.

6 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

The menu disappears.

Using the TV's menu

AUTO SHUTOFF

You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are

received for about 15 minutes or longer after

the end of a broadcast.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not

turn off the TV's main power.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a

VIDEO mode.

VIDEO-3 SETTING

Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly accord-

ing to the video signal input from the external

device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If

this setting is incorrect, images will not be

displayed.

VIDEO :

If a normal video signal (composite video

signal) is input.

COMPONENT :

If a Component video signal (Y/C^B/C^R

signals) is input.

• For detailed connecting methods, see

" Additional preparation " on page 33.

• This Television is compatible with the

Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)

only when the component video signal is

input.

Using the TV’s menu

AUTO PROGRAM

INSTALL menu

INSTALL

20%

LANGUAGE

AUTO PROGRAM

EDIT/MANUAL

:OK

DISP

:BACK

:OK

• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,

:EXIT

press the DISPLAY button.

DISP

:BACK

2 After the TV channels have been

stored in the programme number

list, the EDIT menu appears.

LANGUAGE

You can choose the language you want to

use for the on-screen display from the

language list in a menu.

EDIT

CH/CC

1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press

the MENU/OK button.

LANGUAGE

:OK

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

:OK

TV :EXIT

^DISP.:BACK

• You can proceed to edit the programme

numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL

function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"

on page 28.

2 Press the

buttons to

choose a language.

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

• If a TV cannel you want to view is not

stored in the programme numbers list,

you can register it using the MANUAL

function.

The menu disappers.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page

28.

AUTO PROGRAM

You can automatically register the TV

channels which can be received well at

your residence in the TV's programme

numbers by performing the following.

• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not

store a TV channel to the programme

number 0 (AV).

• If you do not need to use the EDIT/

MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK

button to exit from the EDIT menu.

1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then

press the MENU/OK button.

The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.

The TV channels you receive are

automatically stored in the programme

numbers list.

Using the TV's menu

INSERT:

EDIT/MANUAL

This function adds a new TV channel in the

current programme numbers list by using the

CH/CC number.

The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into

two types:

editing of the current programme numbers

(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a

TV channel you want to view to the

programme number (MANUAL function).

DELETE :

This function deletes a unnecessary TV

Channel.

MANUAL :

CAUTION

• Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT

function rewrites the current programme

numbers list.

Resultingly, the programme number of

some of the TV channels will change.

This function manually registers a new TV

channel in a programme number.

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

• For programme number PR 0, "AV"

appears in the programme numbers list.

• When a TV channel which has been

locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD

function, using the MANUAL function for

that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL

GUARD function.

FUNCTIONS

MOVE

1 Press the

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the button to start the

MOVE function.

• When a TV channel has already been

registered in PR 99, using the INSERT

function deletes the TV channel.

buttons to

1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then

press the MENU/OK button.

EDIT

CH/CC

CC 01

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

STORE

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

3 Press the

buttons to

2 Follow the operation description

of a function you want to use and

operate the function.

choose a new programme

number.

To cancel the MOVE function:

MOVE :

Press the DISPLAY button.

This function changes a programme number

of a TV channel.

4 Press the button to change the

programme number of a TV

channel to a new programme

number.

ID :

This function registers a Channel name (ID)

to a TV channel.

Using the TV’s menu

MANUAL

CH/CC

1 Press the

buttons to

01(B/G)

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the red button to start the

ID function.

3 Enter a channel name (ID).

:OK

SEARCH+

SEARCH-

FINE+

Press the

buttons to

:EXIT

:BACK

SYSTEM

DISP

choose a character.

FINE-

press the

the cursor.

EDIT

buttons to move

To cancel the MANUAL function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

CH/CC

3 Press the button to choose the

system (sound system) for a TV

channel you want to register.

• For the sound systems in each country or

region, see the table "BROADCASTING

SYSTEMS" on page 12.

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the green or red button to

search for a TV channel.

To cancel the ID function:

Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV

channel. Then the TV channel is

displayed.

Press the DISPLAY button.

4 Press the MENU/OK button to

channel.

5 Press the green or red button

repeatedly until the to TV channel

you want appears.

DELETE

1 Press the

If the TV channel reception is poor:

buttons to

Press the bule or yerrow button to

finetune the TV channel.

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the yellow button to delete

the TV channel.

If you cannot hear the normal sound

even when the picture of the TV channel

appers normally:

The TV channel is deleted from the

programme numbers list.

The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the

button and choose a SYSTEM that has

normal sound.

MANUAL

1 Press the

buttons to

6 Press the MENU/OK button and

programme number.

choose a programme number to

which you want to register a new

TV channel.

The normal EDIT menu is resumed.

2 Press the bule button to activate

the MANUAL function.

At the right side following the CH/CC

number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of

the TV channel appears.

Using the TV's menu

INSERT

PREPARATION

• Find the CH/CC number corresponding

to the channel number of the TV channel

from the on page 31.

1 Press the

buttons to

choose a programme number for

which you will register a new TV

channel.

2 Press the green button to start

the INSERT function.

EDIT

CH/CC

:OK

`-9

:EXIT

:BACK

CH/CC

DISP

3 Press the

buttons to

choose "CC" or "CH" according

to the CH/CC number of the TV

channel.

To cancel the INSERT function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

4 Press the Number buttons to

enter the remaining CH/CC

number.

The TV shifts to registration mode.

When the registration is completed, the

picture of the TV channel appears on the

screen.

• The CH/CC number is a number

indicating the broadcast frequency to the

TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV

channel corresponding to the broadcast

frequency indicated by the CH/CC

number, a picture in the no-signal state

appears.

Using the TV’s menu

CH/CC number

When you want to use the INSERT function on page 30, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel

number of the TV channel from this table.

US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.

CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.

OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.

CHINA: The CHINA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in china, etc.

AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.

Channel

OIRT

Channel

OIRT

CCIR

S-1

CHINA

AUSTRALLIA

CCIR

CHINA

DS-1

DS-2

DS-3

DS-7

DS-8

DS-9

AUSTRALLIA

AU-0

AU-1

AU-2

AU-6

AU-7

AU-8

AU-9

CC 01

CC 02

CC 03

CC 04

CC 05

CC 06

CC 07

CC 08

CC 09

CC 10

CC 11

CC 12

CC 13

CC 14

CC 15

CC 16

CC 17

CC 18

CC 19

CC 20

CC 21

CC 22

CC 23

CC 24

CC 25

CC 26

CC 27

CC 28

CC 29

CC 30

CC 31

CC 32

CC 33

CC 34

CC 35

CC 36

CC 37

CC 38

CC 39

CC 40

CC 41

CC 42

CC 43

CC 44

CC 45

CC 46

CC 47

CC 48

CC 49

CC 50

CC 51

CC 52

CC 53

CC 54

CC 55

CC 56

CC 57

CC 58

CC 59

CC 60

CC 61

CC 62

CC 63

CC 64

CC 75

CC 76

CC 77

CC 78

CC 79

CC 95

CC 96

CC 97

CC 98

CC 99

AU-5

CH 02

CH 03

CH 04

CH 05

CH 06

CH 07

CH 08

CH 09

CH 10

CH 11

CH 12

CH 13

CH 14

CH 15

CH 16

CH 17

CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 21

CH 22

CH 23

CH 24

CH 25

CH 26

CH 27

CH 28

CH 29

CH 30

CH 31

CH 32

CH 33

CH 34

CH 35

CH 36

CH 37

CH 38

CH 39

CH 40

CH 41

CH 42

CH 43

CH 44

CH 45

CH 46

CH 47

CH 48

CH 49

CH 50

CH 51

CH 52

CH 53

CH 54

CH 55

CH 56

CH 57

CH 58

CH 59

CH 60

CH 61

CH 62

CH 63

CH 64

CH 65

CH 66

CH 67

CH 68

CH 69

CH 70

US-2

S-2

Z-1

Z-2

Z-3

Z-4

US-3

S-3

US-4

S-4

US-5

S-5

US-6

S-6

AU-5A

US-7

S-7

Z-5

Z-6

Z-7

DS-6

Z-9

Z-10

Z-11

US-8

S-8

US-9

DS-10

DS-11

DS-12

Z-8

S-9

US-10

US-11

US-12

US-13

US-14

US-15

US-16

US-17

US-18

US-19

US-20

US-21

US-22

US-23

US-24

US-25

US-26

US-27

US-28

US-29

US-30

US-31

US-32

US-33

US-34

US-35

US-36

US-37

US-38

US-39

US-40

US-41

US-42

US-43

US-44

US-45

US-46

US-47

US-48

US-49

US-50

US-51

US-52

US-53

US-54

US-55

US-56

US-57

US-58

US-59

US-60

US-61

US-62

US-63

US-64

US-65

US-66

US-67

US-68

US-69

E10

E11

E12

R10

R11

R12

AU-10

AU-11

S-10

S-11

S-12

S-13

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

S-18

S-19

S-20

S-21

S-22

S-23

S-24

S-25

S-26

S-27

S-28

S-29

S-30

S-31

S-32

S-33

S-34

S-35

S-36

S-37

S-38

S-39

S-40

S-41

Z-12

Z-13

Z-14

Z-15

Z-16

Z-17

Z-18

Z-19

Z-20

Z-21

Z-22

Z-23

Z-24

Z-25

Z-26

Z-27

Z-28

Z-29

Z-30

Z-31

Z-32

Z-33

Z-34

Z-35

Z-36

Z-37

E21

E22

E23

E24

E25

E26

E27

E28

E29

E30

E31

E32

E33

E34

E35

E36

E37

E38

E39

E40

E41

E42

E43

E44

E45

E46

E47

E48

E49

E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

E57

E58

E59

E60

E61

E62

E63

E64

E65

E66

E67

E68

E69

DS-13

DS-14

DS-15

DS-16

DS-17

DS-18

DS-19

DS-20

DS-21

DS-22

DS-23

DS-24

W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

W+11

W+12

W+13

W+14

W+15

W+16

W+17

W+18

W+19

W+20

W+21

W+22

W+23

W+24

W+25

W+26

W+27

W+28

DS-25

DS-26

DS-27

DS-28

DS-29

DS-30

DS-31

DS-32

DS-33

DS-34

DS-35

DS-36

DS-37

DS-38

DS-39

DS-40

DS-41

DS-42

DS-43

DS-44

DS-45

DS-46

DS-47

DS-48

DS-49

DS-50

DS-51

DS-52

DS-53

DS-54

DS-55

DS-56

DS-57

Z+1

Z+2

DS-4

DS-5

AU-3

AU-4

A-5

A-4

A-3

A-2

A-1

Using the TV's menu

DEMO menu

DEMO

OFF

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

The DEMO function automatically demo-

strations some of the TV function.

When the DEMO function is set to

ON:

Each time the TV is turned on, the demon-

stration starts automatically.

If you do not want that to happen, set the

DEMO function to OFF.

1 Press the

choose ON.

buttons to

To cancel the DEMO function,

choose off.

2 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the settings.

The DEMO function is set to ON, and the

demostration will start.

To stop the demonstration:

Press one of the button on the remote

control.

Additional preparation

Connecting the external

devices

Connect the devices to the TV, paying

attention to the following connection

diagram.

Before connecting anything:

• Read the manuals provided with the

devices. Depending on the devices, the

connection method may differ from the

figure. In addition, the device settings

may be changed depending on the

connection method to secure proper

operation.

(Behind the cover)

OVER

L/MONO

IN (VIDEO-4)

• Turn off all the devices including the TV.

• The "Specifications" on page 40 contains

the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you

are connecting a device not listed in the

following connection diagram, see the

"Specifications" to choose the best

VIDEO terminal.

• Note that connecting cables are not

supplied.

• When connecting devices that are

supported by AV COMPU LINK, see

"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported

Devices" on page 35.

AUDIO

L/MONOVIDEO

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

L/MONO

OUTPUT

UDIO

VIDEO

VCR (composite signal)

VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

VCR for recording (composite signal)

DVD player (composite signal)

DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

DVD player (component video signals;

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/C^B/C^R

)

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

TV game (composite signal)

TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

Camcorder (composite signal)

Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

Headphones

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

AV COMPU LINK cable

Additional preparation

• In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack

is indicated by "V".

Connecting methods

1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack

and the device's VIDEO OUT

(video output) jack with a video

cable.

2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks

(L/MONO and R) and the

device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R

output) jacks with an audio

cable.

If connecting a device to the TV

with an S-VIDEO cabel :

Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO

output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)

connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of

connecting with a video cable.

If the device's sound output is in

mono :

Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and

the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.

Note that the connection with a video cable

will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to

the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO

cable.

Connecting devices to the

OUTPUT terminal

The signals of the images and sound you are

currently viewing with this TV are output

through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting

a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can

record the currently shown image and sound

to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and

OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.

If connecting a DVD player to the

TV with a component video

cable :

Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, C and C ) in

the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's

COMPONENT (component video output)

jacks with a component video cables,

instead of connection with a video cable.

Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPO-

NENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on

page 26.

1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the

OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's

VIDEO IN (video input) jack with

a video cable.

2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and

R) in the OUTPUT terminal and

the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R

input) jacks with an audio cable.

• This Television is compatible with the

Progressive video signal (525P signal).

(When the component video signal is

input.)

If you have a DVD player that outputs

Progressive video signals (525P) as a

component video signal, then by

attaching the device to the television with

a component video cable you can see

the actual images that are recorded on a

DVD disc as an original image source.

• When you turn off the TV, the signals from

the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.

• The component signals input from the

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot

be output through the OUTPUT terminal.

If connecting a device to the

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal

with a video cable :

Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the

device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with

a video cables.

Connecting Headphones

Connect the headphones with a stereo mini

jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Head-

phone jack at the TV front panel.

Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO

according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page

26.

Additional preparation

Connecting AV COMPU

LINK Supported Devices

AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a

system in which related devices are

automatically controlled when you operate

one device.

Conditions to use the AV

COMPU LINK remote

control system

• A device equipped with an AV COMPU

LINK terminal is required.

• You must connect the TV and the device

with an AV COMPU LINK cable.

AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied

with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable

is unavailable, connect them with a cable

with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at

both ends.

If you apply this system to the TV, you can

have the TV automatically perform the

required operations by operating one

external device. You don't have to use the

TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or

change the VIDEO modes.

• You must connect the device to an

appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up

correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK

remote control system will not function

correctly. For details, see “ Setting up the

AV COMPU LINK remote control

system”.

Examples of the AV

COMPU LINK remote

control system operations

Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a

VCR or a DVD player, you can view images

from the device.

• The TV must be in standby mode (the

POWER lamp lighting red). If the TV’s

Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),

the AV COMPU LINK remote control

system does not function.

Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a

tape with the record safety tab removed) to a

VCR, you can view the tape.

Simply by operating the AV Control Rece-

iver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in

standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed

correctly.

Setting up the AV COMPU

LINK remote control system

• The performance of the AV COMPU

LINK remote control system varies

depending on the connected device.

See the device’s instruction manual.

CAUTION:

• With some devices, the setup method

differs from the ones explained here.

Be sure to read the device’s instruction

manual thoroughly before setting it up.

• When you select "TV SOUND" as the

input source with the AV Control

Receiver, there are cases where the TV's

MUTING function automatically operates

and the sound from the TV's speakers is

muted.

In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+

buttons or the MUTING button on the

TV's remote control to cancel the MUT-

ING function. You can regain the sound

from the TV's speakers.

1 Connect the device to the TV’s

VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.

If you want to connect a DVD

player to the TV with a compo-

nent video cable :

Connect the DVD player to the TV’s VIDEO-3

terminal.

• For detailed connecting instructions, see

"Connecting the external devices" on

page 33.

Additional Preparation

2 Connect the TV’s AV COMPU

LINK terminal and the device’s

AV COMPU LINK terminal with

an AV COMPU LINK cable.

3 Change the device’s setting

according to the VIDEO terminal

it is connected to.

If a VCR is connected to the

VIDEO-1 terminal :

Set the VCR’s remote control code to A code.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-1 terminal:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD2.

If a VCR is connected to the

VIDEO-2 terminal:

Set the VCR’s remote control code to B code.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-2 terminal:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD3.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-3 terminal with a

component video cable:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD1.

• For instructions on how to change the

device’s setting, refer to the device’s

instruction manual.

• If the device you are connecting has

neither the remote control code nor the

AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it

to the TV’s VIDEO-1 terminal.

Troubleshooting

If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before

you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if

the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think

there is a problem with the TV itself.

Important:

• This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.

If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to

the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.

• After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the

functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re -

quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the

rearcover of the TV.

If you cannot turn on

the TV

• Is the AC plug connected to the AC

outlet?

Poor picture

• If noise totally obscures the picture (sn-

ow), the aerial or aerial cable may have

trouble. Check the following to try to

solve the trouble :

• Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the

Main power button.

Has the TV and aerial been

connected properly?

Has the aerial cable been damaged?

Is the aerial pointed to the right dir-

ection?

No picture/No sound

• Have you chosen a TV channel whose

reception is extremely bad? In this case,

the BLUE BACK function will be activat-

ed, the entire screen becomes blue, and

the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you

want to view the TV channel, follow the

description "BLUE BACK" on page 24 to

try to change the BLUE BACK function

setting to OFF.

Is the aerial itself faulty?

• If the TV or aerial receives interference

from the other devices, stripes or noise

may appear in the picture. Move such

device as an amplifier, personal compu-

ter, or a hair drier that can cause inter-

ference away from your TV, or try chan-

ging its location. If the aerial suffers int-

erference from a radio tower or high-

voltage wire, please contact your local

dealer.

• Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for

the TV channels correct?

Forrow the description “SOUND SYSTEM

Button” on page 12 to try to solve the

trouble.

• If the TV receives interferences from

signal reflecting from mountains or

building, double-pictures(ghosting) will

occur.

Try to change the aerial’s direction or

replace the antenna with the one with

better directionality.

Troubleshooting

• Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for

the TV channels correct? Follow the

description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"

on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.

• Have you attempted to use the remote

control at the sides or rear of the TV or at

a location more than seven meters apart

from the TV location? Operate the remote

control in the front of your TV or a

• Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controll-

ed properly? Follow the description

"Adjusting the picture" on page 18 to try

to adjust them properly.

location less than seven meters from

your TV to try to solve the ploblem.

• Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?

If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,

you cannot operate the TV with the front

control buttons of the TV. Follow the

description "CHILD LOCK" on page 24

to try to set the CHILD LOCK function to

OFF.

• When a white and bright still image (su-

ch as a white dress) is displayed on the

screen, the white part may look as if it

were coloured.

It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to

the nature of the picture tube itself, and

not due to a TV failure.

When the picture disappears from the

screen, the unnatural colours will also

disappear.

• If the TV operation becomes disabled

suddenly, press the Main power button

on the TV and turn off the main power.

Try to press the Main power button again

to turn on the main power. If the TV

returns to a normal state, it is not a

failure.

• When viewing images from commercially

available video softwear products, or vi-

deos from videotapes which have been

recored improperly, the top of the image

may be distored.

• The following functions do not operate

when receiving Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal);

Remote control function:

ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and

STROBE BUTTON

MENU function:

SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure

and ZOOM

This is due to the condition of the video

signal, and not because of malfunction.

Poor sound

• Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE

properly? If not, follow the description

"Adjusting the Sound" on page 22 to try

to adjust them properly.

• When the TV channel reception is poor, it

can be hard to hear the stereo or

bilingual sound. In this case, follow the

description "STEREO / I • II" on page 22

to hear the sound more easily by

changing it to a mono sound.

Operation disabled

• Have the batteries of the remote control

become exhausted?

Follow the description "Putting the

Batteries into the Remote Control" on

page 4 and replace them with new

batteries to try solve the problem.

Troubleshooting

• Touching the screen may cause you feel

a slight electric shock due to its static

electricity.

It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to

the construction of the picture tube. It is

not a problem with the TV.

You can rest assured that this static dis-

charge does not have harmful influence

over the human boby.

Other concerns

•

When the SLEEP TIMER function or AUTO

SHUTOFF function operates, the TV is

automatically turned off.

If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to press

the POWER button to turn on the TV once

again. At this time, if the TV resumes a

normal state, there is no problem.

• If you do not want sound emitted from the

TV’s speakers when using headphones,

change the TV SPEAKER setting in the

HEADPHONE menu to OFF. For details,

see "HEADPHONE" on page 23.

• If you bring a magnetised device such

as a speaker near to your TV, a picture

may be warped or unnatural colours

appear at the corners of the screen.

In this case, keep the device apart from

your TV. If the speaker causes such

phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded

speaker instead.

• A picture may be tilted due to the influe-

nce of the earth's magnetism. In this

case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page

21 to complete the tilt.

• It takes a short period of time from the

time an operation such as changing

channels is performed until an image is

displayed. This is not a malfunction.

This is the time required for the image to

stabilize before it can be displayed.

• The TV may emit a crackling sound due

to a sudden change in temperature. It

does not matter if a picture or sound

does not show any abnormality. If you

hear crackling sounds frequently while

you are viewing the TV, other causes may

be assumed.

For precautionary purposes, request

your service technician to inspect it.

Specifications

Broadcasting systems

Colour systems

Channels and frequencies

B, G, I, D, K, K1, M

PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz

VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz

VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz

UHF channel (U)

=471.25 to 863.25 MHz

Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),

super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).

A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system

AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz

Sound-multiplex systems

Power requirements

Audio output

Rated Power output: 20W + 20W

VIDEO-1 terminal

RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1

• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs

are available.

VIDEO-2 terminal

RCA connector X 3

• Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.

RCA connector X 5

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

terminal

• Video input/Component video (Y/C /C ) input and Audio

L/R inputs are available.

• Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.

RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1

• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs

are available.

VIDEO-4 terminal

OUTPUT terminal

RCA connector X 3

• Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.

Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)

Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C215)

Headphone jack

Accessories

AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2

Speakers

HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2

HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2

HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W

HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W

HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm

HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm

HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm

HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm

HV-34LPZ : 75kg

Power consumption

Screen size

(measured diagonally)

Dimensions(W X H X D)

Weight

HV-29LPZ : 48kg

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any

commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent

of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

HV-34LPZ

HV-29LPZ

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

LCT1217-001A-H

0402-Ki-NV-JMT

非常感謝您惠購此JVC牌彩色電視機。

請在使用前熟讀此使用說明書，以掌握新電視機的使用方法。

警告：

為了防止發生火災或觸電的危險，請勿將本機曝露於雨中或受潮。

注意：

為了保證人身安全，請遵守下列有關使用本機的注意事項。

1 僅在電視機背面所示的電源範圍內使用。

2 防止損壞電源線和插頭。從電視機上拔下插頭時，請抓住插頭，勿拉電

源線。

3 切勿堵塞或遮蓋通風口。

切勿將本機放置在通風不良之處。

安裝電視機時，在電視機周圍應留有大於圖示的最小距離的空間，以便

通風。

15 cm

10 cm

15 cm

4 請勿讓物體或液體進入本機的縫隙內。

5 本機發生故障時，請拔下插頭，讓維修服務人員修理。

請勿自行維修或拆下後蓋。

6 電視屏幕的表面易於損壞。操作電視機時請多加小心。如果電視屏幕弄

髒時，請用乾的軟布擦拭。切勿用力摩擦。切勿使用任何清潔劑或去垢

劑。

7 長期不使用電視機時，請務必將電源插頭從交流電源插座上撥下。

安裝電視機

注意

• 連接前，請關閉包括本機在內的所有設備。

1 連接天線和錄像機

• 未附帶天線。請使用優質的75歐姆同軸線。

• 連接前，請閱讀錄像機的使用說明書。

圖A

如果不連接VCR（錄像機）時（參照圖A）：

請將天線與電視機的天線插座連接。

如果連接VCR時（參照圖B）：

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

1 將天線與VCR的天線輸入插座連接，

並用另一根天線連接VCR和電視機。

2 用視頻電纜將VCR的VIDEO OUT

（視頻輸出）插口和電視機的VIDEO

（視頻）插口連接起來。

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

用S-VIDEO（超級－視頻）電纜連接VCR和電視

機時：

AV COMPULINK

用S-VIDEO電纜A來代替視頻電纜，將VCR的

S-VIDEO OUT（超級-視頻輸出）接口與電視機

的S接口連接起來。

圖B

3 用音頻電纜將VCR的VIDEO OUT

（音頻L/R輸出）插口和電視機的

AUDIO（音頻）插口（L/MONO和

R）連接起來。

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

• 如果VCR的音頻輸出為單聲道時，請用音頻

電纜將VCR的AUDIO OUT（音頻輸出）插口

和電視機的AUDIO L/MONO插口連接起來。

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

• 如果VCR帶有AV COMPU LINK端子，則可

使用AV COMPU LINK功能。詳細說明，請

參閱第35頁上的“連接支持AV COMPU

LINK的裝置”。

安裝電視機

2 連接電源線

將插頭插入交流電源插座。

3 將電池裝入遙控器

請使用兩節AA/R6/5號電池。

從負.極裝入電池，請勿搞錯正,極和負.極。

• 請遵守印刷在電池上的警告事項。

• 如果遙控器工作不正常，請更換電池。

• 附帶的電池僅供安裝和測試電視機之用，請盡

快換上新電池。

4 初始設定

首次打開電視機時，將進入初始設定模式，顯示

JVC標記。

1 按下電視機上的主電源按鈕。

打開電視機，顯示JVC標記。

• 如果電視機上的電源指示燈保持紅色而不變成

綠色，則說明電視機處在待機狀態。請按下遙

控器上的POWER按鈕來打開電視機。

• 如果不出現JVC標記，則說明電視機已被打開

過。此時，請利用“語言”和“自動程序”功

能進行初始設定。詳細說明，請參閱第27頁

上的“導入菜單”。

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

2 按下MENU/OK按鈕。

出現語言菜單。可選擇用於在屏幕上顯示的語

POWER指示燈

言。

主電源按鈕

DISP.

安裝電視機

3 按下

按鈕，選擇中文。然後按

POWER

TV/VIDEO

下MENU/OK按鈕。

自動程序功能啟動。

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

接收到的電視頻道被自動登錄在節目號碼一覽

內。

20%

RETURN

DISP.

MULTI

• 要取消自動程序功能時，請按下DISPLAY按

鈕。

MUTING

4 電視頻道被登錄在節目號碼（编排）

一覽內後，出現编缉菜單。

PIP

SUB-P

CH/CC

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

DISP.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

• 可利用編輯/手動功能編輯節目號碼一覽。詳

細說明，請參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手動”。

• 如果想觀看的電視頻道未被存儲在節目號碼一

覽內，請利用手動功能將其登錄。詳細說明請

參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手動”。

• 自動程序功能不會將電視頻道存儲在節目號碼

0（AV）內。

• 如果無需使用編輯/手動功能時，請按下

MENU/OK按鈕，關閉編輯菜單。

安裝結束，請欣賞新的JVC電視機。

電視機按鈕和功能

打開主電源

按下主電源按鈕 1。

POWER指示燈 2 亮紅燈，電視機變為待機模

式。

關閉主電源：

再次按下主電源按鈕。

POWER指示燈 2 熄滅。

從待機模式打開電視機

按下CHANNEL m 按鈕 5。

POWER指示燈 2 從紅色變為綠色，電視機被

打開。

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• 在待機模式時，按下TV/VIDEO按鈕 3 也

可打開電視機。

選擇電視頻道

8 2

按下CHANNEL m 按鈕 5。

選擇視頻端子

按下TV/VIDEO按鈕 3 或CHANNEL

m 按鈕 5。

調節音量

按下VOLUME m 按鈕 4。

出現音量水準指示器。

MENU按鈕 6

按下可打開菜單。

（蓋板後面）

詳細說明，請參閱第17頁上的“用電視機上的

按鈕進行操作”。

OVER

L/MONO

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

IN (VIDEO-4)

遙控器電子眼和ECO電子眼 9

ECO指示燈 7

如果將數字ECO電子眼功能設為開或顯示，則

6 5 4 3

ECO指示燈將亮燈。

SPATIALIZER指示燈 8

如果將環繞控制鍵功能設為單聲道或現場，則

SPATIALIZER指示燈將亮燈。

電視機按鈕和功能

耳機插口 0

將耳機與立體聲微型插口（直徑3.5mm）相

連。

使用耳機時，請按照第23頁上的“耳機”的

步驟操作。

VIDEO-1端子 =

• 請參閱第３頁和第33頁。

UDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

UDIO

R ^AL/MONO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-2端子 ~

• 請參閱第33頁。

AUDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

端子 !

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

• 請參閱第26頁和第33頁。

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R ^AUDL^I/^OMONO

VIDEO-4端子 -

• 請參閱第33頁。

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPU LINK

OUTPUT端子 @

• 請參閱第33頁。

天線插座 #

連接天線。

• 請參閱第3頁。

AV COMPU LINK端子 $

• 請參閱第33頁和第35頁。

遙控器按鈕和功能

從待機模式打開電視機

按下POWER按鈕。

POWER指示燈從紅色變為綠色，電視機被打開。

POWER

TV/VIDEO

• 按下TV/VIDEO按鈕、CHANNEL m 按鈕或數字按

鈕也可從待機模式打開電視機。

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

關閉電視機：

再次按下POWER按鈕。

POWER指示燈從綠色變為紅色，電視機進入待機模式。

RETURN

選擇電視頻道

選擇已設定電視頻道的節目號碼。

MULTI

按下CHANNEL m 按鈕或用數字按鈕輸入節

目號碼（编排）。

MUTING

• 如要將兩位數輸入電視機，請按下-/--按鈕，改為兩位

數輸入系統。

• 可從編排一覽中選擇頻道。詳細說明，請參閱第11頁

PIP

SUB-P

上的“DISPLAY（顯示）按鈕”。

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

• 如果畫面不清晰或無色彩時，請按照第11頁上的

“COLOUR SYSTEM（彩色制式）按鈕”的步驟操

作。

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

• 如果即使正常顯示圖像，也不能正常聽見聲音時，請

按照第12頁上的“SOUND SYSTEM（聲音制式）按

鈕”的步驟操作。

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

調節音量

按下VOLUME m 按鈕。

• 不可調節耳機的音量。請按照第23頁上的“耳機”的

操作步驟操作。

觀看來自外接裝置的圖像

選擇連接著外接裝置的VIDEO端子。

按下TV/VIDEO按鈕。

• 可用CHANNEL m 按鈕或從編排一覽選擇VIDEO端

子。

調回電視頻道：

按下TV/VIDEO按鈕、CHANNEL m 按鈕或數字按鈕。

遙控器按鈕和功能

16:9

MUTING（靜音）按鈕

此模式將普通畫面（4:3縱橫比）轉變為

寬屏幕畫面（16:9縱橫比）。

按下MUTING按鈕，關閉音量。再次按

下MUTING按鈕，可恢復至原先的音

量。

ZOOM（鏡頭）按鈕

可根據畫面縱橫比改變屏幕尺寸。請從下列鏡頭

模式中選擇最合適的一個。

• 用於被壓縮成普通畫面（4:3縱橫比）

的16:9縱橫比的畫面時，可恢復原來

尺寸。

按下ZOOM按鈕，選擇一個模式。

• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信

號）時按下ZOOM按鈕，則會在屏幕上顯示

“525P”，鏡頭功能不起作用。

SPATIALIZER（環繞控制

鍵）按鈕

常规

利用環繞控制鍵功能，可欣賞帶有“現

用於以原有尺寸觀看普通圖像（4:3縱橫比）。

場”效果的環繞聲音。

按下SPATIALIZER按鈕，選擇模

式。

现场：

利用現場模式，可欣賞被轉換成帶有深度

和周圍環境的環繞聲音的普通立體聲。

镜头

可將寬屏幕圖像（16:9縱橫比）充滿電視屏幕。

单声道：

利用單聲道模式，可欣賞被轉換成像立體

聲的普通單聲。

关：

環繞控制鍵功能不工作。

• 寬屏幕圖像（16:9縱橫比）的左側和右側將被

去掉。

• 現場模式僅在立體聲時正常工作。

• 使用耳機時，現場模式不能正常工

作。

• 單聲道模式僅在單聲時正常工作。

SPATIALIZER係經Desper

Products,Inc.公司授權製造。

遙控器按鈕和功能

將電視頻道登錄為“調回頻道”：

選擇已設定節目號碼的需登錄頻道的節目

號碼，並持續按住RETURN+按鈕３秒鐘

以上。將顯示“快退已設定！”，登錄結

束。

BASS（低音）按鈕

利用超重低音（超重低音回聲）功能，可

欣賞強勁有力的低音。

按下BASS按鈕，打開或關閉超重

低音功能。

取消“調回頻道”的登錄：

觀看任一電視頻道時，持續按住RETURN+

按鈕３秒鐘以上。將顯示“快退已取消！”，

登錄被取消。

开：

打開此功能。

关：

• 關閉電視機時，“調回頻道”的登錄被

取消。

關閉此功能。

• 如想交替觀看“調回頻道”和另一電視

頻道，請先選擇不是“調回頻道”的頻

道，然後按下RETURN+按鈕，將頻道

轉換為“調回頻道”。用這一方法，僅

需按下RETURN+按鈕，便可交替觀看

兩個頻道。

PICTURE MODE（畫面模

式）按鈕

可選擇三種畫面模式（三種畫面設定）中

的一種，自動調節畫面設定。

頻道調回功能：

按下PICTURE MODE按鈕，選擇

模式。

電視機將當前電視頻道前選擇的電視頻道

作為“最後頻道”暫時記憶下來。按下

RETURN+按鈕，可交替觀看當前電視頻

道和“最後頻道”。

亮度：

增強對比度和銳度。

• 如想利用頻道調回功能交替觀看兩個頻

道，請先選擇一個電視頻道，然後用數

字按鈕選擇另一個電視頻道。如未用數

字按鈕選擇電視頻道，則有可能不是將

您先選擇的頻道登錄為“最後頻道”。

普通：

標準畫面調節。

柔和：

使對比度和銳度變得柔和。

RETURN＋（頻道調回＋）

按鈕

RETURN+按鈕具有兩個功能：頻道調回

＋功能和頻道調回功能。如果某個頻道被

登錄為“調回頻道”，則頻道調回＋功能

起作用。如未設定“調回頻道”，則頻道

調回功能起作用。

頻道調回＋功能：

將經常觀看的頻道登錄為“調回頻道”，

可在任何時候僅需按下RETURN+按鈕，

就可選擇此頻道。

遙控器按鈕和功能

/ 按鈕

選擇電視頻道或視頻端子

觀看雙重語言聲音廣播節目時，可從雙重語

言Ⅰ（副聲音Ⅰ）或雙重語言Ⅱ（副聲音

Ⅱ）中選擇聲音。若接收立體聲廣播節目不

理想時，可將立體聲改變為單聲，以便更清

楚地收聽廣播。

1 按下DISPLAY按鈕，顯示编排一

览。

2 按下

目號碼或視頻端子。

和

按鈕，選擇節

然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。

• 對於設有頻道鎖定功能的節目號碼，則會

在編排一覽中的節目號碼旁顯示（頻道

鎖定）標記。

按下

式。

/ 按鈕，選擇聲音模

：立體聲

• 視頻端子登錄在節目號碼編排 99之後。

：單聲

：雙重語言Ⅰ（副聲音Ⅰ）

：雙重語言Ⅱ（副聲音Ⅱ）

COLOUR SYSTEM（彩色制

式）按鈕

單聲道：取消多聲道功能，聲音變成單聲

自動選擇彩色制式。但是，如果圖像不清晰

或無色彩，請手動選擇彩色制式。

道。

• 可選擇的聲音模式由電視節目而定。

按下COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕，選

擇合適的彩色制式。

• 在視頻模式時，此功能不起作用。

自动：

DISPLAY（顯示）按鈕

可在屏幕上顯示編排一覽、節目號碼或視頻

此功能從輸入信號中檢測彩色制式。

端子號碼。

• 如果信號品質不佳，則自動功能可能不能

正常發揮作用。如在自動功能時畫面不理

想，請手動選擇其他彩色制式。

按下DISPLAY按鈕。

按下DISPLAY按鈕，如下所示地變換顯示：

• 自動模式從輸入信號中檢測彩色制式，並

自動選擇合適的彩色制式。

• 需改變子畫面的彩色制式時，請參閱第

15頁上的“改變子畫面的彩色制式”的

詳細說明。

• 有關各國或各地區的彩色制式，請參閱第

12頁上的“廣播制式”。

+10

-10

遙控器按鈕和功能

SOUND SYSTEM（聲音制

式）按鈕

廣播制式

有關所在國家或地區的聲音制式和彩色制

式，請參閱下表。

自動選擇聲音制式。但是，當畫面正常而卻

不能正常地收聽聲音時，請手動選擇聲音制

式。

按下SOUND SYSTEM按鈕，選擇

合適的聲音制式。

PAL

B/G ：B/G制式

PAL

：I制式

SECAM

D/K ：D/K制式

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

：M制式

• 在視頻模式時此功能不起作用。

PAL

• 有關各國或各地區的聲音制式，請參閱

第12頁上的“廣播制式”。

PAL

SECAM

B/G

D/K

B/G

D/K

B/G

遙控器按鈕和功能

• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P

信號）時按下STROBE按鈕，則會在屏幕

上顯示“525P”，頻閃功能不起作用。

FREEZE（畫面暫停）按鈕

可像子畫面一樣觀看主畫面的暫停圖像。

按下FREEZE按鈕。

• 即使是觀看NTSC彩色制式的節目，也不

能改變對屏幕上的靜態圖像的色彩微調

設定。

■使用多畫面功能

可顯示多個畫面，以便易於找到所需觀看的

節目。

取消畫面暫停功能：

再次按下FREEZE按鈕。

1 按下MULTI按鈕。

按下MULTI按鈕，如下所示地改變顯

示。

• 當在屏幕上顯示子畫面或主畫面時，不

可使用FREEZE按鈕。

• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P

信號）時按下FREEZE按鈕，則會在屏幕

上顯示“525P”，畫面暫停功能不起作

用。

STROBE（頻閃）按鈕

可以15張連續的靜止圖像方式觀看主畫面。

按下STROBE按鈕。

取消頻閃功能：

按下STROBE按鈕，回到主畫面。

• 如果主畫面的信號水準較弱，則靜止圖

像不正常。

顯示下一個多畫面：

按下NEXT按鈕。

• 當在屏幕上顯示子畫面或主畫面時，不

可使用STROBE按鈕。

遙控器按鈕和功能

2 用

■使用PIP功能

可同時觀看兩個畫面（主畫面和子畫面）。

和

按鈕，選擇所需

畫面，然後按下MENU/OK按

鈕。

按下PIP按鈕。

屏幕跳至所選的電視頻道或視頻模式。

按下PIP按鈕，如下所示地改變顯示：

• 不顯示未登錄電視頻道的節目號碼或設

定頻道鎖定的節目號碼。

• 不能進行耳機音量調節等菜單操作。請

先取消多畫面功能後，再進行菜單操

作。

• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P

信號）時按下MULTI按鈕，則會在屏幕

上顯示“525P”，多畫面功能不起作

用。

• 關閉多畫面顯示的一瞬間，電視機不發

出聲音。

PIP

• 不可同時從主畫面和子畫面觀看同一節

目號碼（或同一視頻端子）的圖像。

• 如果主畫面信號不佳，則子畫面的信號

品質可能也較差。

• 如果兩個畫面的畫面標準不同，則頂部

和底部或其中之一可能會沒有。

• 用PIP功能觀看畫面時，鏡頭功能不起作

用。

• 不能從電視機輸出子畫面。

• 如果在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P

信號）時按下PIP按鈕，則會在屏幕上顯

示“525P”，PIP功能不起作用。

遙控器按鈕和功能

為子畫面選擇電視頻道

POSITION（位置）按鈕

利用畫中畫模式時，可調節子畫面的位置。

按下SUB-P m 按鈕。

反復按下POSITION按鈕。

每按一次POSITION按鈕，子畫面按逆時針

方向移動一次。

收聽子畫面的聲音

在收聽機內揚聲器發出的主畫面的聲音的同

時，可用耳機收聽子畫面的聲音。

詳細說明，請參閱第23頁上的“耳機”。

改變子畫面的彩色制式

1 顯示子畫面時，按下MENU/OK按

鈕，顯示菜单（主菜單）。

2 按下

特征，然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。

3 按下按鈕，選擇彩色制式，然

和

按鈕，選擇画面

SWAP（交換）按鈕

可將主畫面和子畫面互換。

後按下MENU/OK按鈕。

按下SWAP按鈕。

NTSC 3.58

DISP.

4 按下

按下

按鈕，選擇子画面，然後

按鈕，選擇合適的彩色制

式。然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。

• 不能用遙控器上的COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕

改變子畫面的彩色制式。

• 在將電視機輸出錄製在錄像機上時，請

勿按下SWAP按鈕。如果按下SWAP按

鈕，將會改變輸出信號。

使用電視機菜單

本電視機有許多可利用菜單進行操作的功能。

為了充分利用電視機的所有功能，需徹底理解基本的菜單操作技術。

基本操作

POWER

TV/VIDEO

1 按下MENU/OK按鈕，顯示菜单（主

菜單）。

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

RETURN

DISP.

MULTI

• 菜單底部的顯示說明操作所選功能時可使用的

遙控器的按鈕。

MUTING

MENU/OK

TV/VIDEO

DISPLAY

PIP

SUB-P

PIP

DISP.

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

2 按下

和

按鈕，選擇菜單標

題，並按下MENU/OK按鈕。

出現菜單。

返回到前一菜單：

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

按下DISPLAY按鈕。

立刻退出菜單：

按下TV/VIDEO按鈕。

3 按下

按鈕，選擇功能。

• 有關菜單中的功能的詳細說明，請參閱下一頁

開始的說明。

使用電視機菜單

4 按下

設定。

按鈕，選擇該功能的

• 如要操作僅顯示名字的功能，請根據下

一頁開始的該功能的說明進行操作。

5 按下MENU/OK按鈕，結束設

定。

菜單消失。

• 觀看NTSC制式的電視時，菜單顯示在正

常垂直尺寸的約一半處。

用電視機上的按鈕進行操作

也可利用電視機前面板上的按鈕操作菜單。

按鈕

TV/VIDEO

按鈕

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

• 在電視機前面板上沒有具有DISPLAY或

色彩按鈕功能的按鈕。

使用電視機菜單

畫面設定菜單

亮度

可調節畫面亮度。

：較暗淡

：較明亮

銳度

E C O

DISP.

可調節畫面銳度。

：較柔和

：較尖銳

• 在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信

號）時，不能選擇畫面銳度功能。

■畫面模式

可選擇三種畫面模式中的一種，自動調節畫

面設定。

色彩

亮度：

可調節畫面色彩。

：較淡

增強對比度和銳度。

：較濃

普通：

標準畫面調節。

色彩微調

可調節畫面色彩微調。

：偏紅

柔和：

使對比度和銳度變得柔和。

：偏綠

• 也可用遙控器上的PICTURE MODE按鈕

操作畫面模式。

• 僅當彩色制式為NTSC 3.58或NTSC 4.43

時，可改變畫面色彩微調設定。

詳細說明，請參閱第10頁上的

“PICTURE MODE（畫面模式）按鈕”。

• 在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信

號）時，不能選擇畫面色彩微調功能。

■畫面調節

返回到各画面模式的默認設定值：

按下藍色按鈕。將當前選擇的畫面模式中的

畫面設定值返回到默認設定值，並將其再次

存儲於畫面模式內。

可根據需要，改變各畫面模式的畫面設定。

改變的畫面設定被存儲於畫面模式內。

系統組成

可調節畫面對比度。

：較低

：較高

使用電視機菜單

■黑白對比

畫面特征菜單

可選擇三種黑白對比模式（白色的三種色

度）中的一種，調節畫面的黑白對比。因為

白色被用於作為所有其他各種色彩的基準，

所以改變黑白對比模式將影響屏幕上的所有

其他各種色彩。

VNR

DigiPure

PULL DOWN

DISP.

灰暗：

藍白色。觀看明亮圖像時使用這一模式，可

欣賞生動明快的畫面。

■數字VNR

數字VNR功能會減少原來圖像的噪音量。

普通：

普通白色。

• 在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信

號）時，不能選擇數字VNR功能。

暖色：

紅白色。觀看影片時使用這一模式，可欣賞

影片所特有的色彩。

自动：

電視機會根據畫面的噪音量自動調節數字

• 在雙畫面模式或鏡頭功能的16:9模式

時，不能選擇黑白對比功能。

VNR的效果，以顯示最佳畫面。

• 如果數字VNR效果設得太高，則會使畫

面銳度太低。如有可能，推薦利用自動

設定。

■數字ECO電子眼

如將數字ECO電子眼功能設定為開，則將根

據房間的亮度自動調節屏幕的對比度。這可

減輕眼睛疲勞並可節省電視機的電力。

最大：

將數字VNR效果設為最大。若將數字VNR功

能設定為自動但感到仍有噪音時，請將設定

從自動改為最大。

开：

數字ECO電子眼功能工作。

• 最大設定不適合於帶有許多噪音的低質

圖像。

关：

數字ECO電子眼功能不工作。

最小：

將數字 VNR 效果設為最小。若將數字VNR

功能設定為自動但感到未充分反映原來圖像

的銳度時，請將設定從自動改為最小。

显示：

ECO電子眼功能工作。每當房間亮度變化

時，表示房間亮度的三葉草標記

會顯示幾

秒鐘。房間變暗時，顯示在屏幕上的三葉草

標記會增加。

• 最小設定不適合於帶有很少噪音的高質

圖像。

使用電視機菜單

■DigiPure

■PULL DOWN

DigiPure功能利用最新數字技術，使畫面顯

得自然。DigiPure功能包括下列兩個功能。

利用PULL DOWN功能可在屏幕上更清楚自

然地顯示影片畫面。

DigiPure功能：

此功能透過去除高對比度和鮮明圖像的無需

自动：

下拉功能工作。一般將此功能設為自動。

的邊角，使畫面顯得自然。

关：

而對於低對比度的圖像，則添加邊角，以變

得更尖銳更清晰。

下拉功能不工作。

可從自動、最小和最大中選擇DigiPure功能

的設定值。

• 觀看NTSC彩色制式的動態圖像時可能會

顯得不自然。為使動態圖像更清楚，請

將PULL DOWN功能從自動改為關。

畫面移動補償功能：

此功能可在屏幕上自然地顯示快速移動的圖

像（例如足球場上的球員或足球）。

• 在雙畫面模式或畫面模式為畫面時不能

選擇此功能。

• 在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信

號）時，不能選擇DigiPure功能。

自动：

電視機會根據畫面的噪音量自動調節

DigiPure的效果，以顯示最佳畫面。

• 如對帶有許多噪音的低質圖像將DigiPure

效果設得太高，則可能會使噪音惡化。

如有可能，推薦利用自動設定。

最大：

將DigiPure效果設為最大。若將DigiPure功

能設定為自動但感到未充分反映原來圖像的

品質時，請將設定從自動改為最大。

• 最大設定不適合於帶有許多噪音的低質

圖像。

最小：

將DigiPure效果設為最小。若將DigiPure功

能設定為自動但感到有噪音時，請將設定從

自動改為最小。

• 最小設定不適合於帶有很少噪音的高質

圖像。

关：

DigiPure功能不工作。

使用電視機菜單

按鈕，選擇镜头模

2 按下

■彩色制式

式。然後按下MENU/OK按鈕。

畫面擴展，並顯示所選的鏡頭模式約5秒

鐘。

自動選擇彩色制式。但是，如果畫面不清晰

或無色彩，請手動選擇彩色制式。

1 選擇彩色制式，然後按下MENU/

• 可從常規、鏡頭或16:9模式中選擇鏡頭

模式。詳細說明，請參閱第９頁上的

“ZOOM（鏡頭）按鈕”。

OK按鈕。

• 在接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信

號）時，不能選擇鏡頭功能。

DISP.

■畫面糾正

有的地方地球的磁力會使畫面歪斜。此時，

可將其糾正。

2 按下

按鈕，選擇合適的彩色

制式。然後按下MENU/OK按

鈕。

1 選擇画面纠正，然後按下MENU/

OK按鈕。

• 改變子畫面的彩色制式時，請參閱第15

頁上的“改變子畫面的彩色制式”詳細

說明。

• 可用遙控器上的COLOUR SYSTEM按鈕

操作彩色制式功能。詳細說明，請參閱

第11頁上的“COLOUR SYSTEM（彩色

制式）按鈕”。

DISP.

■鏡頭

2 按下

按鈕，直至畫面變得

水平。然後按下MENU/OK按

鈕。

可根據畫面縱橫比改變屏幕尺寸。請選擇三

種鏡頭模式中的最合適的一種。

1 選擇镜头，然後按下MENU/OK

按鈕。

DISP.

使用電視機菜單

聲音設定菜單

平衡

可在左右揚聲器間調節音量的平衡。

：提高左揚聲器的音量。

：提高右揚聲器的音量。

BBE

■自動音控

當從一個頻道變到另一個頻道或從一種視頻

模式變為另一種視頻模式時，可防止聲音突

然變高或變低。

DISP.

开：

■立體聲/Ⅰ•Ⅱ

自動音控功能工作。

觀看雙重語言聲音廣播節目時，可從雙重語

言Ⅰ（副聲音Ⅰ）或雙重語言Ⅱ（副聲音

Ⅱ）中選擇聲音。若接收立體聲廣播節目不

理想時，可將立體聲改變為單聲，以便更清

楚地收聽廣播。

关：

自動音控功能不工作。

• 可分別對電視模式和視頻模式設定自動

音控功能。例如，可對電視模式設定為

關，而對視頻模式設定為開。如果在觀

看來自視頻端子的圖像時設定自動音控

功能，則此設定值被登錄為對視頻模式

的設定。

：立體聲

：單聲

：雙重語言Ⅰ（副聲音Ⅰ）

：雙重語言Ⅱ（副聲音Ⅱ）

• 如果來自廣播電台（或視頻軟體）的聲

音輸入水準極低，則自動音控功能可能

不理想。

單聲道：取消多聲道功能，聲音變成單聲

道。

• 可選擇的聲音模式由電視節目而定。

■BBE

可利用BBE功能，欣賞易於收聽並忠實於所

錄製的原有聲音的聲音。

• 在視頻模式時，此功能不起作用。

■聲音調節

开：

可根據需要調節聲音。

BBE功能工作。

低音

关：

可調節聲音的低音。

：較弱

BBE功能不工作。

經BBE Sound,Inc.許可。BBE是

BBE Sound,Inc.的注冊商標。

：較強

高音

可調節聲音的高音。

：較弱

：較強

使用電視機菜單

音量：

■環繞控制鍵

可調節從耳機輸出的音量。

利用環繞控制鍵功能，可欣賞帶有“現場”

效果的環繞聲音。可選擇兩種環繞控制鍵模

式之一。

机内扬声器：

當此功能為開時，則即使連接耳機時也不關

閉機內揚聲器。

• 可從現場、單聲道和關中選擇環繞控制

鍵模式。詳細說明，請參閱第９頁上的

“SPATIALIZER（環繞控制鍵）按鈕”。

如將此功能為關，則當連接耳機時機內揚聲

器不輸出聲音。

输出：

SPATIALIZER係經Desper

Products,Inc.公司授權製造。

使用耳機時，可選擇主畫面或子畫面的聲

音。

• 機內揚聲器不輸出子畫面的聲音。

■超重低音

• 子畫面的音響衹能為單聲道。對於子畫

面的音響不能使用立體聲/Ⅰ‧Ⅱ功能。

利用超重低音（超重低音回聲）功能，可欣

賞強勁有力的低音。

开：

超重低音功能工作。

关：

超重低音功能不工作。

■耳機

利用耳機功能可將電視聲音從耳機輸出。

1 選擇耳机，然後按下MENU/OK

按鈕。

DISP.

2 按下

/ 按鈕進行選擇，按下

按鈕設定耳机功能。然後按

下MENU/OK按鈕。

使用電視機菜單

便利功能菜單

■藍背景

可將電視機設定為當信號較弱或無信號或者

當外接裝置無輸入時自動變為藍背景，並靜

音。

开：

藍背景功能工作。

DISP.

关：

藍背景功能不工作。

■睡眠鐘

■童鎖

可將電視機設定為經過一段指定時間後自動

關閉。

可使電視機的前面控制按鈕無效。將這一功

能設定為開時，僅能用遙控器操作電視機。

利用這一功能可防止兒童自行（未得到父母

同意）操作電視機。

1 選擇睡眠钟，然後按下MENU/

OK按鈕。

开：

120

童鎖功能工作。

关：

DISP.

童鎖功能不工作。

2 按下

電視機開始從設定時間倒計數。

按鈕，設定時間。

■頻道鎖定

如有不希望讓兒童觀看的電視頻道，可鎖定

電視頻道。兒童選擇被鎖定的電視頻道所登

錄的節目號碼時，屏幕會變成藍色，並顯示

，而不能觀看此電視頻道。

• 可以10分鐘為間隔設定時間，最大可設

為120分鐘（兩個小時）。

取消睡眠定時器功能：

按下按鈕，將時間設為“關”。

設定頻道鎖定功能

3 按下MENU/OK按鈕，結束設

定。

1 選擇频道锁定，然後按下數字0

（AV）按鈕。

菜單消失。

• 由睡眠鐘功能關閉電視機的前一分鐘，

會顯示“晚安！”。

0000

• 睡眠鐘功能不能用於關閉電視機的主電

源。

DISP.

• 設定睡眠鐘功能後，可再次顯示睡眠鐘

功能菜單，以確認或改變剩餘時間。

使用電視機菜單

2 設定所需的解码。

觀看鎖定的電視頻道

選擇數字：

1 用數字按鈕或编排一览選擇被鎖

定的電視頻道所登錄的節目號

碼。

按下

按鈕

移動遊標：

屏幕變成藍色，並出現（頻道鎖定）。

按下

按鈕。

3 按下MENU/OK按鈕。

CH / CC

• 不能用

按鈕選擇鎖定的電視頻道。

2 按下DISPLAY按鈕，顯示“暗

码”（解码輸入屏幕）。

DISP.

4 按下

道。

按鈕，選擇電視頻

3 按下數字按鈕，輸入解码。

鎖被暫時解開，可觀看此電視頻道。

• 電視機顯示所選的正在播放的電視頻道

的電視節目。

5 按下藍色按鈕，對此電視頻道設

定頻道鎖定功能。

如果忘記解码：

執行“設定頻道鎖定功能”的第一步。

確認了解碼後，按下TV/VIDEO按鈕，

退出菜單。

出現（頻道鎖定），此電視頻道被鎖

定。

• 需取消頻道鎖定功能時，必須再次進行

“設定頻道鎖定功能”的操作。

取消頻道鎖定功能：

再次按下藍色按鈕。

（頻道鎖定）消失，解除鎖定。

6 按下MENU/OK按鈕，結束設

定。

菜單消失。

使用電視機菜單

■自動關機

可將電視機設定為當廣播結束後15分鐘以上

收不到信號時將其關閉。

开：

自動關機功能工作。

关：

自動關機功能不工作。

• 自動關機功能並不關閉電視機的主電

源。

• 自動關機功能對視頻模式不起作用。

■視頻-3設定

請根據VIDEO-3端子連接的外接裝置的視頻

信號輸入正確設定視頻-3設定。如果設定不

正確，則不能顯示圖像。

视频：

若輸入普通視頻信號（複合視頻信號）。

构成：

若輸入構成視頻信號（Y/CB/CR信號）。

• 有關詳細的連接方法，請參閱第33頁上

的“附加準備”。

• 僅當輸入構成視頻信號時，本機才與

Progressive視頻信號（525P信號）相

容。

使用電視機菜單

導入菜單

20%

DISP.

• 按下DISPLAY按鈕，取消自動程序功

能。

DISP.

2 電視頻道被登錄在節目號碼一覽

內後，將出現编缉菜單。

■語言

可從菜單的語言一覽表中選擇用於在屏幕上

顯示的語言。

CH/CC

1 選擇语言，然後按下MENU/OK

按鈕。

DISP.

• 可利用編輯/手動功能編輯節目號碼一

覽。詳細說明，請參閱第28頁上的“編

輯/手動”。

2 按下

言。

按鈕，選擇一種語

• 如果想觀看的電視頻道未被設定在節目

號碼一覽內，請利用手動功能將其登

錄。

3 按下MENU/OK按鈕，結束設

定。

詳細說明請參閱第28頁上的“編輯/手

動”。

菜單消失。

• 自動程序功能不將電視頻道登錄在節目

號碼編俳 0（AV）內。

■自動程序

可按下列步驟，將在居住區域接收效果良好

的電視頻道自動登錄在電視節目號碼內。

• 如果不需使用編輯/手動功能，請按下

MENU/OK按鈕，退出編輯菜單。

1 選擇自动程序，然後按下MENU/

OK按鈕。

啟動自動程序功能。接收的電視頻道自

動登錄於節目號碼一覽內。

使用電視機菜單

插入：

■編輯/手動

此功能利用CH/CC號碼，將新的電視頻道加

入當前節目號碼一覽內。

編輯/手動功能可分為兩種類型：

當前節目號碼的編輯（編輯功能）和將想要

觀看的電視頻道手動登錄到節目號碼內（手

動功能）。

删除：

此功能刪除不需要的電視頻道。

注意

手动：

• 使用移動、刪除或插入功能將重寫當前

的節目號碼一覽。

此功能將新的電視頻道手動登錄在節目號碼

內。

因此，將改變某些電視頻道的節目號

碼。

3 按下MENU/OK按鈕，結束設

定。

• 將手動功能用於設有頻道鎖定功能的電

視頻道將取消對電視頻道的頻道鎖定。

• 對於節目號碼編俳 0，“AV”將出現在

節目號碼一覽中。

• 當有電視頻道已被登錄在編俳 99中時，

利用插入功能將刪除此電視頻道。

功能

1 選擇编缉/手动，然後按下

MENU/OK按鈕。

移動

1 按下

道。

按鈕，選擇電視頻

CH/CC

2 按下按鈕，啟動移动功能。

CH/CC

DISP.

CC 01

2 按照需利用的功能的操作說明操

作功能。

DISP.

移动：

3 按下

按鈕，選擇新的節目

此功能改變電視頻道的節目號碼。

號碼。

解码：

取消移动功能：

此功能為電視頻道登錄頻道名（解碼）。

按下DISPLAY按鈕。

4 按下按鈕，將電視頻道的節目

號碼改變為新的節目號碼。

使用電視機菜單

解碼

CH/CC

1 按下

道。

按鈕，選擇電視頻

01(B/G)

2 按下紅色按鈕，啟動解码功能。

3 輸入頻道名（解码）。

按下

按鈕，選擇字符。

FINE+

FINE-

按下

按鈕，移動遊標。

DISP.

CH/CC

取消手动功能：

按下DISPLAY按鈕。

3 按下按鈕，選擇想登錄的電視

頻道的制式（聲音制式）。

• 有關各國或各地區的聲音制式，請參閱

第12頁上的“廣播制式”表。

DISP.

4 按下綠色或紅色按鈕，尋找電視

頻道。

取消解码功能：

當電視機找到電視頻道時停下搜索，並

顯示電視頻道。

按下DISPLAY按鈕。

4 按下MENU/OK按鈕，為電視頻

道登錄頻道名。

5 反復按下綠色或紅色按鈕，直至

出現所需的電視頻道。

刪除

若電視頻道接收不佳：

1 按下

道。

按鈕，選擇電視頻

按下藍色或黃色按鈕，微調電視頻道。

如果能正常顯示電視頻道的畫面，卻不

能正常收聽聲音：

2 按下黃色按鈕，刪除電視頻道。

從節目號碼一覽中刪除此電視頻道。

系統的設定不正確。按下按鈕，選擇

發出正常聲音的系統。

手動

6 按下MENU/OK按鈕，將電視頻

道登錄於節目號碼。

1 按下

新電視頻道的節目號碼。

按鈕，選擇想登錄的

回到編輯菜單。

2 按下藍色按鈕，啟動手动功能。

在CH/CC號碼的右側，出現電視頻道的

系統（聲音制式）。

使用電視機菜單

插入

準備

• 請從第31頁上找到電視頻道的頻道號碼

所對應的CH/CC號碼。

1 按下

新電視頻道的節目號碼。

按鈕，選擇想登錄的

2 按下綠色按鈕，啟動插入功能。

CH/CC

`-9

CH/CC^DISP.

3 按下

按鈕，根據電視頻道

的CH/CC號碼選擇“CC”或

“CH”。

取消插入功能：

按下DISPLAY按鈕。

4 按下數字按鈕，輸入CH/CC號

碼。

電視機轉換為登錄模式。

登錄結束時，此電視頻道的畫面會出現

在屏幕上。

• CH/CC號碼是表示電視的廣播頻率的號

碼。如果電視機檢測不到CH/CC號碼的

廣播頻率所對應的電視頻道，則顯示無

信號狀態的畫面。

使用電視機菜單

CH/CC號碼

需利用第30頁上的插入功能時，請從下表找出對應於電視頻道的頻道號碼的CH/CC號碼。

US：美國頻道號碼是用於美國和菲律賓等國的頻道號碼。

CCIR：CCIR頻道號碼是用於中東和東南亞等地區的頻道號碼。

OIRT：OIRT頻道號碼是用於東歐、俄羅斯和越南等國的頻道號碼。

CHINA：中國頻道號碼。用於中國等國的頻道號碼。

AUSTRALIA：澳大利亞頻道號碼是用於澳大利亞等國的頻道號碼。

頻道

CCIR

OIRT

CHINA

DS-1

DS-2

DS-3

DS-7

DS-8

DS-9

AUSTRALIA

AU-0

AU-1

AU-2

AU-6

AU-7

AU-8

AU-9

CCIR

S-1

OIRT

CHINA

AUSTRALIA

CH 02

CH 03

CH 04

CH 05

CH 06

CH 07

CH 08

CH 09

CH 10

CH 11

CH 12

CH 13

CH 14

CH 15

CH 16

CH 17

CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 21

CH 22

CH 23

CH 24

CH 25

CH 26

CH 27

CH 28

CH 29

CH 30

CH 31

CH 32

CH 33

CH 34

CH 35

CH 36

CH 37

CH 38

CH 39

CH 40

CH 41

CH 42

CH 43

CH 44

CH 45

CH 46

CH 47

CH 48

CH 49

CH 50

CH 51

CH 52

CH 53

CH 54

CH 55

CH 56

CH 57

CH 58

CH 59

CH 60

CH 61

CH 62

CH 63

CH 64

CH 65

CH 66

CH 67

CH 68

CH 69

CH 70

US-2

CC 01

CC 02

CC 03

CC 04

CC 05

CC 06

CC 07

CC 08

CC 09

CC 10

CC 11

CC 12

CC 13

CC 14

CC 15

CC 16

CC 17

CC 18

CC 19

CC 20

CC 21

CC 22

CC 23

CC 24

CC 25

CC 26

CC 27

CC 28

CC 29

CC 30

CC 31

CC 32

CC 33

CC 34

CC 35

CC 36

CC 37

CC 38

CC 39

CC 40

CC 41

CC 42

CC 43

CC 44

CC 45

CC 46

CC 47

CC 48

CC 49

CC 50

CC 51

CC 52

CC 53

CC 54

CC 55

CC 56

CC 57

CC 58

CC 59

CC 60

CC 61

CC 62

CC 63

CC 64

CC 75

CC 76

CC 77

CC 78

CC 79

CC 95

CC 96

CC 97

CC 98

CC 99

AU-5

US-3

S-2

Z-1

Z-2

Z-3

Z-4

US-4

S-3

US-5

S-4

US-6

S-5

US-7

S-6

AU-5A

US-8

S-7

Z-5

Z-6

Z-7

DS-6

Z-9

Z-10

Z-11

US-9

DS-10

DS-11

DS-12

Z-8

S-8

US-10

US-11

US-12

US-13

US-14

US-15

US-16

US-17

US-18

US-19

US-20

US-21

US-22

US-23

US-24

US-25

US-26

US-27

US-28

US-29

US-30

US-31

US-32

US-33

US-34

US-35

US-36

US-37

US-38

US-39

US-40

US-41

US-42

US-43

US-44

US-45

US-46

US-47

US-48

US-49

US-50

US-51

US-52

US-53

US-54

US-55

US-56

US-57

US-58

US-59

US-60

US-61

US-62

US-63

US-64

US-65

US-66

US-67

US-68

US-69

E10

E11

E12

R10

R11

R12

AU-10

AU-11

S-9

S-10

S-11

S-12

S-13

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

S-18

S-19

S-20

S-21

S-22

S-23

S-24

S-25

S-26

S-27

S-28

S-29

S-30

S-31

S-32

S-33

S-34

S-35

S-36

S-37

S-38

S-39

S-40

S-41

Z-12

Z-13

Z-14

Z-15

Z-16

Z-17

Z-18

Z-19

Z-20

Z-21

Z-22

Z-23

Z-24

Z-25

Z-26

Z-27

Z-28

Z-29

Z-30

Z-31

Z-32

Z-33

Z-34

Z-35

Z-36

Z-37

E21

E22

E23

E24

E25

E26

E27

E28

E29

E30

E31

E32

E33

E34

E35

E36

E37

E38

E39

E40

E41

E42

E43

E44

E45

E46

E47

E48

E49

E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

E57

E58

E59

E60

E61

E62

E63

E64

E65

E66

E67

E68

E69

DS-13

DS-14

DS-15

DS-16

DS-17

DS-18

DS-19

DS-20

DS-21

DS-22

DS-23

DS-24

DS-25

DS-26

DS-27

DS-28

DS-29

DS-30

DS-31

DS-32

DS-33

DS-34

DS-35

DS-36

DS-37

DS-38

DS-39

DS-40

DS-41

DS-42

DS-43

DS-44

DS-45

DS-46

DS-47

DS-48

DS-49

DS-50

DS-51

DS-52

DS-53

DS-54

DS-55

DS-56

DS-57

W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

W+11

W+12

W+13

W+14

W+15

W+16

W+17

W+18

W+19

W+20

W+21

W+22

W+23

W+24

W+25

W+26

W+27

W+28

Z+1

Z+2

DS-4

DS-5

AU-3

AU-4

A-5

A-4

A-3

A-2

A-1

使用電視機菜單

演示菜單

DISP.

演示功能自動演示一些電視功能。

演示功能設定於開時：

每當打開電視機時，自動開始演示。

若不需演示，請將演示功能設為關。

1 按下

選擇閉，則取消演示功能。

按鈕，選擇开。

2 按下MENU/OK按鈕，結束設

定。

將演示功能設定為開，開始演示。

停止演示：

按下遙控器上的任一按鈕。

附加準備

■連接外接裝置

將裝置連接於本電視機時，請參閱連接圖。

連接前：

• 請參閱裝置所附的說明書。有的裝置的

連接方法與連接圖可能有所不同。另

外，為了保證正常工作，可能需根據連

接方法改變裝置的設定。

• 關閉包括電視機在內的所有裝置。

• 第40頁上的“技術規格”內有視頻端子

的詳細說明。如果所需連接的裝置不在

下列連接圖中，請參閱“技術規格”，

選擇最合適的視頻端子。

OVER

L/MONO

IN (VIDEO-4)

• 未附帶連接電纜。

• 連接AV COMPU LINK支持的裝置時，

請參閱第35頁上的“連接支持AV

COMPU LINK的裝置”。

1 VCR（複合信號）

2 VCR（S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）信號，Y/

C）

用於錄製的VCR（複合信號）

4 DVD放像機（複合信號）

5 DVD放像機（S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）

AUDIO

L/MONOVIDEO

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

L/MONO

OUTPUT

信號，Y/C）

UDIO

VIDEO

6 DVD放像機（構成視頻信號，Y/CB/CR）

電視遊戲（複合信號）

電視遊戲（S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）信

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

號，Y/C）

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

9 Camcorder（複合信號）

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

0 Camcorder（S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）信

VIDEO-3/

AUDIO L/MONO

COMPONENT

號，Y/C）

OUTPUT

耳機

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

A AV COMPU LINK電纜

附加準備

2 用音頻電纜將電視機的AUDIO插

口（L/MONO和R）和裝置的

AUDIO OUT（音頻L/R輸出）插

口連接起來。

連接方法

1 用視頻電纜將電視機的VIDEO插

口和裝置的VIDEO OUT插口連接

起來。

如果裝置的聲音輸出為單聲道：

用音頻電纜將裝置的AUDEO OUT插口和電

視機的L/MONO插口連接起來。

如果用S-VIDEO電纜將裝置連接於

電視機：

用S-VIDEO電纜來代替視頻電纜，將VCR的

S-VIDEO OUT接口和電視機的“S”（S-

VIDEO）接口連接起來。

同時用視頻電纜和S-VIDEO電纜將VCR與電

視機連接時，用視頻電纜進行的連接將無

效。

將裝置連接於OUTPUT端子

透過OUTPUT端子輸出現在正用電視機觀看

的畫面和聲音的信號。透過將VCR連接於

OUTPUT端子，可將現正播放的圖像和聲音

錄制在VCR上。此時，請按照下列步驟，將

VCR和OUTPUT端子連接起來。

如果用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機

連接於電視機：

1 用音頻電纜將OUTPUT端子的

VIDEO插口和VCR的VIDEO IN

（視頻輸入）插口連接起來。

2 用音頻電纜將OUTPUT端子的

AUDIO插口（L和R）和VCR的

AUDIO IN（音頻L/R輸入）插口

連接起來。

用構成視頻電纜來代替視頻電纜，將VIDEO-

3端子的三個插口（Y/VIDEO、C^B和C^R）和

DVD放像機的COMPONENT（構成視頻輸

出）插口連接起來。然後按照第26頁上的

“視頻-3設定”將視頻-3設定設定為構成。

• （當輸入構成視頻信號時，）本機與

Progressive視頻信號（525P信號）相

容。

• 關閉電視機時，來自OUTPUT端子的信

號也將消失。

如果DVD放像機作為構成視頻信號輸出

Progressive視頻信號（525P），則當將

該裝置用構成視頻電纜連接在電視機上

時，可不失真地觀看錄製在DVD碟片上

的圖像。

• 來自VIDEO-3/COMPONENT端子的構

成信號輸入不能透過OUTPUT端子輸

出。

如果用視頻電纜將裝置連接於

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT（視頻-

3/構成）端子：

用視頻電纜將電視機的Y/VIDEO插口和裝置

的VIDEO OUT插口連接起來。

連接耳機

用立體聲微型插口（直徑3.5mm）將耳機與

電視機前面板上的耳機插口連接起來。

然後按照第26頁上的“視頻-3設定”將視頻-3

設定設定為視頻。

• 在VIDEO-4端子，VIDEO插口標示為

“V”。

附加準備

■連接支持AV COMPU

利用AV COMPU LINK遙控系

統的條件

LINK的裝置

• 需帶有AV COMPU LINK端子的裝置。

利用AV COMPU LINK遙控系統，可在操作

一個裝置時，自動控制相關裝置。

如將此系統應用於本電視機，可在操作一個

外接裝置時，自動進行電視機的所需操作，

而無需用電視機的遙控器打開電視機或改變

視頻模式。

• 須用AV COMPU LINK電纜連接電視機

和裝置。本電視機不附帶AV COMPU

LINK電纜。如沒有AV COMPU LINK電

纜，請用兩端帶有直徑為3.5mm（單

聲）的插入式插頭的電纜連接。

• 須將裝置連接於正確的VIDEO端子，並

正確安裝。否則AV COMPU LINK遙控

系統不能正確發揮作用。詳細說明，請

參閱“安裝AV COMPU LINK遙控系

統”。

AV COMPU LINK遙控系統

的操作例

僅需按下VCR或DVD放像機上的PLAY按鈕，

可觀看來自這些裝置的圖像。

• 電視機須為待機模式（POWER指示燈亮

紅燈）。如果電視機的主電源處於關閉

狀態（POWER指示燈熄滅），AV

僅需將預先錄製的錄像帶（去除錄製保護片

的磁帶）插入VCR，可觀看錄像帶。

COMPU LINK遙控系統將不起作用。

僅需操作AV控制接收器，可正確打開或關閉

（待機模式）電視機或改變視頻模式。

• AV COMPU LINK遙控系統的性能因所

連接的裝置而定。請參閱裝置的使用說

明書。

安裝AV COMPU LINK遙控系

統

注意：

• 當選擇“電視聲音”作為AV控制接收器

的輸入音源時，有時電視機的靜音功能

會自動啟動，機內揚聲器不發出聲音。

此時，請按下電視機遙控器上的

VOLUME m 按鈕或MUTING按鈕，取

消靜音功能。可重新從機內揚聲器收聽

聲音。

• 有些裝置的安裝方法不同於此處說明的

方法。安裝前，請務必通讀該裝置的使

用說明書。

1 將裝置連接於電視機的VIDEO-1

或VIDEO-2端子。

如用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機和

電視機連接起來：

將DVD放像機和電視機的VIDEO-3端子連接

起來。

• 有關連接方法的詳細說明，請參閱第33

頁上的“連接外接裝置”。

附加準備

2 用AV COMPU LINK電纜將電視

機的AV COMPU LINK端子和裝

置的AV COMPU LINK端子連接

起來。

3 根據所連接的VIDEO端子改變裝

置的設定。

如果VCR連接於VIDEO-1端子：

將VCR的遙控碼設為A碼。

如果DVD放像機連接於VIDEO-1端

子：

將DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設

為DVD2。

如果VCR連接於VIDEO-2端子：

將VCR的遙控碼設為B碼。

如果DVD放像機連接於VIDEO-2端

子：

將DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設

為DVD3。

如果用構成視頻電纜將DVD放像機

與VIDEO-3端子相連接：

將DVD放像機的AV COMPULINK MODE設

為DVD1。

• 有關改變裝置的設定的詳細說明，請參

閱該裝置的使用說明書。

• 如果所連接的裝置既無遙控碼，也無AV

COMPULINK MODE時，請將其連接於

電視機的VIDEO-1端子。

故障排除

如果使用本電視機時發生問題，請在提出修理前仔細閱讀此“故障排除”。可能會很方便地自

己解決問題。例如，如果交流電源插頭未插入交流電源插座或電視機天線有問題，而您卻可能

懷疑是電視機的問題。

重要：

• 此故障排除指南僅包括難於確定原因的問題。如果在操作某一功能時發生問題，請參閱說

明該功能的操作之頁，而不是此故障排除指南。

• 在按照此故障排除的說明或有關功能的操作說明操作後仍無進展，請將交流電源插頭從交

流電源插座上拔下，讓人修理電視機。請勿自行修理電視機或拆下後蓋。

■如果不能打開電視機

■畫面不清楚

• 交流電源插頭是否插入交流電源插座？

• 如果整個畫面不清楚（雪花圖像），則

天線或天線電纜可能有問題。請進行下

列檢查，解決問題：

• POWER指示燈是否亮燈？如未亮燈，請

按下主電源按鈕。

電視機和天線是否正確連接？

天線電纜是否損壞？

■無畫面或無聲音

天線是否指向正確方向？

天線是否損壞？

• 是否所選擇的電視頻道的接收效果特

差？若如此，會啟動藍背景功能，整個

屏幕會變成藍色，聲音變為靜音。如需

觀看此電視頻道，請按照第24頁上的

“藍背景”的說明，將藍背景功能設定

為關。

• 如果電視機或天線的接收受到其他裝置

的干擾，在畫面上可能會出現條狀或噪

音。將擴音器、個人電腦或吹風器等會

干擾電視機的裝置從電視機旁移開，或

改變位置。如果天線受到無線電發射塔

或高壓線的影響，請向當地的供銷商恰

詢。

• 電視頻道的聲音制式的設定值是否正

確？

請按照第12頁上的“SOUND SYSTEM

（聲音制式）按鈕”解決問題。

• 如果電視機受到來自大山或大樓的信號

反射的干擾，會出現雙重圖像（重

影）。

請改變天線的方向或將其換成具有更佳

方向性的天線。

• 電視頻道的彩色制式的設定值是否正

確？請按照第11頁上的“COLOUR

SYSTEM（彩色制式）按鈕”解決問

題。

• 是否正確調節色彩或亮度？請按照第18

頁上的“畫面調節”正確調節。

故障排除

• 當在屏幕上顯示白亮的靜止圖像（例如

白色服裝），白色部分可能會看上去像

是彩色的。這是因顯像管的特性而引起

的不可避免的現象，而不是電視機的故

障。

• 接收Progressive視頻信號（525P信號）

時，下列功能無效；

遙控器功能：

ZOOM、PIP、MULTI、FREEZE和

STROBE按鈕

菜單功能：

當圖像從屏幕上消失後，這一不自然的

色彩也會跟著消失。

銳度、色彩微調、數字VNR、Digipure

和鏡頭。

• 觀看市售的未正確錄製的視頻軟體或錄

像帶時，圖像頂部可能會變形。

這是因視頻信號而引起的，而不是故

障。

■聲音不清楚

• 是否正確調節低音或高音？若未正確調

節，請按照第22頁上的“聲音調節”正

確調節。

• 電視頻道接收不佳時，可能較難收聽立

體聲或雙重語言聲音。此時，請按照第

22頁上的“立體聲/Ⅰ‧Ⅱ”的說明，將

其改為單聲道，以更清晰地收聽。

■不能操作

• 遙控器的電池是否耗盡？

請按照第4頁上的“將電池裝入遙控器”

的說明，換上新電池，解決問題。

• 是否在電視機的側面或後面或者在離電

視機7米以上之處使用遙控器？請在電視

機的前面或在離電視機7米以內使用遙控

器。

• 是否將童鎖功能設定為開？如果將童鎖

功能設定為開，則不能用電視機的前面

控制按鈕操作電視機。請按照第24頁上

的“童鎖”的說明，將童鎖功能設定為

關。

• 如果突然不能操作電視機，請按下電視

機的主電源按鈕，關閉主電源。再次按

下主電源按鈕，打開主電源。如果電視

機恢復正常狀態，則未出故障。

故障排除

■其他說明

• 當睡眠鐘功能或自動關機功能工作時，

電視機將自動關閉。

如果電視機突然關閉，請按下POWER按

鈕，再次打開電視機。如果此時電視機

工作正常，則無問題。

• 使用耳機時，如果不想從機內揚聲器發

出聲音，請將耳機菜單中的機內揚聲器

設定改為關。詳細說明，請參閱第23頁

上的“耳機”

• 如將揚聲器之類的磁性裝置放在電視機

的附近，在屏幕的邊角上畫面可能會重

疊或色彩不自然。此時，請將該裝置遠

離電視機。如果因揚聲器產生這一現

象，請使用磁屏蔽揚聲器。

• 畫面可能因地球磁性的影響而歪斜。此

時，請按照第21頁上的“畫面糾正”，

糾正歪斜。

• 進行頻道等操作時，需稍等片刻方能出

現圖像。這不是故障。這是因為需待圖

像穩定後方能顯示。

• 因溫度的突然變換，電視機可能會發出

劈啪的響聲。如果圖像和聲音正常，則

無問題。如果觀看電視時，經常聽見劈

啪的響聲，則可能是由其他原因造成

的。

為了小心起見，請讓技術服務人員檢查

一下。

• 觸摸屏幕表面時，可能會感到由靜電引

起的輕微的觸電。

這是由顯像管的結構引起的不可避免的

現象，而不是電視機的問題。

請休息一會，該靜電放電不會對人體造

成有害影響。

技術規格

廣播制式

彩色制式

頻道和頻率

B、G、I、D、K、K1、M

PAL、SECAM、NTSC3.58/4.43MHz

VHF低頻道（VL）=46.25至168.25 MHz

VHF高頻道（VH）=175.25至463.25 MHz

UHF頻道（U）=471.25至863.25 MHz

■

可接收中頻段（X至Z+2、S1至S10）、高頻段

（S11至S20）和超高頻段（S21至S41）的有線頻道。

多聲道制式

A2（B/G）、NICAM（B/G、I、D/K）制式

交流110至240V，50/60 Hz

電源要求

音頻輸出

額定功率輸出：20W+20W

VIDEO-1（視頻-1）端子

RCA接口×3、S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）接口×1

‧備有視頻輸入、S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）（Y/C）輸入和音頻

L/R輸入。

VIDEO-2（視頻-2）端子

RCA接口×3

‧備有視頻輸入和音頻L/R輸入。

RCA接口×5

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

（視頻-3/構成）端子

‧備有視頻輸入/構成視頻（Y/CB/CR）輸入和音頻L/R輸入

‧備有Progressive視頻信號（525P信號）輸入。

RCA接口×3、S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）接口×1

‧備有視頻輸入、S-VIDEO（超級-視頻）（Y/C）輸入和音頻

L/R輸入。

VIDEO-4（視頻-4）端子

OUTPUT（輸出）端子

RCA接口×3

‧備有視頻輸出和音頻L/R輸出。

立體聲微型插口（直徑3.5mm）

遙控器×1（RM-C215）

耳機插口

附件

AA/R6/5號乾電池×2

揚聲器

HV-34LPZ：12cm 圓形×2，3.5cm 圓形×2

HV-29LPZ：10cm 圓形×2，3.5cm 圓形×2

HV-34LPZ：最大255W，平均170W

HV-29LPZ：最大254W，平均170W

HV-34LPZ：顯像管87cm 可視範圍80cm

HV-29LPZ：顯像管73cm 可視範圍68cm

HV-34LPZ：898mm×728mm×579mm

HV-29LPZ：732mm×588mm×518mm

HV-34LPZ：75kg

消耗功率

屏幕尺寸

（對角測量）

尺寸（寬×高×長）

重量

HV-29LPZ：48kg

設計和規格如有變更，恕不另行通告。

因涉及到侵犯版權的問題，不得到原有圖像版權主的同意，利用本電視機的鏡頭功能顯示在屏

幕上的圖像不得用於在公共場所（餐館、賓館等）的商業或演示目的的顯示。

COLOUR TELEVISION

HV-34LPZ

HV-29LPZ

Contents

Setting up your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

TV buttons and functions . . . . . . . . 6

Remote control buttons

and functions . . . 8

Using the TV's menu. . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Basic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

PICTURE SETTING menu . . . . . 20

PICTURE FEATURES menu . . . 21

SOUND SETTING menu . . . . . . 24

FEATURES menu . . . . . . . . . . . 26

INSTALL menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

DEMO menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Additional preparation . . . . . . . . . . 36

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

INSTRUCTIONS

LCT1218-001A-H

0402-Ki-NV-JMT

Thank you for buying this JVC colour television.

To make sure you understand how to use your new TV, please read this

manual thoroughly before you begin.

WARNING:

TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLI-

ANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION:

TO ENSURE PERSONAL SAFETY, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING

RULES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS TV.

1 Operate only from the power source indicated on the rear of the TV.

2 Avoid damaging the power cord and mains plug. When unpluging the TV,

grasp the mains plug. Do not pull on the power cord.

3 Never block or cover the ventilation openings.

Never install the TV where good ventilation is unattainnable.

When installing this TV, leave spaces for ventilation around the TV of more

than the minimum distances as shown.

15 cm

10 cm

15 cm

4 Do not allow objects or liquid into the cabinet openings.

5 In the event of a fault, unplug the unit and call a service technician.

Do not attempt to repair it yourself or remove the rear cover.

6 The surface of the TV screen is easily damaged. Be very careful with it

when handling the TV. Should the TV screen become soiled,

wipe it with a soft dry cloth. Never use rub it forcefully.

Never use any cleaner or detergent on it.

7 If you are not going to use this TV for a long preriod of time, be sure to

disconnect the AC plug from the AC soket.

Setting up your TV

CAUTION

• Turn off all the epuipment including the TV

before connecting anything.

Connecting the aerial and VCR

• Aerial cable is not supplied. Use a good

quality 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Fig.A

• Read the manual that came with the VCR

before connecting.

If not connecting a VCR (see fig.A) :

Connect an aerial cable to the aerial socket

on this TV .

Back of the TV

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

If connecting a VCR (see fig.B) :

1 Connect the aerial cable to the aerial

input socket on the VCR, and

connect the VCR and TV with

another aerial cable.

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

2 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT

(video output) jack and the TV's

VIDEO jack with a video cable.

AV COMPULINK

To connect a VCR to the TV with an S-VIDEO

cable:

Fig.B

Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO

output) connector and TV's S connector with an S-

VIDEO cable A, instead of connecting with a

video cable .

Back of the TV

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

3 Connect the VCR's VIDEO OUT

(audio L/R output) jacks and the TV's

AUDIO jacks (L/MONO and R) with

an audio cable.

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

• If the VCR's audio output is in mono, connect

the VCR's AUDIO OUT (audio output) jack

and the TV's AUDIO L/MONO jack with an

audio cable.

• You can use the AV COMPU LINK function if

your VCR has an AV COMPU LINK terminal.

For details, see “Connecting AV COMPU LINK

Supported Devices” on page 38.

Setting up your TV

2 Connecting the power cord

Connect the mains plug to the AC outlet.

3 Putting the batteries into the

Remote control

Use two AA/R6 batteries.

Insert the batteries from the

end, making sure the

and polaritiles are correct.

• Follow the warnings printed on the batteries.

• If the remote control does not work properly,

replace the batteries.

• The batteries we supply are only for setting up

and testing your TV. Please replace them as soon

as necessary.

4 Making the initial settings

When the TV is first turned on, it enters the initial

setting mode, and the JVC logo is displayed.

1 Press the main power button on the TV

The TV is turned on, and the JVC logo appears.

• If the power lamp on the TV lights red and does

not change to green, your TV is in the standby

mode. Press the POWER button on the remote

control to turn the TV on.

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• If the JVC logo does not appear, your TV has

already been turned before. In this case,use the

"LANGUAGE" and "AUTO PROGRAM" functions

to make the initial settings. For details, see

"INSTALL menu" on page 29.

POWER lamp

Main power button

2 Press the MENU/OK button

The LANGUAGE menu appears. You can choose

a language for the on-screen language.

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

Setting up your TV

3 Press the

buttons to choose

POWER

TV/VIDEO

ENGLISH. Then press the MENU/OK

button.

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.

The TV channels you receive are automatically

stored in the programme numbers list.

AUTO PROGRAM

20%

RETURN

:OK

DISP

:BACK

MULTI

• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function, press

the DISPLAY button.

MUTING

4 After the TV channels have been

stored in the programme number (PR)

list, the EDIT menu appears.

EDIT

PIP

SUB-P

CH/CC

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

:OK

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

• You can proceed to edit the programme

numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL function.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

• If a TV cannel you want to view is not stored in

the programme numbers list, you can register it

using the MANUAL function.

TEXT

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page 30.

• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not store a

TV channel to the programme number 0 (AV).

• If you do not need to use the EDIT/MANUAL

function, press the MENU/OK button to close the

EDIT menu.

Now, the setting up is complete.

Please enjoy your new JVC TV!

TV buttons and functions

Turn the main power on

Press the main power button 1 .

The POWER lamp 2 lights red and your TV is

in the standby mode.

To turn the main power off :

press the main power button again.

The POWER lamp 2 goes off.

Turn the TV on from standby

mode

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

The POWER lamp 2 lights red to green and

your TV will be turned on.

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

• You can also turn on the TV by pressing the

TV/VIDEO button 3 while it is in standby

mode.

8 2

Choose a TV channel

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

Choose a VIDEO terminal

Press the TV/VIDEO button 3 or

CHANNEL-/+ buttons 5 .

Adjust the volume

Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons 4 .

The volume level indicater appears.

MENU button 6

Press to open the menu.

For details, see "Operation with the buttons on

the TV" on page 19.

(Behind the cover)

OVER

L/MONO

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

IN (VIDEO-4)

Remote control sensor

and ECO sensor 9

6 5 4 3

ECO lamp 7

If you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

function to ON or DISPLAY, the ECO lamp lights.

TV buttons and functions

SPATIALIZER lamp 8

If you set the SPATIALIZER function to MONO

or LIVE,the SPATIALIZER lamp lights.

Headphone jack 0

Connect the headphones with a stereo

mini-jack (3.5mm in diameter).

When using the headphones, follow the

operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on

page 25.

UDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

UDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-1 terminal =

• See page 3 and 36.

AUDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-2 terminal ~

• See page 36.

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R ^AUDL^I/^OMONO

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

terminal !

OUTPUT

• See page 28 and 36.

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPU LINK

VIDEO-4 terminal -

• See page 36.

OUTPUT terminal @

• See page 36.

Aerial socket #

Connect the aerial cable.

• See page 3.

AV COMPU LINK terminal $

• See page 36 and 38.

Remote control buttons and functions

Turn the TV on from standby mode

Press the POWER button.

The POWER lamp lights red to green and your TV will be

turned on.

POWER

TV/VIDEO

PICTURE

MODE

• You can turn on the TV from the standby mode by

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

pressing the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL -/+

buttons or the number buttons.

To turn the TV off:

Press the POWER button again.

The POWER lamp changes from green to red and the TV

enters standby mode.

RETURN

Choose a TV channel

MULTI

Choose a programme number in which a TV channel has

been set.

MUTING

Press the CHANNEL-/+ buttons or enter the

programme number (PR) with the number

buttons.

• If you want to put a two-digit channel into the TV,

press the -/--button to change to the two-digit entry

system.

PIP

SUB-P

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

• You can select a channel from the PR LIST. For

details, see "DISPLAY button" on page 11.

MENU/

• If you do not have a clear picture or no colour

appears, follow the operation procedure "COLOUR

SYSTEM button" on page 11.

• If you cannot hear sound normally even when the

picture appears normally, follow the operation

procedure "SOUND SYSTEM button" on page 12.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

Adjust the volume

TEXT

Press the VOLUME-/+ buttons.

• You cannot adjust the volume of your headphones.

Follow the operation procedure "HEADPHONE" on

page 25.

Remote control buttons and functions

16:9

Watch images from external

devices

Choose a VIDEO terminal to which the external

device has been connected.

This mode converts a normal picture (4:3

aspect ratio) into a Wide picture (16:9 as-

pect ratio).

Press the TV/VIDEO button.

• You can choose a VIDEO terminal with the

CHANNEL -/+ buttons or from the PR LIST.

To return to a TV channel:

Press the TV/VIDEO button, the CHANNEL-/+

buttons or the number buttons.

• Use for picture with a 16:9 aspect

ratio that have been squeezed into a

normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio), you

can restore their original demensions.

MUTING button

Press the MUTING button to turn off

the volume. Pressing the MUTING

button again resumes the previous

volume level.

SPATIALIZER button

You can enjoy Surround sound with a

"live" effect by using the SPATIALIZER

function.

Press the SPATIALIZER button to

choose a mode.

ZOOM button

You can change the screen size according to the

picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum one

from the following ZOOM modes.

LIVE :

Live allows you to enjoy normal stereo

sound converting it into surround sound

with added depth and ambience.

Press the ZOOM button to choose a

mode.

MONO :

• If you press the ZOOM button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal (525P

signal), “525P” appears on the screen and

the ZOOM function does not operate.

Mono allows you to enjoy normal

monaural sound by converting it into a

stereo-like sound.

OFF :

REGULAR

This function is turned off.

Use to view a normal picture (4:3 aspect ratio) as

its original size is.

• The LIVE mode works properly only

with stereo sound.

• The LIVE mode does not work

correctly with headphones.

• The MONO mode works properly only

with monaural sound.

ZOOM

You can zoom up the Wide picture (16:9 aspect

ratio) to fill the TV screen.

The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under

lisense from Desper Products,Inc.

• The left side and right side of the Wide

picture (16:9 aspect ratio) will be cut off.

Remote control buttons and functions

To register a TV channel as the

"Return Channel" :

BASS button

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by

using the SUPER BASS(Super Bass Reflex)

function.

Choose the Programme number to which

the channel you want to register has been

set, and press the RETURN+ button and

hold for more than 3 seconds continuously.

"RETURN PLUS PROGRAMMED!" is

displayed and the registration is com-

pleted.

Press the BASS button to turn the

SUPER BASS function on or off.

ON :

This function is turned on.

To cancel register a TV channel as the

"Return Channel" :

OFF :

This function is turned off.

while viewing any TV channel, press the

RETURN+ button and hold for more than 3

seconds continuously. "RETURN PLUS

CANCELED!" is displayed and the regist-

ration is cancelled.

PICTURE MODE button

You can choose one of three PICTURE

MODEs (three kinds of picture setting) to

adjust the picture settings automatically.

• When you turn off the TV, the

registration for the "Return Channel" is

cancelled.

Press the PICTURE MODE button

choose a mode.

• If you want to view the "Return Channel"

and another TV channel alternately, first

choose a channel other than the

"Return Channel". and then press the

RETURN+ button to change the

channel to the "Return Channel" In this

way, you can view two channels

alternately by pressing the RETURN+

button.

BRIGHT :

Heightens contrast and sharpness.

STANDARD :

Standardizes picture adjustment.

SOFT :

Softens contrast and sharpness.

RETURN function :

The TV temporarily memorises the TV

channel that was choosen right before the

current TV channel as the "Last Channel".

By pressing the RETUTN+ button, you can

alternately view the current TV channel and

the "Last Channel".

RETURN+ button

The RETURN+ button has two functions;

the RETURN+ function and the RETURN

function. If a channel has been registerd as

the "Return Channel", the RETURN+

function operates. If there is no setting for

the "Return Channel", the RETURN

function operates.

• If you want to view two channels

alternately by using the RETURN

function, first choose one TV channel

and then choose the other TV channel

with the Number buttons. If you choose

the TV channel without using the

Number buttons, there are cases where

a channel other than the one you first

chose is registered as the "Last

Channel".

RETURN+ function :

By registering a channel you frequently

view as the "Return Channel", you can

select that channel at any time simply by

pressing the RETURN+ button.

Remote control buttons and functions

/ button

Choose a TV channel or a

VIDEO terminal

1 Press the DISPLAY button to

When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast

programme, you can choose the sound from

Bilingual I (Sub I) or Bilingual II (Sub II). When

the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,

you can change from stereo to mono sound

so that you can hear the broadcast more

clearly and easily.

display the PR LIST.

2 Press the

and

buttons

to choose a programme number

or VIDEO terminal.

Then press the MENU/OK

button.

Press the

choose a sound mode.

/ button to

• For programme numbers with the

CHANNEL GUARD function set, the

(CHANNEL GUARD) mark is displayed

next to the programme number in the PR

LIST.

: Stereo sound

: mono sound

: Bilingual I (sub I)

: Bilingual II (sub II)

• The VIDEO terminals are registered after

the programme number PR99.

MONO : Cancels the Multi Sound function,

and the sound becomes monaural.

• The sound mode you can choose differs

depending on the TV programme.

COLOUR SYSTEM button

The colour system is chosen automatically.

However, if the picture is not clear or no

colour appears, choose the colour system

manually.

• This function does not work in the VIDEO

modes.

Press the COLOUR SYSTEM button

to choose the appropriate colour

system.

DISPLAY button

You can display the PR LIST, programme

number or VIDEO terminal number on the

screen.

AUTO :

Press the DISPLAY button.

Press the DISPLAY button changes the

display as follows:

This function detects a colour system from

the input signal.

• The AUTO mode may not function

properly if you have poor signal quality.

If the picture is abnormal in the AUTO

mode, choose another colour system

manually.

PR LIST

• The AUTO mode detects a colour system

from the input signal and chooses the

appropiate colour system automatically.

No indication

:OK

:EXIT

• When changing the COLOUR SYSTEM of

the SUB-picture, see "Change the colour

system of the SUB-picture" on page 15

for details.

-10

+10

Remote control buttons and functions

• For the colour systems in each

BROADCASTING SYSTEMS

For sound sysytem colour system in your country

or rigion, refer to the table below.

country or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on

page 12.

COLOUR SYSTEM

SOUND SYSTEM button

Area

Country or Region

System

Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,

United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.

Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,

Thailand, India, etc.

The sound system is chosen automati-

cally. However, if you cannot hear the

sound normally even when the picture

appears normally, chooes the sound

system maunually.

PAL

Asia,

China, Vietnam, etc

Hong Kong, etc

PAL

Middle

East

Press the SOUND SYSTEM

button to choose the appropriate

sound system.

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,

Saudi Arabia, etc.

SECAM

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc

NTSC

SECAM

PAL

Russia, etc

B/G : B/G system

Czech Republic, Poland, etc

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc

UK, etc

Europe

: I system

PAL

D/K : D/K system

PAL

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc

: M system

Republic of South Africa, etc

Africa

• This function does not work in the

Nigeria, etc

PAL

VIDEO mode.

Egypt, Morocco, etc

SECAM

• For the sound systems in each

country or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on

page 12.

SOUND SYSTEM

Area

Country or Region

System

Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar,

United Arab Emirates, Yemen, etc.

Indonesia, Malaysia, Singapore,

Thailand, India, etc.

B/G

Asia,

Middle

East

China, Vietnam, etc

Hong Kong, etc

D/K

Islamic Republic of Iran, Lebanon,

Saudi Arabia, etc.

B/G

Philippines, Taiwan, Myanmar, etc

Russia, etc

D/K

B/G

Czech Republic, Poland, etc

Germany, Holland, Belgium, etc

UK, etc

Europe

Oceania Australia, New Zealand, etc

Republic of South Africa, etc

B/G

Africa

Nigeria, etc

B/G

Egypt, Morocco, etc

Remote control buttons and functions

• If you press the STROBE button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the STROBE function does

not operate.

FREEZE button

You can view the Main picture's forzen image

as the SUB-picture.

Press the FREEZE button.

• You cannot change the TINT setting for

the still images on the screen even if

you are viewing a programme with

NTSC colour system.

Still pictures

MAIN

To cancel the FREEZE function :

Press the FREEZE button again.

Using the MULTI

function

You can display multi-pictures that enable

you to easily find a program you want to

view.

• You cannot use the FREEZE button when

the SUB-picture or the MAIN-picture are

displayed on the screen.

• If you press the FREEZE button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the FREEZE function does

not operate.

1 Press the MULTI button.

Press the MULTI button changes the

display as follow:

5-pictures multi mode

STROBE button

Still

pictures

You can view the MAIN-picture as 15

consecutive still images.

MAIN

Press the STROBE button.

Moving

picture

16-pictures multi mode

Still

pictures

Moving

picture

Moving

picture

To cancel the STROBE function:

Press the STROBE button to return to the

MAIN-picture.

• If signal level of the MAIN-picture is

weak, the still images become abnormal.

Cancel the MULTI function

• You cannot use the STROBE button

when the SUB-picture or the MAIN-

picture are displayed on the screen.

To display next Multi pictures :

Press the NEXT button.

Remote control buttons and functions

2 Choose the desired picture with

Using the PIP function

You can view two pictures (MAIN and SUB) at

the

and

buttons, and

then press the MENU/OK button.

the same time.

The screen switches to the TV channel or

VIDEO mode of your choice.

Press the PIP button.

Press the PIP button changes the display as

follows:

• Any programme numbers to which no TV

channel has been registered, or

programme numbers to which

CHANNEL GUARD has been set is not

displayed.

Twin pictures mode

• You cannot perform menu operations

such as headphone volume adjustment.

Cancel the MULTI function once to

perform menu operations.

MAIN

SUB

• If you press the MULTI button when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal), “525P” appears on the

screen and the MULTI function does not

operate.

Picture in picture mode

SUB

MAIN

• During the short period that is required

for the Multi-pictures display to close no

sound comes from the television.

Cancel the PIP function

• You cannot view a picture from the same

programme number (or the same VIDEO

terminal) as both the MAIN-picture and

the SUB-picture at the same time.

• If the MAIN-picture signal is poor, then the

quality of the SUB-picture may also be

poor.

• If the picture standards of both pictures

are different, the top and bottom or one of

them may be missing.

• The ZOOM function does not operate

when viewing pictures using the PIP

function.

• The SUB-picture cannot be output from

TV.

• If you press the PIP button when receiving

the Progressive Video Signal (525P

signal), “525P” appears on the screen

and the PIP function does not operate.

Remote control buttons and functions

• You cannot change the COLOUR

SYSTEM of the SUB-picture using the

COLOUR SYSTEM button on the remote

control.

Choose a TV channel for

the SUB-picture

Press the SUB-P -/+ button.

POSITION button

You can adjust the position of the SUB-

Picture when using the Picture in picture

mode.

Listen to the sound of SUB-

picture

You can listen to the sound of SUB-picture on

your headphones while listening to the sound

of MAIN-picture on the TV speakers.

Press the POSITION button

repeatedly.

For details, see "HEADPHONE" on page 25.

Each time you press the button, the SUB-

Picture moves counterclockwise.

Change the colour system

of the SUB-picture

1 While the SUB-picture is dis-

played, press the MENU/OK

button to display the MENU

(main manu).

2 Press the

and

buttons

to choose PICTURE FEATURES,

and then press the MENU/OK

button.

SWAP button

You can replace the MAIN-picture and the

SUB-picture with each other.

3 Press the

buttons to

choose COLOUR SYSTEM, and

then press the MENU/OK button.

Press the SWAP button.

COLOUR SYSTEM

MAIN

SUB

NTSC 3.58

AUTO

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the

choose SUB, and then press the

buttons to choose the

buttons to

• Do not press the SWAP button while you

are recording the TV output on the VCR.

If you do, the output signal will change.

appropriate colour system. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

Remote control buttons and functions

Viewing a teletext

programme

1 Choose a TV channel with a

teletext broadcast.

HOLD button

You can hold a teletext page on the screen

for as long as you want, even while several

other teletext pages are being received.

Press the HOLD button.

2 Press the TV/TEXT button.

The

(hold) are displayed at the top left

Press the TV/TEXT button changes the

mode as follows:

of the screen.

To cancel the Hold function:

Press the HOLD button again.

REVEAL button

Some teletext pages include hidden text

(such as answers to a quiz).

TV mode

TV and

Text mode

You can display the hidden text.

Each time you press the REVEAL

button, text is hidden or revealed.

SIZE button

Text mode

You can double the height of teletext

display.

3 Choose a teletext page by

pressing the CHANNEL-/+

buttons, number buttons or

coloured buttons.

Press the SIZE button.

INDEX button

You can return to the index page instantly.

To return to the TV mode:

Press the TV/TEXT button or TV/VIDEO

button.

Press the INDEX button.

• In the List mode, you can return to the

page number displayed in the lower left

area of the screen.

• If you have trouble receiving tetetext

broadcasts, consult your local dealer or

the broadcast station.

CANCEL button

You can serch for a teletext page while

watching TV.

• In the Text mode, the ZOOM mode is

fixed to the REGULAR mode.

• No menu operations are possible when

viewing a teletext programme.

1 Press the number button to

enter a page number, or press

the coloured button.

• If characters on a teletext programme do

not appear properly, change the

TELETEXT LANGUAGE setting. For

details, see “TELETEXT LANGUAGE” on

page 34.

The TV searches for a teletext page.

Remote control buttons and functions

2 Press the CANCEL button.

Using the List mode

You can store the numbers of your favourite

teletext pages in memory and call them up

quickly using the coloured buttons.

The TV programme appears. When the

TV finds the teletext page, its page

number appears in the upper left of the

screen.

To store the page numbers :

1 Press the MODE button to

engage the List mode.

3 Press the CANCEL button to

return to a teletext page when

the page number is on the

screen.

The stored page numbers are displayed

at the buttom of the screen.

• You cannot return to the TV mode with

the CANCEL button.

2 Press a coloured button to

choose a position. Then press

the number buttons to enter the

page number.

SUBPAGE button

Some teletext pages include sub-pages that

are automatically displayed. You can hold

any sub-page, or veiw it at any time.

3 Press and hold down the

STORE button.

1 Press the SUBPAGE button to

operate the Sub-page function.

The four page numbers blink white to

indicate that they are stored in memory.

Sub-page numbers are displayed at the

left of the screen.

To call up a stored page :

1 Press the MODE button to

engage the List mode.

2 Press a coloured button to

which a page has been as-

signed.

Colour*

Yellow

White

Meaning of sub-page number

Currently being displayed.

Can be displayed.

Cannot be displayed and

it is not sent.

Blue or Red

* : Background color of the sub-page

number.

To exit the List mode :

Press the MODE button again.

2 Press the CHANNEL -/+ buttons

to choose a sub-page number.

To cancel the Sub-page function:

Press the SUBPAGE button again.

Using the TV's menu

This TV has a number of functions you can operate using menus.

To fully utilize all your TV's functions, you need to understand the basic menu operating

techniques fully.

Basic operation

POWER

TV/VIDEO

1 Press the MENU/OK button to display

PICTURE

MODE

the MENU (main menu).

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

PICTURE SETTING

PICTURE FEATURES

SOUND SETTING

FEATURES

INSTALL

DEMO

:OK

RETURN

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

MULTI

• The display appearing at the bottom of a menu

indicates buttons on the remote control you

can use when you operate a chosen function.

MUTING

MENU/OK button

TV/VIDEO button

DISPLAY button

PIP

SUB-P

DISP.

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

2 Press the

and

buttons to

choose a menu title, and press the

MENU/OK button.

The menu appears.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

To return to the previous menu:

TV/TEXT

Press the DISPLAY button.

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

To exit a menu instantly:

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

Press the TV/VIDEO button.

TEXT

3 Press the

function.

buttons to choose a

• For details of the functions in the menus, see

the following pages.

Using the TV's menu

4 Press the

buttons to

choose the setting of that func-

tion.

• If you want to operate a function which

appears only with its name, follow the

descriptions of that function on the

following pages.

5 Press the MENU/OK button to

comple the setting.

The menu disappears.

• When watching the television with the

NTSC system, the menus are displayed

at about half of their normal verical size.

Operation with the

buttons on the TV

You can also operate the menus using the

buttons on the front panel of the TV.

button

TV/VIDEO

button

buttons

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

• There is no button on the front panel of

the TV that has the function of the

DISPLAY or coloured buttons.

Using the TV's menu

PICTURE SETTING menu

SHARP

You can adjust the picture sharpness.

PICTURE SETTING

: softer

: sharper

PICTURE MODE

CONTRAST

STANDARD

BRIGHT

SHARP

COLOUR

• You cannot select the SHARP function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

TINT

WHITE BALANCE

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

MID

:OK

RESET

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

COLOUR

You can adjust the picture colour.

: lighter

: deeper

PICTURE MODE

You can choose one of three PICTURE

MODEs to adjust the picture settings

automatically.

TINT

You can adjust the picture tint.

: reddish

BRIGHT:

Heightens contrast and sharpness.

: greenish

STANDARD:

Standardizes picture adjustment.

• You can change the TINT setting (picture

tint) only when the colour system is

NTSC 3.58 or NTSC 4.43.

SOFT:

• You cannot select the TINT function when

receiving the Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal).

Softens contrast and sharpness.

• You can also operate the PICTURE

MODE function with the PICTURE MODE

button on the remote control.

For details, see "PICTURE MODE button"

on page 10.

To return to the default settings

in each PICTURE MODE :

Press the blue button. Returns the picture

settings in the currently chosen PICTURE

MODE mode to the default settings, and

stores them in the PICTURE MODE again.

Adjusting the picture

You can change the picture settings of each

picture mode as you like. The picture settings

changed are stored in the picture mode.

WHITE BALANCE

You can select one of three WHITE

BALANCE modes (three tones of white) to

adjust the white balance of the picture. Since

white is the colour which is used as a

refernce for all the other colours, changing

the WHITE BALANCE mode affects the

appearance of all the other colours on the

screen.

CONTRAST

You can adjust the picture contrast.

: lower

: higer

BRIGHT

You can adjust the picture brighetness.

: darker

: brighter

COOL:

A bluish white. Using this mode when

watching bright pictures allows you to enjoy

a more vivid and bright picture.

Using the TV's menu

MID:

PICTURE FEATURES menu

The normal white colour.

PICTURE FEATURES

WARM:

DIGITAL VNR

DigiPure

AUTO

PULL DOWN

COLOUR SYSTEM

ZOOM

A raddish white. Using this mode when

watching films allows you to enjoy colours

that are characteristic of films.

PICTIRE TILT

:OK

:EXIT

• You cannot select the WHITE BALANCE

function in the Twin pictures mode or the

16:9 mode of the ZOOM function.

DISP

:BACK

DIGITAL VNR

The DIGITAL VNR function cuts down the

amount of noise in the original picture.

DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

When you set the DIGITAL ECO SENSOR

function to ON, the screen contrast is auto-

matically adjusted to a setting suitable for the

brightness of your room. This reduces eye

strain for you and the power consumption of

the TV.

• You cannot select the DIGITAL VNR

function when receiving the Progressive

Video Signal (525P signal).

AUTO:

The TV will be automatically adjust the level

of the DIGITAL VNR effect to match the

amount of noise in the picture, giving you the

best possible picture.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• If you set the DIGITAL VNR effect too

high it can make the picture less sharp.

It is recommended to use the AUTO

setting if you can.

DISPLAY :

This function is turned on. Further, clover

marks indicating the brightness of your

room are displayed for several seconds each

time the brightness changes. The number of

clover marks displayed on the screen

MAX:

The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to

the maximum. If you set the DIGITAL VNR

function to AUTO but still notice some noise,

change the setting from AUTO to MAX.

increases as your room becomes darker.

• The MAX setting is not suitable for high-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

MIN:

The level of the DIGITAL VNR effect is set to

the minimun. If you set the DIGITAL VNR

function to AUTO but feel that the sharpness

of the original picture has not been

reproduced fully, change the setting from

AUTO to MIN.

• The MIN setting is not suitable for low-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

Using the TV's menu

MIN:

DigiPure

The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the

minimun. When you set the DigiPure function

to AUTO and notice some noise, change the

setting from AUTO to MIN.

The Digipure function uses the latest in

digital technology to give you a natural

looking picture. The Digipure function

includes the following two functions.

• The MIN setting is not suitable for high-

quality pictures which contain very little

noise.

Digipure function:

This function helps to create a natural looking

picture by eliminating unnecessary edges

from high-contrast and crisp images.

Conversely, for images with low-contrast,

edges are added to produce a sharper, more

detailed picture.

OFF:

The DigiPure function is turned off.

PULL DOWN

The PULL DOWN function displays a cinema

film picture more smoothly and naturally on

the screen.

You can choose from the DigiPure function

settings of AUTO,MIN and MAX.

Picture motion compensation

function:

This function displays fast-moving pictures

(for example, the players or ball in a football

game) more smoothly and naturally on the

screen.

AUTO:

This function is turned on. Normally keep this

function set to AUTO.

OFF:

This function is turned off.

• You cannot select the Digipure function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

• The motion may appear unnatural when

viewing images with the NTSC colour

system. To make the motion smoother,

switch the PULL DOWN function from

AUTO to OFF.

AUTO:

The TV will automatically adjust the level of

the DigiPure effect to match the amount of

noise in the picture, giving the best possible

picture.

• You cannot select this function in the

Twin pictures mode or the Picture in

picture mode.

• If you set the DigiPure effect too high on

a low-quality picture that contains a lot of

noise, this may actually make the noise

worse. It is recommended to use the

AUTO setting if you can.

MAX:

The level of the DigiPure effect is set to the

maximum. If you set the DigiPure function to

AUTO but feel that the original picture quality

has not been reproduced fully, change the

setting from AUTO to MAX.

• The MAX setting is not suitable for low-

quality pictures which contain a lot of

noise.

Using the TV's menu

COLOUR SYSTEM

The colour system is chosen automatically.

However, if the picture is not clear or no

colour appears, choose the colour system

manually.

ZOOM

You can change the screen size according to

the picture aspect ratio. Choose the optimum

one of three ZOOM modes.

1 Choose ZOOM, then press the

1 Choose COLOUR SYSTEM, then

press the MENU/OK button.

MENU/OK button.

ZOOM

REGULAR

ZOOM

COLOUR SYSTEM

16:9

PAL

:OK

:EXIT

:OK

DISP

:BACK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons to

2 Press the

buttons to choose

choose a ZOOM mode. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

The picture expands and the chosen

ZOOM mode is displayed in about 5

seconds.

the appropriate colour system.

Then press the MENU/OK

button.

• When changing to the COLOUR

SYSTEM of the SUB-picture, see

"Change the colour system of the SUB-

picture" on page 15 for details.

• You can choose a ZOOM mode from

REGULAR, ZOOM or 16:9 modes. For

details, see " ZOOM button " on page 9.

• You can also operate the COLOUR

SYSTEM function with the COLOUR

SYSTEM button on the remote control.

For details, see "COLOUR SYSTEM

button" on page 11.

• You cannot select the ZOOM function

when receiving the Progressive Video

Signal (525P signal).

PICTURE TILT

There are cases where the Earth's magnetic

force may make the picture tilt. If this

happens, you can correct the picture tilt.

1 Choose PICTURE TILT, then

press the MENU/OK button.

PICTURE TILT

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons until the

picture becomes level. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

Using the TV's menu

SOUND SETTING menu

BALANCE

You can adjust the volume balance between

the left and right speakers.

SOUND SETTING

MONO

STEREO/

BASS

TREBLE

: turn the left speaker's volume level up.

: turn the right speaker's volume level up.

BALANCE

AI VOLUME

BBE

SPATIALIZER

SUPER BASS

HEADPHONE

LIVE

AI VOLUME

:OK

You can prevent the sudden increase or

decrease of sound that occurs when

changing the channel to another channel or

switching the VIDEO mode to another VIDEO

mode.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

STEREO / I•II

When you are viewing a bilingual broadcast

programme, you can choose the sound from

Bilingual I (sub I) or Bilingual II (sub II). When

the stereo broadcasting is received poorly,

you can change from stereo to mono sound

so that you can hear the broadcast more

clearly and easily.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• The AI VOLUME fnction for TV mode and

VIDEO mode can be set separetely.

For example, you can set it to be OFF in

TV mode and ON in VIDEO mode.

If you set the AI VOLUME function while

viewing images from a VIDEO terminal,

the setting is registered as the setting for

VIDEO mode.

: Stereo sound

: mono sound

: Bilingual I (sub I)

: Bilingual II (sub II)

MONO: Cancels the Multi Sound function,

and the sound becomes monaural.

• The AI VOLUME fnction may not operate

as expected if the sound input level from

a broadcast station (or video software) is

extremely low.

• The sound mode you can choose differs

depending on the TV programme.

• This function does not work in the VIDEO

modes.

BBE

You can use the BBE function to enjoy easy-

to-listen sound that is faithful to the original

sound recorded.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound to your liking.

ON :

BASS

This function is turned on.

You can adjust the low tone of the sound.

: weaker

: stronger

OFF :

This function is turned off.

Licenced by BBE Sound, inc. BBE

is a registered trademark of BBE

Sound, inc.

TREBLE

You can adjust the high tone of the sound.

: weaker

: stronger

Using the TV's Menu

TV SPEAKER:

SPATIALIZER

You can enjoy Surround sound with a "live"

effect by using the SPATIALIZER function.

You can choose one of two SPATIALIZER

modes.

When this function is on, the TV’s speaker

does not shut off the sound even if head-

phones are connected.

If you set this function to off, the TV’s speaker

does not output the sound when the

headphones are connected.

• You can choose a SPATIALIZER mode

from LIVE, MONO or OFF modes.

For details, see " SPATIALIZER button "

on page 9.

OUTPUT:

You can choose the sound from the MAIN-

picture(MAIN) or the SUB-picture(SUB) when

using the headphones.

The SPATIALIZER is manufactured under

lisense from Desper Products,Inc.

• The TV’s speaker does not put out the

sound from the SUB-picture.

SUPER BASS

You can enjoy a powerful bass sound by

using the Super Bass (Super Bass Reflex)

function.

• The sound of the SUB-picture is mono

only. You cannot use the STEREO/I·II

function for the sound of the SUB-picture.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

HEADPHONE

This function enables you to output the TV’s

sound from your headphones.

1 Choose HEADPHONE, then

press MENU/OK button.

HEADPHONE

VOLUME

TV SPEAKER

OUTPUT

MAIN

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Use the

and the

button to select,

button to set the

HEADPHONE function. Then

press the MENU/OK button.

VOLUME :

You can adjust the volume of the sound

output from your headphones.

Using the TV's menu

FEATURES menu

BLUE BACK

You can set the TV to automatically change

to a blue screen and mute the sound if the

signal is weak or absent, or when there is no

input from an external device.

FEATURES

SLEEP TIMER

BLUE BACK

CHILD LOCK

CHANNEL GUARD

AUTO SHUTOFF

OFF

VIDEO-3 SETTING

COMPONENT

ON :

:OK

This function is turned on.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

OFF:

This function is turned off.

SLEEP TIMER

You can set the TV to automatically turn off

after a set time.

CHILD LOCK

You can disable the front control buttons of

the TV. When this function is set to ON, the

TV can be operated only by using the remoto

control.

1 Choose SLEEP TIMER, then

press the MENU/OK button.

Use this function to prevent children from

operating the TV at their own discretion

(without parent consent).

SLEEP TIMER

OFF

ON :

:OK

This function is turned on.

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

OFF:

This function is turned off.

2 Press the

buttons to set the

period of time.

The TV begins count down from the set

time.

CHANNEL GUARD

When there is a TV channel you do not want

your children to watch, you can lock out the

channel. Even when a child chooses a

programme number for a locked out channel

the screen will change to blue and display

so the channel cannot be viewed.

• You can set the period of time a

maximum of 120 minutes (2 hours) in 10

minitue steps.

To cancel this function:

Press the button to set a period of time to

"OFF".

To set this function

1 Choose CHANNEL GUARD, then

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

press the number 0 (AV) button.

The menu disappers.

SET ID NO.

0000

• One minute before this function turns off

the TV, "GOOD NIGHT!" appears.

:OK

• This function cannot be used to turn off

the TV's main power.

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

• When this function is on, you can display

the SLEEP TIMER menu again to confirm

or change the remaining time.

Using the TV’s menu

2 Set the ID number you want.

To view a locked TV

channel

To choose a number:

Press the

buttons.

1 Choose a programme number in

which a TV channel locked with

the number buttons or PR LIST.

To move a cursor:

Press the

buttons.

The screen changes to blue and the

(CHANNEL GUARD) appears.

3 Press the MENU/OK button.

CHANNEL GUARD

CH / CC

• You cannot choose a locked TV channel

with the

buttons.

GUARD

:OK

2 Press the DISPLAY button to

display " ID NO. " (ID unmber

input screen).

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the

buttons to

choose a TV channel.

• The TV shows the TV programme which

the chosen TV channel is now

broadcasting.

ID NO.:

3 Press the number buttons to

enter the ID number.

5 Press the blue button to set this

function to the TV channel.

The lock is temporarily released so you

can view the TV channel.

(CHANNEL GUARD) appears and the

TV channel is locked.

If you have forgotten the ID number:

To cancel this function:

Perform step 1 of "To set this function".

After confirming the ID number, press the

TV/VIDEO button to exit the menu.

Press the blue button again.

(CHANNEL GUARD) disappears and

the lock is released.

• When you would like to cancel the

CHANNEL GUARD function, you must

perform the operation " To set this

function" again.

6 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

The menu disappears.

Using the TV's menu

AUTO SHUTOFF

You can set your TV to turn off if no signal are

received for about 15 minutes or longer after

the end of a broadcast.

ON :

This function is turned on.

OFF :

This function is turned off.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF function does not

turn off the TV's main power.

• The AUTO SHUTOFF will not work for a

VIDEO mode.

VIDEO-3 SETTING

Set the VIDEO-3 SETTING correctly accord-

ing to the video signal input from the external

device connected to the VIDEO-3 terminal. If

this setting is incorrect, images will not be

displayed.

VIDEO :

If a normal video signal (composite video

signal) is input.

COMPONENT :

If a Component video signal (Y/C^B/C^R

signals) is input.

• For detailed connecting methods, see

" Additional preparation " on page 36.

• This Television is compatible with the

Progressive Video Signal (525P signal)

only when the component video signal is

input.

Using the TV’s menu

AUTO PROGRAM

INSTALL menu

INSTALL

20%

LANGUAGE

:OK

AUTO PROGRAM

EDIT/MANUAL

TELETEXT LANGUAGE

DISP

:BACK

:OK

• To cancel the AUTO PROGRAM function,

:EXIT

press the DISPLAY button.

DISP

:BACK

2 After the TV channels have been

stored in the programme number

list, the EDIT menu appears.

LANGUAGE

You can choose the language you want to

use for the on-screen display from the

language list in a menu.

EDIT

CH/CC

1 Choose LANGUAGE, then press

the MENU/OK button.

:OK

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

• You can proceed to edit the programme

numbers list using the EDIT/MANUAL

function. For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL"

on page 30.

2 Press the

buttons to

choose a language.

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

• If a TV cannel you want to view is not

stored in the programme numbers list,

you can register it using the MANUAL

function.

The menu disappers.

For details, see "EDIT/MANUAL" on page

30.

AUTO PROGRAM

You can automatically register the TV

channels which can be received well at

your residence in the TV's programme

numbers by performing the following.

• The AUTO PROGRAM function does not

store a TV channel to the programme

number 0 (AV).

• If you do not need to use the EDIT/

MANUAL function, press the MENU/OK

button to exit from the EDIT menu.

1 Choose AUTO PROGRAM, then

press the MENU/OK button.

The AUTO PROGRAM function starts.

The TV channels you receive are

automatically stored in the programme

numbers list.

Using the TV's menu

INSERT:

EDIT/MANUAL

This function adds a new TV channel in the

current programme numbers list by using the

CH/CC number.

The EDIT/MANUAL functions are divided into

two types:

editing of the current programme numbers

(EDIT functions) and manual registration of a

TV channel you want to view to the

programme number (MANUAL function).

DELETE :

This function deletes a unnecessary TV

Channel.

MANUAL :

CAUTION

• Using the MOVE,DELETE or INSERT

function rewrites the current programme

numbers list.

Resultingly, the programme number of

some of the TV channels will change.

This function manually registers a new TV

channel in a programme number.

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

• For programme number PR 0, "AV"

appears in the programme numbers list.

• When a TV channel which has been

locked out using the CHANNEL GUARD

function, using the MANUAL function for

that TV channel cancels the CHANNEL

GUARD function.

FUNCTIONS

MOVE

1 Press the

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the button to start the

MOVE function.

• When a TV channel has already been

registered in PR 99, using the INSERT

function deletes the TV channel.

buttons to

1 Choose EDIT/MANUAL, then

press the MENU/OK button.

EDIT

CH/CC

CC 01

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

STORE

INSERT

DELETE

MANUAL

:EXIT

:BACK

MOVE

DISP

3 Press the

buttons to

2 Follow the operation description

of a function you want to use and

operate the function.

choose a new programe number.

To cancel the MOVE function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

MOVE :

This function changes a programme number

of a TV channel.

4 Press the button to change the

programme number of a TV

channel to a new programme

number.

ID :

This function registers a Channel name (ID)

to a TV channel.

Using the TV’s menu

MANUAL

CH/CC

1 Press the

buttons to

01(B/G)

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the red button to start the

ID function.

3 Enter a channel name (ID).

:OK

SEARCH+

SEARCH-

FINE+

Press the

buttons to

:EXIT

:BACK

SYSTEM

DISP

choose a character.

FINE-

press the

the cursor.

EDIT

buttons to move

To cancel the MANUAL function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

CH/CC

3 Press the button to choose the

system (sound system) for a TV

channel you want to register.

• For the sound systems in each country

or region, see the table

"BROADCASTING SYSTEMS" on page

12.

:OK

:EXIT

:BACK

DISP

4 Press the green or red button to

search for a TV channel.

To cancel the ID function:

Scanning stops when the TV finds a TV

channel. Then the TV channel is

displayed.

Press the DISPLAY button.

4 Press the MENU/OK button to

channel.

5 Press the green or red button

repeatedly until the to TV channel

you want appears.

DELETE

1 Press the

buttons to

If the TV channel reception is poor:

choose a TV channel.

2 Press the yellow button to delete

the TV channel.

Press the bule or yerrow button to

finetune the TV channel.

If you cannot hear the normal sound

even when the picture of the TV channel

appers normally:

The TV channel is deleted from the

programme numbers list.

The SYSTEM setting is worong. Press the

button and choose a SYSTEM that has

normal sound.

MANUAL

1 Press the

buttons to

choose a programme number to

which you want to register a new

TV channel.

6 Press the MENU/OK button and

programme number.

2 Press the bule button to activate

the MANUAL function.

The normal EDIT menu is resumed.

At the right side following the CH/CC

number, the SYSTEM (sound system) of

the TV channel appears.

Using the TV's menu

INSERT

PREPARATION

• Find the CH/CC number corresponding

to the channel number of the TV channel

from the on page 33.

1 Press the

buttons to

choose a programme number for

which you will register a new TV

channel.

2 Press the green button to start

the INSERT function.

EDIT

CH/CC

:OK

`-9

:EXIT

:BACK

CH/CC

DISP

3 Press the

buttons to

choose "CC" or "CH" according

to the CH/CC number of the TV

channel.

To cancel the INSERT function:

Press the DISPLAY button.

4 Press the Number buttons to

enter the remaining CH/CC

number.

The TV shifts to registration mode.

When the registration is completed, the

picture of the TV channel appears on the

screen.

• The CH/CC number is a number

indicating the broadcast frequency to the

TV. If the TV cannot detect the TV

channel corresponding to the broadcast

frequency indicated by the CH/CC

number, a picture in the no-signal state

appears.

Using the TV’s menu

CH/CC number

When you want to use the INSERT function on page 32, find the CH/CC number corresponding to the Channel

number of the TV channel from this table.

US : The US channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the United States, Philippines, etc.

CCIR: The CCIR channel numbers are the channel numbers used in the Middle East, Southeast Asia ,etc.

OIRT: The OIRT channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Eastern Europe,Russia, Vietnam, etc.

AUSTRALIA: The AUSTRALIA channel numbers are the channel numbers used in Australia, etc.

Channel

CCIR

OIRT

AUSTRALIA

AU-0

AU-1

AU-2

AU-6

AU-7

AU-8

AU-9

CCIR

OIRT

AUSTRALIA

CH 02

CH 03

CH 04

CH 05

CH 06

CH 07

CH 08

CH 09

CH 10

CH 11

CH 12

CH 13

CH 14

CH 15

CH 16

CH 17

CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 21

CH 22

CH 23

CH 24

CH 25

CH 26

CH 27

CH 28

CH 29

CH 30

CH 31

CH 32

CH 33

CH 34

CH 35

CH 36

CH 37

CH 38

CH 39

CH 40

CH 41

CH 42

CH 43

CH 44

CH 45

CH 46

CH 47

CH 48

CH 49

CH 50

CH 51

CH 52

CH 53

CH 54

CH 55

CH 56

CH 57

CH 58

CH 59

CH 60

CH 61

CH 62

CH 63

CH 64

CH 65

CH 66

CH 67

CH 68

CH 69

CH 70

US-2

CC 01

CC 02

CC 03

CC 04

CC 05

CC 06

CC 07

CC 08

CC 09

CC 10

CC 11

CC 12

CC 13

CC 14

CC 15

CC 16

CC 17

CC 18

CC 19

CC 20

CC 21

CC 22

CC 23

CC 24

CC 25

CC 26

CC 27

CC 28

CC 29

CC 30

CC 31

CC 32

CC 33

CC 34

CC 35

CC 36

CC 37

CC 38

CC 39

CC 40

CC 41

CC 42

CC 43

CC 44

CC 45

CC 46

CC 47

CC 48

CC 49

CC 50

CC 51

CC 52

CC 53

CC 54

CC 55

CC 56

CC 57

CC 58

CC 59

CC 60

CC 61

CC 62

CC 63

CC 64

CC 75

CC 76

CC 77

CC 78

CC 79

CC 95

CC 96

CC 97

CC 98

CC 99

S-1

S-2

AU-5

US-3

US-4

S-3

US-5

S-4

US-6

S-5

US-7

S-6

AU-5A

US-8

S-7

US-9

S-8

US-10

US-11

US-12

US-13

US-14

US-15

US-16

US-17

US-18

US-19

US-20

US-21

US-22

US-23

US-24

US-25

US-26

US-27

US-28

US-29

US-30

US-31

US-32

US-33

US-34

US-35

US-36

US-37

US-38

US-39

US-40

US-41

US-42

US-43

US-44

US-45

US-46

US-47

US-48

US-49

US-50

US-51

US-52

US-53

US-54

US-55

US-56

US-57

US-58

US-59

US-60

US-61

US-62

US-63

US-64

US-65

US-66

US-67

US-68

US-69

E10

E11

E12

R10

R11

R12

AU-10

AU-11

S-9

S-10

S-11

S-12

S-13

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

S-18

S-19

S-20

S-21

S-22

S-23

S-24

S-25

S-26

S-27

S-28

S-29

S-30

S-31

S-32

S-33

S-34

S-35

S-36

S-37

S-38

S-39

S-40

S-41

E21

E22

E23

E24

E25

E26

E27

E28

E29

E30

E31

E32

E33

E34

E35

E36

E37

E38

E39

E40

E41

E42

E43

E44

E45

E46

E47

E48

E49

E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

E57

E58

E59

E60

E61

E62

E63

E64

E65

E66

E67

E68

E69

W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

W+11

W+12

W+13

W+14

W+15

W+16

W+17

W+18

W+19

W+20

W+21

W+22

W+23

W+24

W+25

W+26

W+27

W+28

AU-3

AU-4

Z+1

Z+2

A-5

A-4

A-3

A-2

A-1

Using the TV's menu

• Languages that are not included in the

teletext language group that you select,

the sub-titles of the teletext program will

not be displayed properly.

TELETEXT LANGUAGE

There are 4 types of teletext language

groups. Set the teletext language group that

corresponds to the language of the teletext

program that you want to watch.

1 Choose TELETEXT LANGUAGE,

then press the MENU/OK button.

TELETEXT LANGUAGE

GROUP-1

GROUP-2

GROUP-3

GROUP-4

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

2 Press the

buttons to

choose a group.

Group

Languages

Turkish, Hungarian, English,

German, French, Italian,

Spanish, Portuguese, Greek,

Swedish, Finnish

GROUP-1

Polish, Serbian, Croatian,

Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,

Rumanian, Hungarian,

German, French, Italian,

Swedish, Finnish

GROUP-2

Russian, Bulgarian, Lettish,

Lithuanian, Estonian,

Ukrainan, Serbian, Croatian,

Slovenian, Czech, Slovak,

English, German

GROUP-3

GROUP-4

Arabic, Czech, Slovak.

Hungarian, English, German,

French, Italian, Spanish,

Portuguese, Swedish, Finnish

3 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the setting.

The menu disappears.

Using the TV's menu

DEMO menu

DEMO

OFF

:OK

:EXIT

DISP

:BACK

The DEMO function automatically demo-

strations some of the TV function.

When the DEMO function is set to

ON:

Each time the TV is turned on, the demon-

stration starts automatically.

If you do not want that to happen, set the

DEMO function to OFF.

1 Press the

choose ON.

buttons to

To cancel the DEMO function,

choose off.

2 Press the MENU/OK button to

complete the settings.

The DEMO function is set to ON, and the

demostration will start.

To stop the demonstration:

Press one of the button on the remote

control.

Additional preparation

Connecting the external

devices

Connect the devices to the TV, paying

attention to the following connection

diagram.

Before connecting anything:

• Read the manuals provided with the

devices. Depending on the devices, the

connection method may differ from the

figure. In addition, the device settings

may be changed depending on the

connection method to secure proper

operation.

(Behind the cover)

OVER

L/MONO

IN (VIDEO-4)

• Turn off all the devices including the TV.

• The "Specifications" on page 43 contains

the details of the VIDEO terminals. If you

are connecting a device not listed in the

following connection diagram, see the

"Specifications" to choose the best

VIDEO terminal.

• Note that connecting cables are not

supplied.

• When connecting devices that are

supported by AV COMPU LINK, see

"Connecting AV COMPU LINK Supported

Devices" on page 38.

AUDIO

L/MONOVIDEO

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

L/MONO

OUTPUT

UDIO

VIDEO

VCR (composite signal)

VCR (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

VCR for recording (composite signal)

DVD player (composite signal)

DVD player (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

DVD player (component video signals;

AUDIO

L/MONO VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Y/C^B/C^R

)

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

TV game (composite signal)

TV game (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

Camcorder (composite signal)

Camcorder (S-VIDEO signal; Y/C)

Headphones

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

AUDIO L/MONO

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPULINK

AV COMPU LINK cable

Additional preparation

• In the VIDEO-4 terminal, the VIDEO jack

is indicated by "V".

Connecting methods

1 Connect the TV's VIDEO jack

and the device's VIDEO OUT

(video output) jack with a video

cable.

2 Connect the TV's AUDIO jacks

(L/MONO and R) and the

device's AUDIO OUT (audio L/R

output) jacks with an audio

cable.

If connecting a device to the TV

with an S-VIDEO cabel :

Connect the VCR's S-VIDEO OUT (S-VIDEO

output) connector and the TV's "S" (S-VIDEO)

connector with an S-VIDEO cable, instead of

connecting with a video cable.

If the device's sound output is in

mono :

Connect the device's AUDIO OUT jack and

the TV's L/MONO jack with an audio cable.

Note that the connection with a video cable

will be ignored in case you conect a VCR to

the TV with both video cable and S-VIDEO

cable.

Connecting devices to the

OUTPUT terminal

The signals of the images and sound you are

currently viewing with this TV are output

through the OUTPUT terminal. By connecting

a VCR to the OUTPUT terminal, you can

record the currently shown image and sound

to that VCR. To do this, connect the VCR and

OUTPUT terminal following the steps below.

If connecting a DVD player to the

TV with a component video

cable:

Connect three jacks (Y/VIDEO, C and C ) in

the VIDEO-3 terminal and the DVD player's

COMPONENT (component video output)

jacks with a component video cables,

instead of connection with a video cable.

Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to COMPO-

NENT, according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on

page 28.

1 Connect the VIDEO jack in the

OUTPUT terminal and the VCR's

VIDEO IN (video input) jack with

a video cable.

2 Connect the AUDIO jacks (L and

R) in the OUTPUT terminal and

the VCR's AUDIO IN (audio L/R

input) jacks with an audio cable.

• This Television is compatible with the

Progressive video signal (525P signal).

(When the component video signal is

input.)

If you have a DVD player that outputs

Progressive video signals (525P) as a

component video signal, then by

attaching the device to the television with

a component video cable you can see

the actual images that are recorded on a

DVD disc as an original image source.

• When you turn off the TV, the signals from

the OUTPUT terminal are also turned off.

• The component signals input from the

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal cannot

be output through the OUTPUT terminal.

If connecting a device to the

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT terminal

with a video cable:

Connect the TV's Y/VIDEO jack and the

device's VIDEO OUT (video output) jack with

a video cables.

Connecting Headphones

Connect the headphones with a stereo mini

jack (of 3.5 mm in diameter) to the Head-

phone jack at the TV front panel.

Then set the VIDEO-3 SETTING to VIDEO

according to "VIDEO-3 SETTING" on page

28.

Additional preparation

Connecting AV COMPU

LINK Supported Devices

AV COMPU LINK remote control system is a

system in which related devices are

automatically controlled when you operate

one device.

Conditions to use the AV

COMPU LINK remote

control system

• A device equipped with an AV COMPU

LINK terminal is required.

• You must connect the TV and the device

with an AV COMPU LINK cable.

AV COMPU LINK cable is not supplied

with this TV. If an AV COMPU LINK cable

is unavailable, connect them with a cable

with dia. 3.5 mm (mono) male plugs at

both ends.

If you apply this system to the TV, you can

have the TV automatically perform the

required operations by operating one

external device. You don't have to use the

TV's remoto control to turn on the TV or

change the VIDEO modes.

• You must connect the device to an

appropriate VIDEO terminal and set it up

correctly. Otherwise the AV COMPU LINK

remote control system will not function

correctly. For details, see “ Setting up the

AV COMPU LINK remote control

system”.

Examples of the AV

COMPU LINK remote

control system operations

Simply by pressing the PLAY button on a

VCR or a DVD player, you can view images

from the device.

• The TV must be in standby mode (the

POWER lamp lighting red). If the TV’s

Main power is off (the POWER lamp off),

the AV COMPU LINK remote control

system does not function.

Simply by inserting a pre-recorded tape (a

tape with the record safety tab removed) to a

VCR, you can view the tape.

Simply by operating the AV Control Rece-

iver, you can have the TV turned on/off (in

standby mode) or the VIDEO mode changed

correctly.

Setting up the AV COMPU

LINK remote control system

• The performance of the AC COMPU

LINK remote control system varies

depending on the connected device.

See the device’s instruction manual.

CAUTION:

• With some devices, the setup method

differs from the ones explained here.

Be sure to read the device’s instruction

manual thoroughly before setting it up.

• When you select "TV SOUND" as the

input source with the AV Control

Receiver, there are cases where the TV's

MUTING function automatically operates

and the sound from the TV's speakers is

muted.

In such cases, press the VOLUME-/+

buttons or the MUTING button on the

TV's remote control to cancel the MUT-

ING function. You can regain the sound

from the TV's speakers.

1 Connect the device to the TV’s

VIDEO-1 or VIDEO-2 terminal.

If you want to connect a DVD

player to the TV with a compo-

nent video cable :

Connect the DVD player to the TV’s VIDEO-3

terminal.

• For detailed connecting instructions, see

"Connecting the external devices" on

page 36.

Additional Preparation

2 Connect the TV’s AV COMPU

LINK terminal and the device’s

AV COMPU LINK terminal with

an AV COMPU LINK cable.

3 Change the device’s setting

according to the VIDEO terminal

it is connected to.

If a VCR is connected to the

VIDEO-1 terminal :

Set the VCR’s remote control code to A code.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-1 terminal:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD2.

If a VCR is connected to the

VIDEO-2 terminal:

Set the VCR’s remote control code to B code.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-2 terminal:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD3.

If a DVD player is connected to

the VIDEO-3 terminal with a

component video cable:

Set the DVD player’s AV COMPULINK MODE

to DVD1.

• For instructions on how to change the

device’s setting, refer to the device’s

instruction manual.

• If the device you are connecting has

neither the remote control code nor the

AV COMPULINK MODE, then connect it

to the TV’s VIDEO-1 terminal.

Troubleshooting

If a problem arises while you are using the TV, please read this "Troubleshooting" well before

you request having the TV repaired. You may be able to fix it easily by yourself. For example, if

the AC plug is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the TV aerial has problems, you may think

there is a problem with the TV itself.

Important:

• This Troubleshooting guide only covers problems whose cause are not easy to determine.

If a question arise when you are operating a function, read the page(s) corresponding to

the operation of the function well, not this Troubleshooting guide.

• After you have followed the Troubleshooting description or the operating description of the

functions concerned without any success, remove the AC plug from the AC outlet and re -

quest a repair of your TV. Do not attempt to repair the TV by yourself or remove the

rearcover of the TV.

Has the TV and aerial been

connected properly?

Has the aerial cable been damaged?

Is the aerial pointed to the right dir-

ection?

If you cannot turn on

the TV

• Is the AC plug connected to the AC

outlet?

Is the aerial itself faulty?

• Is the POWER lamp lit? If not, press the

• If the TV or aerial receives interference

from the other devices, stripes or noise

may appear in the picture. Move such

device as an amplifier, personal compu-

ter, or a hair drier that can cause inter-

ference away from your TV, or try chan-

ging its location. If the aerial suffers int-

erference from a radio tower or high-

voltage wire, please contact your local

dealer.

Main power button.

No picture/No sound

• Have you chosen a TV channel whose

reception is extremely bad? In this case,

the BLUE BACK function will be activat-

ed, the entire screen becomes blue, and

the sound is muted. In spite of this, if you

want to view the TV channel, follow the

description "BLUE BACK" on page 26 to

try to change the BLUE BACK function

setting to OFF.

• If the TV receives interferences from

signal reflecting from mountains or

building, double-pictures(ghosting) will

occur.

Try to change the aerial’s direction or

replace the antenna with the one with

better directionality.

• Are your SOUND SYSTEM settings for

the TV channels correct?

Forrow the description “SOUND SYSTEM

Button” on page 12 to try to solve the

trouble.

• Are your COLOUR SYSTEM settings for

the TV channels correct? Follow the

description "COLOUR SYSTEM button"

on pege 11 to try to solve the trouble.

Poor picture

• If noise totally obscures the picture (sn-

ow), the aerial or aerial cable may have

trouble. Check the following to try to

solve the trouble :

• Has COLOUR or BRIGHT been controll-

ed properly? Follow the description

"Adjusting the picture" on page 20 to try

to adjust them properly.

• Videotaping teletext is not recommended

because it may not record correctly.

Troubleshooting

• When a white and bright still image (su-

ch as a white dress) is displayed on the

screen, the white part may look as if it

were coloured.

It is a phenomenon unavoidable due to

the nature of the picture tube itself, and

not due to a TV failure.

When the picture disappears from the

screen, the unnatural colours will also

disappear.

• When you are viewing a teletext progra-

mme, you cannot operate the menus.

Press the TV/VIDEO button to return the

teletext programme to the ordinary TV

programme to try operating the menus.

• Is the CHILD LOCK function set to ON?

If the CHILD LOCK function is set to ON,

you cannot operate the TV with the front

control buttons of the TV. Follow the

description "CHILD LOCK" on page 26 to

try to set the CHILD LOCK function to OFF.

• When viewing images from commercially

available video softwear products, or vi-

deos from videotapes which have been

recored improperly, the top of the image

may be distored.

• If the TV operation becomes disabled

suddenly, press the Main power button

on the TV and turn off the main power.

Try to press the Main power button again

to turn on the main power. If the TV

returns to a normal state, it is not a

failure.

This is due to the condition of the video

signal, and not because of malfunction.

Poor sound

• The following functions do not operate

when receiving Progressive Video Signal

(525P signal);

Remote control function:

ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE and

STROBE BUTTON

MENU function:

SHARP, TINT, DIGITAL VNR, Digipure

and ZOOM

• Have you adjusted BASS or TREBLE

properly? If not, follow the description

"Adjusting the Sound" on page 24 to try

to adjust them properly.

• When the TV channel reception is poor, it

can be hard to hear the stereo or

bilingual sound. In this case, follow the

description "STEREO / I • II" on page 24

to hear the sound more easily by

Other concerns

changing it to a mono sound.

• When the SLEEP TIMER function or

AUTO SHUTOFF function operates, the

TV is automatically turned off.

Operation disabled

• Have the batteries of the remote control

become exhausted?

If the TV is turned off suddenly, try to

press the POWER button to turn on the

TV once again. At this time, if the TV

resumes a normal state, there is no

problem.

Follow the description "Putting the

Batteries into the Remote Control" on

page 4 and replace them with new

batteries to try solve the problem.

• If you do not want sound emitted from

the TV’s speakers when using

headphones, change the TV SPEAKER

setting in the HEADPHONE menu to OFF.

For details, see “HEADPHONE” on page

25.

• Have you attempted to use the remote

control at the sides or rear of the TV or at

a location more than seven meters apart

from the TV location? Operate the remote

control in the front of your TV or a

location less than seven meters from

your TV to try to solve the ploblem.

Troubleshooting

• If you bring a magnetised device such

as a speaker near to your TV, a picture

may be warped or unnatural colours

appear at the corners of the screen.

In this case, keep the device apart from

your TV. If the speaker causes such

phenomena, use the magnetic-shielded

speaker instead.

• A picture may be tilted due to the influe-

nce of the earth's magnetism. In this

case, use the "PICTURE TILT" on page

23 to complete the tilt.

• It takes a short period of time from the

time an operation such as changing

channels is performed until an image is

displayed. This is not a malfunction.

This is the time required for the image to

stabilize before it can be displayed.

• The TV may emit a crackling sound due

to a sudden change in temperature. It

does not matter if a picture or sound

does not show any abnormality. If you

hear crackling sounds frequently while

you are viewing the TV, other causes may

be assumed.

For precautionary purposes, request

your service technician to inspect it.

• Touching the screen may cause you feel

a slight electric shock due to its static

electricity.

It is an unavoidable phenomenon due to

the construction of the picture tube. It is

not a problem with the TV.

You can rest assured that this static dis-

charge does not have harmful influence

over the human boby.

Specifications

Broadcasting systems

Colour systems

Channels and frequencies

B, G, I, D, K, K1, M

PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4.43MHz

VHF low channel (VL) =46.25 to 168.25 MHz

VHF high channel (VH) =175.25 to 463.25 MHz

UHF channel (U)

=471.25 to 863.25 MHz

Receives cable channels in mid band (X to Z+2, S1 to S10),

super band (S11 to S20) and hyper band (S21 to S41).

A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K) system

FLOF(Fastext), WST(World Standard Text)

Please see the table in the description

"TELETEXT LANGUAGE" on page 34

AC 110 to 240V, 50/60Hz

Sound-multiplex systems

Teletext systems

Lauguages displayed by

teletext

Power requirements

Audio output

Rated Power output: 20W + 20W

VIDEO-1 terminal

RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1

• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs

are available.

VIDEO-2 terminal

RCA connector X 3

• Video input and Audio L/R inputs are available.

RCA connector X 5

VIDEO-3/COMPONENT

terminal

• Video input/Component video (Y/C /C ) input and Audio

L/R inputs are available.

• Progressive video signal(525P signal) input is available.

RCA connector X 3, S-VIDEO connector X 1

• Video input, S-VIDEO (Y/C) input and Audio L/R inputs

are available.

VIDEO-4 terminal

OUTPUT terminal

RCA connector X 3

• Video output and Audio L/R outputs are available.

Stereo mini-jack (3.5 mm in diameter)

Remote control unit X 1 (RM-C214)

Headphone jack

Accessories

AA/R6 dry cell battery X 2

Speakers

HV-34LPZ : 12cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2

HV-29LPZ : 10cm round X 2, 3.5cm round X 2

HV-34LPZ : Maximum 255W Average 170W

HV-29LPZ : Maximum 254W Average 170W

HV-34LPZ : Picture tube 87cm Visible area 80cm

HV-29LPZ : Picture tube 73cm Visible area 68cm

HV-34LPZ : 898mm X 728mm X 579mm

HV-29LPZ : 732mm X 588mm X 518mm

HV-34LPZ : 75kg

Power consumption

Screen size

(measured diagonally)

Dimensions(W X H X D)

Weight

HV-29LPZ : 48kg

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

Pictures displayed on the screen using this TV's ZOOM functions should not be shown for any

commercial or demonstration purpose in public places (cafes,hotels, etc.) without the consent

of the owners of copyright of the original picture sources, as this constitutes an infringement of

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

LCT1218-001A-H

0402-Ki-NV-JMT

Благодарим за покупку цветного телевизора JVC.

Перед началом использования, пожалуйста, внимательно прочтите это

руководство, чтобы понять как пользоваться Вашим новым телевизором.

ОСТОРОЖНО:

ВО ИЗБЕЖАНИЕ ПОЖАРА И ПОРАЖЕНИЯ ЭЛЕКТРОТОКОМ,

НЕ ДОПУСКАЙТЕ ДЕЙСТВИЯ НАТЕЛЕВИЗОР ДОЖДЯ ИЛИ ВЛАГИ.

ВНИМАНИЕ:

ПРИ ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИИТЕЛЕВИЗОРА СОБЛЮДАЙТЕ

СЛЕДУЮЩИЕ ПРАВИЛА ЛИЧНОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ.

Подключайте телевизор только к источникам питания, параметры которых

соответствуют параметрам, указанным на задней стенке телевизора.

Не допускайте повреждений шнура и вилки питания. При отключении телевизора от

сети выньте вилку из розетки, держась за вилку, а не за шнур.

Ни в коем случае не перегораживайте и не закрывайте вентиляционные отверстия.

Ни в коем случае не устанавливайте

телевизор в местах с плохой

вентиляцией.

15 cm

При установке телевизора оставьте

вентиляционные зазоры по

периметру, величина зазоров должна

быть не меньше показанных на рис

10 cm

15 cm

значений.

Не допускайте попадания предметов или жидкости в отверстия корпуса.

В случае неисправности выньте вилку питания из розетки и вызовите мастера.

Не пытайтесь отремонтировать телевизор самостоятельно, не открывайте заднюю крышку.

Поверхность экрана телевизора может быть легко повреждена. При обращении с

телевизором соблюдайте предельную осторожность. Если экран загрязнится,

протрите его мягкой сухой тканью. Ни в коем случае не нажимайте сильно на экран.

Ни в коем случае не используйте чистящие или моющие средства.

Если Вы не собираетесь пользоваться телевизором в течение длительного времени,

обязательно отключите его от сетевой розетки.

Настройка телевизора

ВНИМАНИЕ

• èÂÂ‰ Í‡ÍËÏ-ÎË·Ó ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂÏ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂ

‚Ò˛ ‡ÔÔ‡‡ÚÛÛ, ‚ ÚÓÏ ˜ËÒÎÂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ.

1 Подсоединение антенны и ВМ

• ÄÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·ÂÎ¸ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË ÌÂ

‚ıÓ‰ËÚ.àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂÍ‡˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚È75-éÏ

ÍÓ‡ÍÒË‡Î¸Ì˚È Í‡·ÂÎ¸.

рис. A

• èÂÂ‰ ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂÏ ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ

ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó ÔÓ Çå.

Если ВМ не подсоединяется (см. рис. A):

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·ÂÎ¸ Í „ÌÂÁ‰Û

‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

Если ВМ подсоединяется (см. рис. B):

1 Подсоедините антенный кабель к

входному гнезду антенны ВМ и

соедините ВМ и телевизор друг с

другом с помощью другого

антенного кабеля.

2 Соедините видеокабелем гнездо

VIDEO OUT (выход видео)

рис. В

видеомагнитофона и гнездо

VIDEO (видео) телевизора.

Для соединения ВМ с телевизором с помощью

кабеля S-VIDEO выполните следующее:

ëÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO OUT

‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡ Ë ‡Á˙ÂÏ S ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ Í‡·ÂÎﬂ S-VIDEO A, ‡ ÌÂ ‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ.

3 Соедините гнезда VIDEO OUT (L/R

аудиовыходы) видеомагнитофона и

гнезда AUDIO (L/МОNО и R)

телевизора с помощью аудиокабеля.

• ÖÒÎË ‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰ ‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡ ﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ

ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍËÏ, ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO

OUT (‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) ‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡ Ë

„ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO L/MONO (‡Û‰ËÓ Î/ÏÓÌÓ)

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ‡Û‰ËÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ.

• ÖÒÎË Çå ËÏÂÂÚ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AV COMPU LINK,

ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÓÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËÂÈ AV

COMPU LINK. ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛

ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,

ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU LINK” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 38.

ç‡ÒÚÓÈÍ‡ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

2 Подсоединение шнура питания

Вставьте вилку шнура в сетевую розетку.

3 Установка батареек в пульт

дистанционного управления

ÇÓÁ¸ÏËÚÂ 2 ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË AA/R6.

Встаьте батареи, начиная с кнопца, помеченного

знаком

и соблюдая полярности

• ëÓ·Î˛‰‡ÈÚÂ ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËË ÔÓ ·ÂÁÓÔ‡ÒÌÓÒÚË,

ÛÍ‡Á‡ÌÌ˚Â Ì‡ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍ‡ı.

• ÖÒÎË ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ, Á‡ÏÂÌËÚÂ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË.

• Å‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË, ‚ıÓ‰ﬂ˘ËÂ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË,

ÔÂ‰Ì‡ÁÌ‡˜ÂÌ˚ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ ‰Îﬂ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË Ë

ÔÓ‚ÂÍË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡. á‡ÏÂÌËÚÂ ˝ÚË ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË

Í‡Í ÏÓÊÌÓ ÒÍÓÂÂ.

4 Выполнение

первоначальных настроек

èË ÔÂ‚ÓÏ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ıÓ‰ËÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ

ÔÂ‚ÓÌ‡˜‡Î¸Ì˚ı Ì‡ÒÚÓÂÍ, Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ

ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC.

1 Нажмите кнопку включения питания

телевизора

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ Ë ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC.

• ÖÒÎË ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÓÒÚ‡ÂÚÒﬂ

Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï Ë ÌÂ ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚Ï, ˝ÚÓ ÓÁÌ‡˜‡ÂÚ,

˜ÚÓ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ì‡ıÓ‰ËÚÒﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ.

ÑÎﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ

POWER Ì‡ ÔÛÎ¸ÚÂ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ.

Индикатор питания

POWER

Кнопка

выключателя

сети

• ÖÒÎË ÎÓ„ÓÚËÔ JVC ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ, ˝ÚÓ ÓÁÌ‡˜‡ÂÚ, ˜ÚÓ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÛÊÂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÎÒﬂ. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‰Îﬂ

‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËﬂ Ì‡˜‡Î¸Ì˚ı Ì‡ÒÚÓÂÍ ‚ÓÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂÒ¸

ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂÏË “üáõä” Ë “ÄÇíé èêéÉ”. ÅÓÎÂÂ

ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “åÂÌ˛

çÄëíêéâäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 29.

2 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

èÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ üáõä. Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ﬂÁ˚ÍÓ‚

ËÁ ÔÓﬂ‚Ë‚¯Â„ÓÒﬂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÒÔËÒÍ‡.

DISP

ç‡ÒÚÓÈÍ‡ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

3 Нажимая кнопки

, выберите

POWER

TV/VIDEO

РУССКИЙ. После этого нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

PICTURE

MODE

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

ÇÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé èêéÉ.

èËÌËÏ‡ÂÏ˚Â ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁËÓÌÌ˚Â ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î˚

·Û‰ÛÚ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË ÒÓı‡ÌﬂÚ¸Òﬂ ‚ Ô‡ÏﬂÚË

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ‚ ‚Ë‰Â ÒÔËÒÍ‡ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.

RETURN

MULTI

• ÑÎﬂ ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÄÇíé èêéÉ. Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ

ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

MUTING

4 После сохранения телеканалов в

списке номеров программ появится

меню НАСТРОЙКА.

PIP

SUB-P

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

SIZE

• èÓÒÎÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ Â‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÒÔËÒÓÍ

ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌÍˆËË

çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû. ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛

ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “çÄëíêéâäÄ/

Çêìóçìû” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 30.

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

TEXT

• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ÌÂ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍÂ

ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, Â„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ

Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌÍˆËË êìóçÄü.

ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 30.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé èêéÉ. ÌÂ ÒÓı‡ÌﬂÂÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î˚

Ì‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÂ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ 0 (AV).

• ÖÒÎË ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È

ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÌÂ ÌÛÊÌ‡, Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MENU/OK

‰Îﬂ Á‡Í˚‚‡ÌËﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.

На этом настройка заканчивается.

Новый телевизор JVC к Вашим услугам!

Кнопки и функции телевизора

Включение питания

Нажмите кнопку питания 1 .

àÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER 2 Á‡„ÓËÚÒﬂ Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï

Ë ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÓÈ‰ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ.

ÑÎﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ :

ÒÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ.

àÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER 2 ÔÓ„‡ÒÌÂÚ.

Включение телевизора,

находящегося в режиме

ожидания

Нажмите одну из кнопок CHANNEL

m 5 .

SPATIALIZER ECO POWER

àÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER 2 ËÁÏÂÌËÚ ˆ‚ÂÚ Ò

Í‡ÒÌÓ„Ó Ì‡ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚È Ë ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ.

• ç‡ıÓ‰ﬂ˘ËÈÒﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊÂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸

Ì‡ÊËÏÓÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/VIDEO 3 .

8 2

Выбор телеканала

Нажимайте кнопки CHANNEL m 5 .

Выбор панели ВИДЕО

Нажимайте кнопки TV/VIDEO 3 или

CHANNEL m 5 .

Регулировка громкости

Нажимайте кнопки VOLUME m 4 .

èÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÛÓ‚Ìﬂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË.

Кнопка MENU 6

(За крышкой)

ç‡ÊËÏÓÏ ˝ÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË ÓÚÍ˚‚‡ÂÚÒﬂ ÏÂÌ˛.

ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡”

Ì‡ ÒÚ. 19.

OVER

L/MONO

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

IN (VIDEO-4)

Датчик пульта

6 5 4 3

дистанционного

управления и ЭКО-сенсор 9

Индикатор ECО 7

ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ñàîêéÇéâ

ùäéëÖçëéê Ì‡ Çäã ËÎË ÑàëèãÖâ, Á‡„ÓËÚÒﬂ

ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ECé.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ИндикаторSPATIALIZER8

ùÚÓÚ ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ Á‡„Ó‡ÂÚÒﬂ, ÂÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸

ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ SPATIALIZER Ì‡ åéçé ËÎË LIVE.

Гнездо головного

телефона 0

ÑÎﬂ ÔÓ‰ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂ ÒÚÂÂÓ ÏËÌË„ÌÂÁ‰Ó (‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ

3,5 ÏÏ).

UDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

èË ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚

ÒÎÂ‰ÛÈÚÂ ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËﬂÏ, ÔË‚Â‰ÂÌÌ˚Ï ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.

UDIO

R ^AL/MONO

VIDEO-3

COMPONENT

OUTPUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

Панель VIDEO-1 =

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 3 Ë 36.

AUDIO

L/MONO

VIDEO

OVER

VIDEO-1

VIDEO-2

Панель VIDEO-2 ~

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.

C_R

C_B

Y/VIDEO

VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT

R ^AUDL^I/^OMONO

OUTPUT

Панель VIDEO-3/

COMPONENT !

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 28 Ë 36.

VIDEO

AUDIO

AV COMPU LINK

Панель VIDEO-4 -

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.

Панель OUTPUT @

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36.

Гнездо антенны #

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚È Í‡·ÂÎ¸.

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 3.

ПанельAVCOMPULINK $

• ëÏ. ÒÚ. 36 Ë 38.

Кнопки и функции пульта дистанционного управления

Включение телевизора,

находящегося в режиме ожидания

Нажмите кнопку POWER.

POWER

TV/VIDEO

ñ‚ÂÚ ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER ËÁÏÂÌËÚÒﬂ Ò Í‡ÒÌÓ„Ó

PICTURE

MODE

Ì‡ ÁÂÎÂÌ˚È Ë ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ.

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

• íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ, Ì‡ıÓ‰ﬂ˘ËÈÒﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ,

ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸ Ì‡ÊËÏÓÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/VIDEO, ÍÌÓÔÍË

CHANNEL m ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÓÍ Ò ÌÓÏÂ‡ÏË.

Для выключения телевизора:

ëÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ POWER.

ñ‚ÂÚ ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER ËÁÏÂÌËÚÒﬂ Ò ÁÂÎÂÌÓ„Ó

Ì‡ Í‡ÒÌ˚È Ë ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÓÈ‰ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ.

RETURN

MULTI

Выбор телеканала

Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚, ÔÓ‰ ÍÓÚÓ˚Ï ·˚Î

MUTING

Á‡ÔÓÏÌÂÌ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î.

Нажимайте кнопку CHANNEL m или

введите номер программы (ПР) с помощью

кнопок с номерами.

PIP

SUB-P

• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌÓ ‚‚ÂÒÚË ‰‚ÛÁÌ‡˜Ì˚È ÌÓÏÂ, Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ

ÍÌÓÔÍÛ -/-- ‰Îﬂ ÔÂÂıÓ‰‡ Ì‡ ‰‚ÛÁÌ‡˜ÌÛ˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ.

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

• ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ËÁ ÒÔËÒÍ‡ èêéÉ. ãàëí.

ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“äÌÓÔÍ‡ DISPLAY” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 11.

• ÖÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÌÂ˜ÂÚÍÓÂ ËÎË ÌÂÚ Á‚ÛÍ‡, ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ

ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “äÌÓÔÍ‡ COLOUR SYSTEM” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 11.

• ÖÒÎË Á‚ÛÍ ıÓÓ¯Â„Ó Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚‡ ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ ‰‡ÊÂ

ÔË ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËË ıÓÓ¯Â„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ,

‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËË ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “äÌÓÔÍ‡ SOUND

SYSTEM” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 12.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

TEXT

Регулирование громкости

Нажимайте кнопки VOLUME m.

• ÉÓÏÍÓÒÚ¸ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ˝ÚËÏË ÍÌÓÔÍ‡ÏË ÌÂ

Â„ÛÎËÛÂÚÒﬂ. ëÎÂ‰ÛÈÚÂ ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËﬂÏ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.

Просмотр изображения с

внешнего устройства

Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO, ˜ÂÂÁ ÍÓÚÓÛ˛

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌﬂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÌÂ¯ÌÂÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Нажмите кнопкуTV/VIDEO.

16:9

ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3) ‚

¯ËÓÍÓÙÓÏ‡ÚÌÓÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ (ÙÓÏ‡Ú

16:9).

• è‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

ÍÌÓÔÓÍ CHANNEL m ËÎË ËÁ ÒÔËÒÍ‡ èêéÉ.

ãàëí.

Для возврата к телеканалу:

ç‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO, ÍÌÓÔÍÛ CHANNEL m

ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÍÛ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ.

Кнопка MUTING

• ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÚÒﬂ ‰Îﬂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò ÙÓÏ‡ÚÓÏ 16:9,

ÒÊ‡Ú˚ı ‰Ó Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÙÓÏ‡Ú‡

(ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3), ÓÌ ÔÓÁ‚ÓÎﬂÂÚ

Кнопка MUTING используется для

выключения звука. Повторный

нажим кнопки MUTING приводит к

включению звука на той же

громкости, которая была до

выключения звука.

‚ÓÒÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÔÂ‚ÓÌ‡˜‡Î¸Ì˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú.

КнопкаSPATIALIZER

ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌÍˆËË SPATIALIZER ÏÓÊÌÓ

ÔÓÎÛ˜‡Ú¸ “ÊË‚ÓÈ” (Live) ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ ÔË

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Surround sound

(ÓÍÛÊ‡˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ).

Кнопка ZOOM

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ ÙÓÏ‡Ú‡

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÛÚÂÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ

ÙÓÏ‡Ú‡. Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ ÓÔÚËÏ‡Î¸Ì˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ZOOM.

Нажмите кнопку SPATIALIZER

для выбора режима.

Для выбора режима нажмите кнопку

ZOOM.

LIVE:

ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸

• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î‡

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P) Ì‡Ê‡Ú¸ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ZOOM, Ì‡

˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸ ÒË„Ì‡Î “525P” Ë

ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ZOOM ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ.

ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÒÚÂÂÓÁ‚ÛÍ‡

‚ ÓÍÛÊ‡˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ Ò Û‚ÂÎË˜ÂÌÌÓÈ

„ÎÛ·ËÌÓÈ Ë ÓÍÛÊ‡˛˘ËÏË ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ‡ÏË.

MOНO:

НОРМАЛЬНОЕ

ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸

ÔÂÓ·‡ÁÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ Ó·˚˜ÌÓ„Ó ÏÓÌÓÁ‚ÛÍ‡ ‚

Á‚ÛÍ, ËÏËÚËÛ˛˘ËÈ ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ

Á‚Û˜‡ÌËÂ.

àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÚÒﬂ ‰Îﬂ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËﬂ ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ„Ó,

ÌÂËÁÏÂÌÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 4:3).

ВЫКЛ:

ùÚÓ ÂÊËÏ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ.

ZOOM

• êÂÊËÏ LIVE ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ

ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÒÚÂÂÓÁ‚ÛÍ‡.

åÓÊÌÓ ÛÍÛÔÌËÚ¸ ¯ËÓÍÓÙÓÏ‡ÚÌÓÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 16:9), Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ ÓÌÓ

Á‡ÔÓÎÌËÚ ‚ÂÒ¸ ˝Í‡Ì.

• êÂÊËÏ LIVE ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË

ÔÓÒÎÛ¯Ë‚‡ÌËË ˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â

ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚.

• êÂÊËÏ MOçO ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ

ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÏÓÌÓÁ‚ÛÍ‡.

• ãÂ‚˚È Ë Ô‡‚˚È Í‡ﬂ ¯ËÓÍÓÙÓÏ‡ÚÌÓ„Ó

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ (ÙÓÏ‡Ú 16:9) ·Û‰ÛÚ ÓÚÂÁ‡Ì˚.

ëËÒÚÂÏ‡ SPATIALIZER ËÁ„ÓÚÓ‚ÎÂÌ‡ ÔÓ

ÎËˆÂÌÁËË ÍÓÏÔ‡ÌËË Desper Products,Inc.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Для регистрации телеканала как

“Возвращаемый телеканал” :

Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚,

Ì‡ÁÌ‡˜ÂÌÌ˚È ‰Îﬂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡,

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ RETURN+ Ë ‰ÂÊËÚÂ ÂÂ

Ì‡Ê‡ÚÓÈ ‚ ÚÂ˜ÂÌËÂ ÌÂ ÏÂÌÂÂ 3 ÒÂÍÛÌ‰.

èÓﬂ‚ÎÂÌËÂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ Ì‡‰ÔËÒË “ÇéáÇêÄí

äÄçÄãÄ áÄèêéÉêÄååàêéÇÄç!”

ÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂÊ‰‡ÂÚ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËÂ Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË.

Кнопка BASS

ÑÎﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÏÓ˘Ì˚ı ·‡ÒÓ‚ ÏÓÊÌÓ

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ëìèÖê ÅÄë.

Для включения и выключения

функции СУПЕР БАС нажимайте

кнопку BASS.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

Для отмены регистрации телеканала как

“возвращаемого” :

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ Î˛·Ó„Ó ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ RETURN+ Ë ‰ÂÊËÚÂ ÂÂ

Ì‡Ê‡ÚÓÈ ‚ ÚÂ˜ÂÌËÂ ÌÂ ÏÂÌÂÂ 3 ÒÂÍÛÌ‰.

ç‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸ “ÇéáÇêÄí

äÄçÄãÄ éíåÖçÖç!”, ˜ÚÓ ÓÁÌ‡˜‡ÂÚ ÓÚÏÂÌÛ

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË.

Кнопка PICTURE MODE

åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚

èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà ‰Îﬂ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓ„Ó

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚÓ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

• èË ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËﬂ “‚ÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏÓ„Ó

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡” ÓÚÏÂÌﬂÂÚÒﬂ.

Для выбора режима нажимайте

кнопку PICTURE MODE.

• ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ ÔÓÔÂÂÏÂÌÌÓ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸

“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î” Ë Í‡ÍÓÈ-ÎË·Ó

‰Û„ÓÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ÒÌ‡˜‡Î‡ ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ˝ÚÓÚ

‰Û„ÓÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ÔÓÒÎÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó Ì‡ÊËÏÓÏ

ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ ·Û‰ÂÚ

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸Òﬂ Ì‡ “‚ÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È”

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î.í‡ÍËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜‡Ú¸Òﬂ

ÏÂÊ‰Û ‰‚ÛÏﬂ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ÏË.

ЯРКИЙ :

èÓ‚˚¯‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.

СТАНДАРТ :

ÑÂÎ‡ÂÚ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ

ÒÚ‡Ì‰‡ÚÌ˚ÏË.

МЯГКИЙ :

ëÏﬂ„˜‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.

Функция ВОЗВРАТ :

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ Á‡ÔÓÏËÌ‡ÂÚ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ÍÓÚÓ˚È ·˚Î ‚˚·‡Ì ÔÓÒÎÂ‰ÌËÏ

ÔÂÂ‰ ÔÓÒÏ‡ÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Ï ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓÏ, Í‡Í “èÓÒÎÂ‰ÌËÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î”.

ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+ ÏÓÊÌÓ

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÊ‰Û ÔÓÒÏ‡ÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Ï ‚

‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓÏ Ë “èÓÒÎÂ‰ÌËÈ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î”.

Кнопка RETURN+

äÌÓÔÍ‡ RETURN+ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌﬂÂÚ ‰‚Â ÙÛÌÍˆËË:

ÇéáÇêÄí+ Ë ÇéáÇêÄí.

ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì Í‡Í

“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î”, ‰Îﬂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ ‰ÂÈÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÇéáÇêÄí+.

ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ÌÂ Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì Í‡Í

“ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î”, ‰Îﬂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ ‰ÂÈÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÇéáÇêÄí.

• ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ‰‚‡

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ ÔÓÔÂÂÏÂÌÌÓ Ò

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÇéáÇêÄí,

‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ÒÌ‡˜‡Î‡ Ó‰ËÌ, ‡ Á‡ÚÂÏ

‚ÚÓÓÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ Ò

ˆËÙ‡ÏË. ÖÒÎË ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ÌÂ

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛﬂ ÍÌÓÔÍË Ò ˆËÙ‡ÏË, ‚

Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â “èÓÒÎÂ‰ÌËÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î” ÏÓÊÂÚ

Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÌÂ ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î,

ÍÓÚÓ˚È ·˚Î ‚˚·‡Ì ÔÂ‚˚Ï.

Функция ВОЗВРАТ+ :

á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡‚ ˜‡ÒÚÓ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚È

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Í‡Í “ÇÓÁ‚‡˘‡ÂÏ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î”,

ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ‚ Î˛·ÓÈ

ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ÔÛÚÂÏ Ì‡ÊËÏ‡ ÍÌÓÔÍË RETURN+.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Кнопка

Выбор телеканала или

панели ВИДЕО.

1 Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY для

отображения ПРОГ. ЛИСТ.

èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ‰‚ÛﬂÁ˚˜Ì˚ı ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÏÓÊÌÓ

‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ üÁ˚Í 1

(Bilingual I (Sub I)) ËÎË üÁ˚Í 2 (Bilingual II (Sub II)).

èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÔËÂÏÂ ÒÚÂÂÓÚ‡ÌÒÎﬂˆËË

ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸Òﬂ ÒÓ ÒÚÂÂÓ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓ ‰Îﬂ

ÛÎÛ˜¯ÂÌËﬂ ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚË Á‚ÛÍ‡.

2 Кнопками

выберите номер программы

или панели ВИДЕО. Затем

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

• êﬂ‰ÓÏ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ‚ èêéÉ

ãàëí, ‰Îﬂ ÍÓÚÓ˚ı Á‡‰‡Ì‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ àÑ

çéåÖê, ÔÓﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ ÁÌ‡Í ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËË

Нажмите кнопку

выбора режима звучания.

/ для

: ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌËﬂ

: åÓÌÓÙÓÌËﬂ

: üÁ˚Í I (sub I)

• çÓÏÂ‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎÂÈ ÇàÑÖé

Â„ËÒÚËÛ˛ÚÒﬂ ÔÓÒÎÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ Ò

ÌÓÏÂÓÏ èP 99.

: üÁ˚Í II (sub II)

МОНО : éÚÏÂÌﬂÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Multi Sound, Á‚ÛÍ

ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍËÏ.

Кнопка COLOUR SYSTEM

• ÇÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚Â ÂÊËÏ˚ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËﬂ Á‡‚ËÒﬂÚ

ÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.

ëËÒÚÂÏ‡ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒﬂ

‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË, o‰Ì‡ÍÓ, ÂÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ

ÌÂ˜ÂÚÍÓÂ ËÎË ÌÂˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÂ, ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.

• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ‡ı

ÇàÑÖé.

Для выбора системы цветности

используйте кнопку COLOUR

SYSTEM.

КнопкаDISPLAY

Ñ‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÓÚÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ

èêéÉ. ãàëí, ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ËÎË

ÌÓÏÂ‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÇàÑÖé.

АВТО :

ùÚÓÚ ÂÊËÏ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ ‡ÒÔÓÁÌ‡‚‡ÌËÂ

ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÔÓ ‚ıÓ‰ÌÓÏÛ ÒË„Ì‡ÎÛ.

Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY.

• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â ÒË„Ì‡Î‡ ‡·ÓÚ‡

ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÄÇíé ÏÓÊÂÚ Ì‡Û¯ËÚ¸Òﬂ. èË

ÔÎÓıÓÏ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ

ÄÇíé ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ‰Û„Û˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.

ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË DISPLAY ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í

ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÏÛ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆËË Ì‡

˝Í‡ÌÂ.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé ‡ÒÔÓÁÌ‡ÂÚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÔÓ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓÏÛ ÒË„Ì‡ÎÛ Ë

‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Û˛ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË.

• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‚˚·Ó‡ ëàëíÖåõ ñÇÖíçéëíà

‰ÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ (SUB-

picture), ÒÏ. ‡Á‰ÂÎ “àÁÏÂÌÂÌËÂ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 15.

• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚Â ‚

‡ÁÎË˜Ì˚ı ÒÚ‡Ì‡ı Ë Â„ËÓÌ‡ı, ÛÍ‡Á‡Ì˚

‚ Ú‡·ÎËˆÂ “íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ

ëàëíÖåõ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 12.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Кнопка SOUND SYSTEM

ТЕЛЕВЕЩАТЕЛЬНЫЕ

СИСТЕМЫ

èÓ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ú‡·ÎËˆ‡Ï ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ Ë ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË,

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚Â ‚ ‚‡¯ÂÏ Â„ËÓÌÂ.

ëËÒÚÂÏ‡ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ

(Sound System) ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒﬂ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË.

é‰Ì‡ÍÓ, ÂÒÎË Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ

ÒÎ˚¯ÌÓ Ò ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË ÔË ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓÏ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË, ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.

Для выбора нужной системы

звукового сопровождения

нажимайте кнопку SOUND

SYSTEM.

B/G : ÒËÒÚÂÏ‡ B/G

: ÒËÒÚÂÏ‡ I

D/K : ÒËÒÚÂÏ‡ D/K

: ÒËÒÚÂÏ‡ M

• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ

ÇàÑÖé.

• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ,

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚Â ‚ ‡ÁÎË˜Ì˚ı ÒÚ‡Ì‡ı

Ë Â„ËÓÌ‡ı, ÔË‚Â‰ÂÌ˚ ‚ Ú‡·ÎËˆÂ

“íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ ëàëíÖåõ” Ì‡

ÒÚ. 12.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

• äÓ„‰‡ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ËÏÂÂÚÒﬂ

Кнопка FREEZE

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÂ‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÒÚÓÔ-

Í‡‰‡ ÉãÄÇçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ‚ ‚Ë‰Â

ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë

ÉãÄÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ, ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ

STROBE ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive

Нажмите кнопку FREEZE.

‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î‡ (ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P) Ì‡Ê‡Ú¸

ÍÌÓÔÍÛ STROBE, Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ

Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸ ÒË„Ì‡Î “525P” Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ

STROBE ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ.

• ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË ÚÓÌ‡Î¸ÌÓÒÚË ñÇ. íéç ÌÂ

ÏÓ„ÛÚ ·˚Ú¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌ˚ ‰Îﬂ ÌÂÔÓ‰‚ËÊÌ˚ı

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ, ‰‡ÊÂ ÔË

ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÂ

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË NTSC.

Для отмены функции

ЗАМОРОЗИТЬ :

ëÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ FREEZE.

• äÓ„‰‡ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ËÏÂÂÚÒﬂ

àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ÙÛÌÍˆËË MULTI

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‚˚ÁÓ‚‡ Ì‡

˝Í‡Ì ÌÂÒÍÓÎ¸ÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò ÚÂÏ,

˜ÚÓ·˚ Ó·ÎÂ„˜ËÚ¸ ‚˚·Ó Ì‡Ë·ÓÎÂÂ

ËÌÚÂÂÒÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.

ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë

ÉãÄÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ, ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ FREEZE

ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive

‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î‡ (ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P) Ì‡Ê‡Ú¸

ÍÌÓÔÍÛ FREEZE, Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ

Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸ ÒË„Ì‡Î “525P” Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ FREEZE

‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ.

1 Нажмите кнопку MULTI.

Ç ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ Ì‡ÊËÏÓ‚ ÍÌÓÔÍË MULTI

˝Í‡Ì ËÁÏÂÌﬂÂÚÒﬂ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ

Ó·‡ÁÓÏ.

Кнопка STROBE

ùÚ‡ ÍÌÓÔÍ‡ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÓÚÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ

ÉãÄÇçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ‚ ‚Ë‰Â 15

ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Ó‚‡ÚÂÎ¸Ì˚ı ÒÚÓÔ-Í‡‰Ó‚.

Peжим MULTI из 5 изобрaжeний

Нажмите кнопку STROBE.

Peжим MULTI из 16 изобрaжeний

Для отмены функции STROBE :

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ STROBE ‰Îﬂ ‚ÓÁ‚‡Ú‡ Í

ÉãÄÇçéåì ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌË˛.

• èË ÒÎ‡·ÓÏ ÒË„Ì‡ÎÂ ÉãÄÇçéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÒÚÓÔ-Í‡‰˚

‚ÓÒÔÓËÁ‚Ó‰ﬂÚÒﬂ Ò ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËﬂÏË.

Oтмена Функции MULTI

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Для вызова на экран следующего

изображения Multi :

àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ÙÛÌÍˆËË PIP

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ NEXT.

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ó‰ÌÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ„Ó

ÔÓÒÏÓÚ‡ ‰‚Ûı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ (ÉãÄÇç Ë

ÇíéêéëíÖè).

2 Выберите изображение с

помощью кнопок

, а

затем нажмите кнопку MENU/

OK.

ùÍ‡Ì ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ Ì‡ ‚˚·‡ÌÌ˚È

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ËÎË ÂÊËÏ ÇàÑÖé.

Нажмите кнопку PIP.

ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË PIP ËÁÏÂÌﬂÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ì‡

˝Í‡ÌÂ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ:

• çÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, Ì‡ ÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÌËÍ‡ÍËÂ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î˚ ÌÂ Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ì˚, Ë

ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ, ‰Îﬂ ÍÓÚÓ˚ı

Ì‡ÁÌ‡˜ÂÌ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ àÑ çéåÖê, ÌÂ

ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡˛ÚÒﬂ.

• Ç˚ÔÓÎÌﬂÚ¸ ÓÔÂ‡ˆËË Ò ÏÂÌ˛, Ú‡ÍËÂ Í‡Í

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚Í‡ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı

ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚, ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ. ÑÎﬂ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËﬂ

ÓÔÂ‡ˆËÈ Ò ÏÂÌ˛ ÓÚÏÂÌËÚÂ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛

MULTI.

• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive

‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î‡ (ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P) Ì‡Ê‡Ú¸

ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MULTI, Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ

Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸ ÒË„Ì‡Î “525P” Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ MULTI

‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ.

• Ç ÚÂ˜ÂÌËÂ ÌÂÔÓ‰ÓÎÊËÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ„Ó

ÔÂËÓ‰‡, ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ„Ó ‰Îﬂ

Á‡Í˚‚‡ÌËﬂ ‰ËÒÔÎÂﬂ ÏÌÓ„Ó˜ËÒÎÂÌÌ˚ı

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ, Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ

·Û‰ÂÚ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Ó‚‡Ú¸.

• ëÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ó‰ÌÓÈ Ë ÚÓÈ ÊÂ

ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ (ËÎË ˜ÂÂÁ Ó‰ÌÛ Ë ÚÛ ÊÂ

Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ ÇàÑÖé) Ó‰ÌÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌÓ Í‡Í

ÉãÄÇçéÖ Ë ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÒË„Ì‡ÎÂ ÉãÄÇçéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÒË„Ì‡Î ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÂÚ Ú‡ÍÊÂ ·˚Ú¸ ÔÎÓıËÏ.

• ÖÒÎË ÒÚ‡Ì‰‡Ú˚ ÓÒÌÓ‚ÌÓ„Ó Ë

‰ÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ‡ÁÎË˜Ì˚,

Ëı ‚ÂıÌËÂ Ë ÌËÊÌËÂ ˜‡ÒÚË ÏÓ„ÛÚ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÛÚ¸.

• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌÍˆËË PIP ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ

ZOOM ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ.

• ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ

ÔÓÎÛ˜ËÚ¸ ‚ ‚Ë‰Â ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ÒË„Ì‡Î‡

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

• ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î‡

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P) Ì‡Ê‡Ú¸ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ PIP, Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ

ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸ ÒË„Ì‡Î “525P” Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ

PIP ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

4 Нажмите кнопку

выбора ВТОРОСТЕП, а затем

кнопку для выбора нужной

для

Выбор телеканала для

ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО

изображения

системы цветности. После этого

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

Нажмите кнопку SUB-P m.

• àÁÏÂÌﬂÚ¸ ëàëíÖåì ñÇÖíçéëíà

ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË COLOUR SYSTEM ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

Прослушивание звукового

сопровождения

ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО

изображения

Кнопка POSITION

á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ

ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÔË

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÂÊËÏ‡ “PeÊËÏ Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ”.

ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ

ÔÓÒÎÛ¯Ë‚‡Ú¸ ˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚, ÔË

˝ÚÓÏ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ éëçéÇçéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÔÂÂ‰‡‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ˜ÂÂÁ

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

Нажимайте кнопку POSITION.

ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “çAìôçàKà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.

èË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ Ì‡ÊËÏÂ ˝ÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË

ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ

ÔÂÂÏÂ˘‡Ú¸Òﬂ ‚ Ì‡Ô‡‚ÎÂÌËË ÔÓÚË‚

˜‡ÒÓ‚ÓÈ ÒÚÂÎÍË.

Изменение системы

цветности

ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОГО

изображения

1 Когда на экране имеется

ВТОРОСТЕПЕННОЕ

изображение, нажмите кнопку

MENU/OK для вызова на экран

МЕНЮ (основное меню).

Кнопка SWAP

ùÚ‡ ÍÌÓÔÍ‡ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÏÂÌﬂÚ¸ ÏÂÒÚ‡ÏË

2 Нажмите кнопки

ÉãÄÇçéÖ Ë ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

для выборы СВОЙСТВА

ИЗОБРАЖЕНИЯ, а затем

кнопку MENU/OK.

Нажмите кнопку SWAP.

3 Нажмите кнопку

для

выборы СИСТЕМА ЦВЕТНОСТИ,

а затем кнопку MENU/OK.

• çÂ Ì‡ÊËÏ‡ÈÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ SWAP ÔË

Á‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡ÌËË ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ Ì‡ Çå –

˝ÚÓ ÔË‚Â‰ÂÚ Í ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË˛ ‚˚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó

ÒË„Ì‡Î‡ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

èÓÒÏÓÚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚

Ò ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ

Кнопка HOLD

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËﬂ (HOLD)

ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÒÍÓÎ¸

Û„Ó‰ÌÓ ‰ÓÎ„Ó, ‰‡ÊÂ ÍÓ„‰‡ ÔËÌËÏ‡ÂÚÒﬂ

ÌÂÒÍÓÎ¸ÍÓ ‰Û„Ëı ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡.

1 Выберите телеканал с

телетекстом.

2 Нажмите кнопкуTV/TEXT.

Нажмите кнопку HOLD

ç‡ÊËÏ ÍÌÓÔÍË TV/TEXT ËÁÏÂÌﬂÂÚ ÂÊËÏ

ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ Ó·‡ÁÓÏ:

Ç ÎÂ‚ÓÏ ‚ÂıÌÂÏ Û„ÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ

Для отмены функции Hold :

ÒÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ HOLD.

Кнопка REVEAL

ç‡ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ‡ı ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡

ËÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ÒÍ˚Ú˚È ÚÂÍÒÚ (Ì‡ÔËÏÂ, ÓÚ‚ÂÚ˚

Ì‡ ‚ÓÔÓÒ˚ ‚ËÍÚÓËÌ˚).

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‚˚ÁÓ‚‡ Ì‡ ˝Í‡Ì

ÒÍ˚ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÍÒÚ‡.

При каждом нажиме на кнопку

REVEAL текст исчезает или

появляется.

3 Выберите страницу телетекста

с помощью кнопок CHANNEL

m, кнопок с цифрами или

цветных кнопок.

Кнопка SIZE

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Û‚ÂÎË˜ÂÌËﬂ ‚˚ÒÓÚ˚

‰ËÒÔÎÂﬂ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ‚‰‚ÓÂ.

Для возврата к режиму ТВ :

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/TEXT ËÎË ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/

VIDEO.

Нажмите кнопку SIZE.

Кнопка INDEX

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Ï„ÌÓ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó

• ÖÒÎË ‚ÓÁÌËÍ‡˛Ú ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ

ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ, Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í

ÏÂÒÚÌÓÏÛ ‰ËÎÂÛ ËÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ

ÍÓÏÔ‡ÌËË.

‚ÓÁ‚‡Ú‡ Í ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÂ ÒÓ‰ÂÊ‡ÌËﬂ.

Нажмите кнопку INDEX.

• Ç ÂÊËÏÂ íÂÍÒÚ ZOOM Á‡ÙËÍÒËÓ‚‡Ì

Ì‡ ÂÊËÏÂ çéêåÄãúçéÖ.

• Ç ÂÊËÏÂ ëÔËÒÓÍ ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚ÂÌÛÚ¸Òﬂ Í

ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÂ, ÌÓÏÂ ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÚÒﬂ

‚ ÎÂ‚ÓÏ ÌËÊÌÂÏ Û„ÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡.

• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò

ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚÓÏ ÓÔÂ‡ˆËË Ò ÏÂÌ˛

‚˚ÔÓÎÌﬂÚ¸ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

Кнопка CANCEL

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓËÒÍ‡ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ˚

ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.

• èË ÌÂ‚ÂÌÓÏ ‚˚‚Ó‰Â Ì‡ ˝Í‡Ì

ÒËÏ‚ÓÎÓ‚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ËÁÏÂÌËÚÂ

ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍÛ üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ.

èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚Â Ò‚Â‰ÂÌËﬂ ÒÏ. ÔÓ‰

Á‡„ÓÎÓ‚ÍÓÏ “üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ” Ì‡ ÒÚ.

34.

1 Нажимая кнопки с цифрами,

введите номер страницы или

нажмите цветную кнопку.

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ì‡˜ËÌ‡ÂÚ ËÒÍ‡Ú¸ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÛ

ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡.

äÌÓÔÍË Ë ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

2 Нажмите кнопку CANCEL.

Использование режима

Список

Ç˚ ÏÓÊÂÚÂ ÒÓı‡ÌﬂÚ¸ ÌÓÏÂ‡ Î˛·ËÏ˚ı

ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ‚ Ô‡ÏﬂÚË Ë ·˚ÒÚÓ

‚˚Á˚‚‡Ú¸ Ëı ËÁ Ô‡ÏﬂÚË Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˆ‚ÂÚÌ˚ı

ÍÌÓÔÓÍ.

èÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÚÂÎÂÔÓ„‡ÏÏ‡. äÓ„‰‡

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ì‡È‰ÂÚ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆÛ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡,

ÂÂ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ‚ ÎÂ‚ÓÏ ‚ÂıÌÂÏ

Û„ÎÛ ˝Í‡Ì‡.

3 Нажмите кнопку CANCEL для

возврата к странице

телетекста, когда ее номер

появится на экране.

• ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË CANCEL ‚ÂÌÛÚ¸Òﬂ

‚ ÂÊËÏ íÇ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

Для сохранения номеров страниц :

1 Нажмите кнопку MODE для

входа в режим Список.

Ç ÌËÊÌÂÈ ˜‡ÒÚË ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÓÚÓ·‡ÁﬂÚÒﬂ

ËÏÂ˛˘ËÂÒﬂ ‚ Ô‡ÏﬂÚË ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ.

2 С помощью цветной кнопки

выберите номер (позицию).

Затем с помощью кнопок с

цифрами введите номер

страницы.

Кнопка SUBPAGE

çÂÍÓÚÓ˚Â ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ ËÏÂ˛Ú

‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÏ˚Â

ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ˚. àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸

ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËﬂ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ˚ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ËÎË ÂÂ

ÔÓÒÏÓÚ‡ ‚ Î˛·ÓÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.

3 Нажмите и удержите кнопку

STORE.

1 Нажмите кнопку SUBPAGE

для включения функции

Подстраница.

óÂÚ˚Â ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ ·Û‰ÛÚ ÏË„‡Ú¸

Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ, ˜ÚÓ ÛÍ‡Á˚‚‡ÂÚ Ì‡

ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌËÂ Ëı ‚ Ô‡ÏﬂÚË.

çÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡˛ÚÒﬂ ‚

ÌËÊÌÂÈ ˜‡ÒÚË ˝Í‡Ì‡.

Для вызова сохраненной страницы :

1 Нажмите кнопку MODE для

входа в режим Список.

Цвет*

Состояние подстраницы

ÜÂÎÚ˚È

ÅÂÎ˚È

ç‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ‚ Ì‡ÒÚÓﬂ˘ËÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ.

åÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚Á‚‡Ì‡ Ì‡ ˝Í‡Ì.

2 Нажмите цветную кнопку, для

которой был назначен нужный

номер страницы.

ëËÌËÈ ËÎË

Í‡ÒÌ˚È

çÂ ÏÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚Á‚‡Ì‡ Ì‡

˝Í‡Ì Ë ÌÂ ÔÓÒÎ‡Ì‡.

* : ñ‚ÂÚ ÙÓÌ‡, Ì‡ ÍÓÚÓÓÏ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡ÂÚÒﬂ

ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ‰ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ˚.

Для выхода из режима Список :

ÒÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MODE

2 Нажимайте кнопки CHANNEL

m для выбора номера

подстраницы.

Для отмены функции Подстраница :

ÒÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ SUBPAGE.

Как пользоваться меню телевизора

êﬂ‰ÓÏ ÙÛÌÍˆËÈ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎﬂÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÏÂÌ˛.

óÚÓ·˚ ËÏÂÚ¸ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ ‚ÒÂı ÙÛÌÍˆËÈ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡, ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ıÓÓ¯Ó

ÁÌ‡Ú¸ ÔËÌˆËÔ˚ ‡·ÓÚ˚ ÏÂÌ˛.

Основные операции

POWER

TV/VIDEO

1 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK для

PICTURE

MODE

вызова МЕНЮ (основного меню).

ZOOM SPATIALIZER BASS

RETURN

MULTI

• ç‡ ‰ËÒÔÎÂÂ ÒÌËÁÛ ÓÚ ÏÂÌ˛ ÔÓÍ‡Á‡Ì˚ ÍÌÓÔÍË

ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ,

ÍÓÚÓ˚ÏË ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ‰Îﬂ

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËÂÈ.

MUTING

PIP

SUB-P

PIP

POSITION

FREEZE

SWAP

STROBE

DISPLAY

MENU/

2 Нажимая кнопки

выберите название меню, а затем

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

èÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÏÂÌ˛.

SYSTEM

COLOUR SOUND

TV/TEXT

Для возврата к предыдущему меню :

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

HOLD

MODE

REVEAL

SIZE

SUBPAGE STORE CANCEL

INDEX

Для мгновенного выхода из меню :

TEXT

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO.

3 С помощью кнопок

функцию.

выберите

• ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ Ó ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂı ‚

ÏÂÌ˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ Ì‡ÈÚË Ì‡ ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı

ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ‡ı.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

4 Для выбора настройки этой

функции используйте кнопки

• ÑÎﬂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËË,

ÔÂ‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌÌÓÈ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌËÂÏ,

ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌËÂ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËË Ì‡

ÔÓÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı ÒÚ‡ÌËˆ‡ı.

5 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения настройки.

åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.

• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÔÂÂ‰‡˜ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÂ NTSC

ÏÂÌ˛ ËÏÂ˛Ú ‡ÁÏÂ ÔÓ ‚ÂÚËÍ‡ÎË ‚‰‚ÓÂ

ÏÂÌ¸¯ËÈ ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ„Ó ‡ÁÏÂ‡ ÏÂÌ˛.

Использование кнопок

телевизора

ÑÎﬂ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÏÓÊÌÓ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸

ÍÌÓÔÍË, ÔÂ‰ÛÒÏÓÚÂÌÌ˚Â Ì‡ ÔÂÂ‰ÌÂÈ

Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

кнопки

TV/VIDEO

CHANEL

VOLUME TV/VIDEO

EXIT

• ç‡ ÔÂÂ‰ÌÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂÚ

ÍÌÓÔÍË, ËÏÂ˛˘ÂÈ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ÍÌÓÔÍË

DISPLAY ËÎË ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

åÂÌ˛ èÄêÄåÖíêõ

àáéÅêÄÜÖçàü

ЯРКО

üÍÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.

: ÚÂÏÌÂÂ

: Ò‚ÂÚÎÂÂ

ЧЕТКО

óÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.

: ÏÂÌ¸¯Â

: ·ÓÎ¸¯Â

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ óÖíäé ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ

Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ (ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P).

èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà

ÑÎﬂ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓ„Ó Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ

Ô‡‡ÏÂÚÓ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸

Ó‰ÌÛ ËÁ ÚÂı èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà.

ЦВЕТ

ñ‚ÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.

: ·ÎÂ‰ÌÂÂ

: ÒÓ˜ÌÂÂ

ЯРКИЙ :

ì‚ÂÎË˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ﬂÍÓÒÚ¸.

ЦВ.ТОН

ñ‚ÂÚÓ‚ÓÈ ÚÓÌ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ

СТАНДАРТ :

ÑÂÎ‡ÂÚ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ

“ÒÚ‡Ì‰‡ÚÌ˚ÏË”.

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.

: Í‡ÒÌÓ‚‡Ú˚È

: ÁÂÎÂÌÓ‚‡Ú˚È

МЯГКИЙ :

• àÁÏÂÌÂÌËÂ Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ‡ ñÇ. íéç

‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ ÔË ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË

ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË NTSC 3.58 ËÎË NTSC

4.43.

ëÏﬂ„˜‡ÂÚ ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ Ë ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚ¸.

• ìÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËÂ ÙÛÌÍˆËÂÈ èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà

ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊÂ ÓÒÛ˘ÂÒÚ‚ÎﬂÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

ÍÌÓÔÍË PICTURE MODE Ì‡ ÔÛÎ¸ÚÂ

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ.

ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “äÌÓÔÍ‡ PICTURE MODE” Ì‡ ÒÚ.

10.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ñÇ. íéç ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË

ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P).

Для возврата к исходным параметрам

ПРЕДУСТАНОВКИ:

ç‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÒËÌ˛˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ. Ç ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ

Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË ‚ ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÈ ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ

èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà ‚ÂÌÛÚÒﬂ Í ËÒıÓ‰Ì˚Ï

ÁÌ‡˜ÂÌËﬂÏ, ÍÓÚÓ˚Â ·Û‰ÛÚ ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ˚ Í‡Í

Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà.

êÂ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ

è‡‡ÏÂÚ˚ Í‡Ê‰ÓÈ ÔÂ‰ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË ÏÓÊÌÓ

ÔÓËÁ‚ÓÎ¸ÌÓ ËÁÏÂÌﬂÚ¸. ÇÌÂÒÂÌÌ˚Â

ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ ÒÓı‡ÌﬂÚÒﬂ Ë ÒÚ‡ÌÛÚ

ÅÄãÄçë ÅÖãéÉé

Ô‡‡ÏÂÚ‡ÏË ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ ÔÂ‰ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË.

ÑÎﬂ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚ÍË ·‡Î‡ÌÒ‡ ·ÂÎÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ

‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ÅÄãÄçë

ÅÖãéÉé (Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÚÂı ÚÓÌÓ‚ ·ÂÎÓ„Ó). èÓÒÍÓÎ¸ÍÛ

·ÂÎ˚È ˆ‚ÂÚ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÚÒﬂ Í‡Í ·‡ÁÓ‚˚È ‰Îﬂ ‚ÒÂı

ÓÒÚ‡Î¸Ì˚ı ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚, ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËÂ ÂÊËÏ‡ ÅÄãÄçë

ÅÖãéÉé ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË˛ ÔÂ‰ÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ‚ÒÂı ÓÒÚ‡Î¸Ì˚ı ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚.

КОНТРАСТ

äÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÌÓ

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸.

: ÏÂÌ¸¯Â

: ·ÓÎ¸¯Â

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ХОЛОД :

ÅÂÎ˚È Ò „ÓÎÛ·ËÁÌÓÈ. àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó

ÂÊËÏ‡ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ﬂÍËı

åÂÌ˛ ëÇéâëíÇÄ

àáéÅêÄÜÖçàü

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËﬂ

·ÓÎÂÂ ÊË‚˚ı Ë ﬂÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ.

СРЕДНИЙ :

çÓÏ‡Î¸Ì˚È ·ÂÎ˚È ˆ‚ÂÚ.

ТЕПЛЫЙ :

ÅÂÎ˚È Ò Í‡ÒÌÓ‚‡Ú˚Ï ÓÚÚÂÌÍÓÏ.

àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÂÊËÏ‡ ÔË

ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÙËÎ¸ÏÓ‚ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸

ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËﬂ ·ÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ﬂ˘Ëı ‰Îﬂ ÙËÎ¸ÏÓ‚

ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚.

ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò ÒÌËÊ‡ÂÚ

ÔÓÏÂıË, ËÒÍ‡Ê‡˛˘ËÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÅÄãÄçë ÅÖãéÉé ÌÂ ÏÓÊÂÚ

·˚Ú¸ ‚˚·‡Ì‡ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ “‰‚ÓÈÌÓÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ” ËÎË ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ 16:9

ÙÛÌÍˆËË ZOOM (ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ Ï‡Ò¯Ú‡·‡

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ).

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ

ÔË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P).

АВТО :

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË Â„ÛÎËÛÂÚ

ÛÓ‚ÂÌ¸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË

ÒÓ ÒÚÂÔÂÌ¸˛ ÔÓÏÂı Ë Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜ËÚ Ì‡ËÎÛ˜¯ÂÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.

ñàîêéÇéâ

ùäéëÖçëéê

èË ‚˚·ÓÂ ñàîêéÇéÉâ ùäéëÖçëéê

ÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË Â„ÛÎËÛÂÚÒﬂ

‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË Ò ﬂÍÓÒÚ¸˛ ÓÒ‚Â˘ÂÌËﬂ ‚

ÍÓÏÌ‡ÚÂ. ùÚÓ ÒÌËÊ‡ÂÚ Ì‡ÔﬂÊÂÌËÂ „Î‡Á Ë

ÔÓÚÂ·ÎﬂÂÏÛ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ

• ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÒÎË¯ÍÓÏ ‚˚ÒÓÍËÈ

ÛÓ‚ÂÌ¸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò,

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÒÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ˜ÂÚÍËÏ.

êÂÍÓÏÂÌ‰ÛÂÚÒﬂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ

ÄÇíé.

˝ÎÂÍÚÓ˝ÌÂ„Ë˛.

МАКС :

ВКЛ :

ìÓ‚ÂÌ¸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ÛÒÚ‡Ì‡‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒﬂ

Ì‡ Ï‡ÍÒËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË Ë ÔÓÒÎÂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ

ÂÊËÏ‡ ÄÇíé ËÏÂ˛ÚÒﬂ ÔÓÏÂıË,

Ñ‡ÌÌ‡ﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

ВЫКЛ :

Ñ‡ÌÌ‡ﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé Ì‡ åÄäë.

• ç‡ÒÚÓÈÍ‡ åÄäë ÌÂ ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ËÚ ‰Îﬂ

‚˚ÒÓÍÓÍ‡˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò

ÒËÎ¸Ì˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.

ДИСПЛЕЙ :

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ. èË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ

ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËË ﬂÍÓÒÚË ‚ ÍÓÏÌ‡ÚÂ Ì‡ ÌÂÒÍÓÎ¸ÍÓ

МИН :

ÒÂÍÛÌ‰ ÔÓﬂ‚Îﬂ˛ÚÒﬂ ÁÌ‡˜ÍË

Ó·ÓÁÌ‡˜‡˛˘ËÂ ﬂÍÓÒÚ¸. óÂÏ ÚÂÏÌÂÂ ‚

ÍÓÏÌ‡ÚÂ, ÚÂÏ ·ÓÎ¸¯Â ˜ËÒÎÓ ÁÌ‡˜ÍÓ‚.

ìÓ‚ÂÌ¸ ñàîêéÇAü ëèÇò ÛÒÚ‡Ì‡‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒﬂ

Ì‡ ÏËÌËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒÎÂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÂÊËÏ‡

ÄÇíé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÒÚ‡ÎÓ ÌÂ‰ÓÒÚ‡ÚÓ˜ÌÓ

˜ÂÚÍËÏ, ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé Ì‡ åàç.

• ç‡ÒÚÓÈÍ‡ åàç ÌÂ ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ËÚ ‰Îﬂ

ÌËÁÍÓÍ‡˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò

ÒËÎ¸Ì˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

МИН :

DigiPure

ìÓ‚ÂÌ¸ DigiPure ÛÒÚ‡Ì‡‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒﬂ Ì‡

ÏËÌËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒÎÂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË DigiPure Ì‡

ÄÇíé ËÏÂ˛ÚÒﬂ ÔÓÏÂıË ÔÂÂÈ‰ËÚÂ Ì‡ åàç.

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ Digipure ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÚ ÌÓ‚ÂÈ¯Û˛

ˆËÙÓ‚Û˛ ÚÂıÌÓÎÓ„Ë˛ ‰Îﬂ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËﬂ

ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ. îÛÌÍˆËﬂ

Digipure ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚ ‰‚Â ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÂ ÙÛÌÍˆËË.

• êÂÊËÏ åàç ÌÂ ÔË„Ó‰ÂÌ ‰Îﬂ

‚˚ÒÓÍÓÍ‡˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ÒÓ

ÒÎ‡·˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.

Функция Digipure :

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÒÔÓÒÓ·ÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ÒÓÁ‰‡ÌË˛

ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÔÛÚÂÏ

Û‰‡ÎÂÌËﬂ ÎË¯ÌËı Í‡Â‚˚ı ÁÓÌ

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ DigiPure ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

‚˚ÒÓÍÓÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌ˚ı Ë ˜ÂÚÍËı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ.

Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÌËÁÍÓÍÓÌÚ‡ÒÚÌ˚ı ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ

Í‡Â‚˚Â ÁÓÌ˚ ‰Ó·‡‚Îﬂ˛ÚÒﬂ ‰Îﬂ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËﬂ

·ÓÎÂÂ ˜ÂÚÍÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

îÛÌÍˆË˛ DigiPure ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ‚

ÂÊËÏ ÄÇíé, åÄäë Ë åàç.

PULL DOWN

ÇÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËÂÏ ÙÛÌÍˆËË PULL DOWN

‰ÓÒÚË„‡ÂÚÒﬂ ·ÓÎÂÂ ˜ÂÚÍÓÂ Ë ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ

¯ËÓÍÓÙÓÏ‡ÚÌ˚ı ÍËÌÓÙËÎ¸ÏÓ‚.

Функция компенс ации движения

изображения :

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ ·ÓÎÂÂ ÔÎ‡‚ÌÛ˛ Ë

ÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÛ˛ ÔÂÂ‰‡˜Û Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ·˚ÒÚÓ

‰‚ËÊÛ˘ËıÒﬂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ, Ú‡ÍËı Í‡Í

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÙÛÚ·ÓÎËÒÚÓ‚ Ë Ïﬂ˜‡.

АВТО:

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡. Ç Ó·˚˜ÌÓÏ ÂÊËÏÂ

‡·ÓÚ˚ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‰ÓÎÊÌ‡ ·˚Ú¸

ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂÌÌÓÈ Ì‡ ÄÇíé.

ВЫКЛ:

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ Digipure ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË

ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P).

• Ñ‚ËÊÂÌËÂ Ó·˙ÂÍÚÓ‚ ÏÓÊÂÚ Í‡Á‡Ú¸Òﬂ

ÌÂÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚Ï ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ‚ ÒËÒÚÂÏÂ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË

NTSC. óÚÓ·˚ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜ËÚ¸ ·ÓÎÂÂ ÔÎ‡‚ÌÓÂ

‰‚ËÊÂÌËÂ, ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ PULL

DOWN Ò ÄÇíé Ì‡ Çõäã.

АВТО :

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË ÓÚÂ„ÛÎËÛÂÚ

ÛÓ‚ÂÌ¸ DigiPure ‚ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ËË Ò ÛÓ‚ÌÂÏ

ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËÈ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ë Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜ËÚ

Ì‡ËÎÛ˜¯ÂÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.

• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÌÂ ÏÓÊÂÚ ·˚Ú¸ ‚˚·‡Ì‡ ‚

ÂÊËÏÂ “‰‚ÓÈÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ” Ë ‚

ÂÊËÏÂ “ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ‚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË”.

• èË ÒÎË¯ÍÓÏ ‚˚ÒÓÍÓÏ ÛÓ‚ÌÂ DigiPure Ë

ÌËÁÍÓÍ‡˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓÏ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËË Ò

ÒËÎ¸Ì˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓ„ÛÚ

Â˘Â ·ÓÎ¸¯Â ÛÒËÎËÚ¸Òﬂ. êÂÍÓÏÂÌ‰ÛÂÚÒﬂ

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ ÄÇíé.

МАКС :

ìÓ‚ÂÌ¸ DigiPure ÛÒÚ‡Ì‡‚ÎË‚‡ÂÚÒﬂ Ì‡

Ï‡ÍÒËÏÛÏ. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÒÎÂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË DigiPure Ì‡

ÄÇíé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÔÂÂ‰‡ÂÚÒﬂ ÌÂ ÒÓ‚ÒÂÏ

ÔÓÎÌÓ, ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ò ÄÇíé Ì‡ åÄäë.

• êÂÊËÏ åÄäë ÌÂ ÔË„Ó‰ÂÌ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â

ÌËÁÍÓÍ‡˜ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ò

ÒËÎ¸Ì˚ÏË ÔÓÏÂı‡ÏË.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

2 Нажимайте кнопки для

ëàëíÖåÄ ñÇÖíçéëíà

выбора режима ZOOM. Затем

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

àÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ‡Ò¯ËËÚÒﬂ, ‡ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌËÂ

‚˚·‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÂÊËÏ‡ ZOOM ÓÒÚ‡ÂÚÒﬂ Ì‡

˝Í‡ÌÂ ‚ ÚÂ˜ÂÌËÂ ÓÍÓÎÓ 5 ÒÂÍÛÌ‰.

ëËÒÚÂÏ‡ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚˚·Ë‡ÂÚÒﬂ

‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË. é‰Ì‡ÍÓ ÂÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ

ÌÂﬂÒÌÓÂ ËÎË ÌÂˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÂ, ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ÒËÒÚÂÏÛ

ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ‚Û˜ÌÛ˛.

1 Выберите СИСТЕМА

ЦВЕТНОСТИ и нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

• àÏÂ˛ÚÒﬂ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÂ ÂÊËÏ˚ :

çéêåÄãúçéÖ, ZOOM Ë 16:9. ÅÓÎÂÂ

ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“äÌÓÔÍ‡ ZOOM” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 9.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ZOOM ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÔË

ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P).

PICTURE TILT

2 С помощью кнопок

àÁ-Á‡ ‚ÎËﬂÌËﬂ Ï‡„ÌËÚÌÓ„Ó ÔÓÎﬂ ÁÂÏÎË

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÂÂÍÓÒËÚ¸Òﬂ. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ

ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÏÓÊÌÓ ÓÚÍÓÂÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸

выберите нужную систему

цветности. Затем нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËË.

• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ ëàëíÖåA

ñÇÖíçéëíà ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÒÏ. ‡Á‰ÂÎ “àÁÏÂÌÂÌËÂ

ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË ÇíéêéëíÖèÖççéÉé

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 15.

1 Выберите PICTURETILT и

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

• îÛÌÍˆËÂÈ ëàëíÖåÄ ñÇÖíçéëíà

ÏÓÊÌÓ Ú‡ÍÊÂ ÛÔ‡‚ÎﬂÚ¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

ÍÌÓÔÍË COLOUR SYSTEM ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ. ÅÓÎÂÂ

ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“äÌÓÔÍ‡ COLOUR SYSTEM” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 11.

2 Нажимайте кнопки

пор, пока перекос не

до тех

ZOOM

устранится. Затем нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ ÙÓÏ‡Ú‡

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÛÚÂÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ

ÍÓ˝ÙÙËˆËÂÌÚ‡ ÔÓÔÓˆËÓÌ‡Î¸ÌÓÒÚË.

Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ ÓÔÚËÏ‡Î¸Ì˚È ÙÓÏ‡Ú Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÁ ÚÂı ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ZOOM.

1 Выберите ZOOM и нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

åÂÌ˛

èêÖÑìëíÄçéÇäà áÇìäÄ

БАЛАНС

åÓÊÌÓ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ·‡Î‡ÌÒ ÏÂÊ‰Û ÎÂ‚˚Ï

Ë Ô‡‚˚Ï „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎﬂÏË.

: Û‚ÂÎË˜ÂÌËÂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË ÎÂ‚Ó„Ó

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎﬂ.

: Û‚ÂÎË˜ÂÌËÂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Ô‡‚Ó„Ó

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎﬂ.

AI ìêéÇÖçú

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸

ÔÂ‰ÓÚ‚‡˘ÂÌËﬂ ÂÁÍÓ„Ó Û‚ÂÎË˜ÂÌËﬂ ËÎË

ÛÏÂÌ¸¯ÂÌËﬂ ÛÓ‚Ìﬂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË ÔË

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚ Ë ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË

Ò Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ÂÊËÏ‡ ÇàÑÖé Ì‡ ‰Û„ÓÈ.

ëíÖêÖé / I•II

èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ‰‚ÛﬂÁ˚˜Ì˚ı ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ

ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ

üÁ˚Í I (Sub I) ËÎË üÁ˚Í II (Sub II). èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ

ÔËÂÏÂ ÒÚÂÂÓÚ‡ÌÒÎﬂˆËË ÏÓÊÌÓ

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸Òﬂ ÒÓ ÒÚÂÂÓ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓ ‰Îﬂ

ÛÎÛ˜¯ÂÌËﬂ ˜ÂÚÍÓÒÚË Á‚ÛÍ‡.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡.

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡.

: ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌËﬂ

: åÓÌÓÙÓÌËﬂ

: üÁ˚Í I (sub I)

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ AI ìêéÇÖçú ÏÓÊÂÚ Á‡‰‡‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ

ÓÚ‰ÂÎ¸ÌÓ ‰Îﬂ ÂÊËÏ‡ íÇ Ë ÂÊËÏ‡

ÇàÑÖé.

ç‡ÔËÏÂ, ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡‰‡Ú¸ ÂÂ Çõäã ‚

ÂÊËÏÂ íÇ Ë Çäã ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ ÇàÑÖé.

ÖÒÎË ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ AI ìêéÇÖçú

ÔË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ ˜ÂÂÁ

Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ ÇàÑÖé, ˝Ú‡ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚Í‡

Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÛÂÚÒﬂ Í‡Í Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍ‡

ÂÊËÏ‡ ÇàÑÖé.

: üÁ˚Í II (sub II)

МОНО : éÚÏÂÌﬂÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Multi Sound, Á‚ÛÍ

ÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍËÏ.

• ÇÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚Â ÂÊËÏ˚ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËﬂ Á‡‚ËÒﬂÚ

ÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ AI ìêéÇÖçú ÏÓÊÂÚ ÌÂ ‰‡‚‡Ú¸

ÌÛÊÌ˚ı ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÓ‚ ÔË Ó˜ÂÌ¸ ÌËÁÍÓÏ

ÛÓ‚ÌÂ „ÓÏÍÓÒÚË Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó

• ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÌÂ ‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏ‡ı

ÇàÑÖé.

ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ, ÔÂÂ‰‡‚‡ÂÏÓ„Ó

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁËÓÌÌÓÈ ÒÚ‡ÌˆËÂÈ (ËÎË

Á‡‰‡‚‡ÂÏÓ„Ó ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÌ˚Ï

êÂ„ÛÎËÓ‚Í‡ Á‚ÛÍ‡

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ÔÓËÁ‚ÓÎ¸ÌÓ„Ó

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ Á‚ÛÍ‡.

Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜ÂÌËÂÏ ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒËÒÚÂÏ˚).

BBE

БАС

åÓÊÌÓ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÌËÊÌËÂ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚ Á‚ÛÍ‡.

: ÒÎ‡·ÂÂ

: ÒËÎ¸ÌÂÂ

îÛÌÍˆË˛ ÇÇÖ ÏÓÊÌÓ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‰Îﬂ

ÔÓÒÚÓ„Ó ÔË‰‡ÌËﬂ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÏÛ

ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌË˛ ı‡‡ÍÚÂËÒÚËÍ ËÒıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó,

ÌÂÒÍÓÂÍÚËÓ‚‡ÌÌÓ„Ó Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó

ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ.

ТЕМБР

åÓÊÌÓ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‚ÂıÌËÂ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚

Á‚ÛÍ‡.

: ÒÎ‡·ÂÂ

: ÒËÎ¸ÌÂÂ

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

1 Выберите НАУЩНИКИ и

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

Система BBE используется по лицензии

компании ВВE Sound, Inc. ВВЕ является

зарегистрированной торговой маркой

компании BBE Sound, inc.

2 С помощью кнопки

сделайте выбор, а с помощью

кнопки установите

SPATIALIZER

ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌÍˆËË SPATIALIZER ÏÓÊÌÓ

ÔÓÎÛ˜‡Ú¸ “ÊË‚ÓÈ” ˝ÙÙÂÍÚ ÔË

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Surround sound

(ÓÍÛÊ‡˛˘ËÈ Á‚ÛÍ).

функцию НАУЩНИКИ.

Нажмите кнопку OK, а затем

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·Ë‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ‰‚Ûı ÂÊËÏÓ‚

SPATIALIZER.

ГРОМКОСТЬ :

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ

„ÓÏÍÓÒÚË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.

• åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ó‰ËÌ ËÁ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘Ëı

ÂÊËÏÓ‚ SPATIALIZER: LIVE, MOçO ËÎË

Çõäã.

TV ГРОМКОГОВОР :

äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡, „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ÌÂ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡˛ÚÒﬂ‰‡ÊÂÔË

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚. ÖÒÎË ˝Ú‡

ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡, „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÔË ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı

ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡˛ÚÒﬂ.

ÖÒÎË ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡˛ÚÒﬂ ‰‡ÊÂ ÔË

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.

ÖÒÎË ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛,

ÅÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “äÌÓÔÍ‡ SPATIALIZER” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 9.

Система SPATIALIZER изготовлена по

лицензии компании Desper Products,Inc.

ëìèÖê ÅÄë

ÑÎﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÏÓ˘Ì˚ı ·‡ÒÓ‚ ÏÓÊÌÓ

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ëÛÔÂ Å‡Ò.

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÚÒﬂ

ÔË ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

ВЫХОД :

ВЫКЛ :

èË ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚

ÏÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ Á‚ÛÍ‡ Í‡Í

éëçéÇçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ (ÉãABH) ËÎË

ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÖ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ

(BTOPOCTEè).

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

çÄìôçàäà

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‰‡ÂÚ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸

ÔÓÒÎÛ¯Ë‚‡ÌËﬂ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ

˜ÂÂÁ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚.

• á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ

ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçéÉé ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ

ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ ÔÓÒÎÛ¯Ë‚‡Ú¸ ˜ÂÂÁ

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

• èË ‚˚‚Ó‰Â Ì‡ ˝Í‡Ì Ù‡„ÏÂÌÚ‡

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ

ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÒÔÓËÁ‚Â‰ÂÌËÂ,

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ëíÖêÖé/I•II

·Û‰ÂÚ ÌÂ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚Ï.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

• ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ˝ÚÓÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ

ÓÚÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸ ÒÂÚÂ‚ÓÂ ÔËÚ‡ÌËÂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

åÂÌ˛ ëÇéâëíÇÄ

• äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ‡, ÏÓÊÌÓ

‚˚Á‚‡Ú¸ ÏÂÌ˛ íÄâåÖê ÇõäãûóÖçàü

‰Îﬂ ÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ ËÎË ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ

ÓÒÚ‡‚¯Â„ÓÒﬂ ÔÂËÓ‰‡ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.

ëàçàâ îéç

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓ„Ó

ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ ˝Í‡Ì‡ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ì‡ ÒËÌËÈ Ë

‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ Á‚ÛÍ‡ ‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÒÎ‡·Ó„Ó ËÎË

ÔÓÎÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Â„Ó ÒË„Ì‡Î‡, ËÎË ÊÂ

‚ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÌÂ ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÒË„Ì‡Î Ò

‚ÌÂ¯ÌÂ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡.

íÄâåÖê

ÇõäãûóÖçàü

åÓÊÌÓ Á‡‰‡Ú¸ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËÂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ‚ ÓÔÂ‰ÂÎÂÌÌÓÂ ‚ÂÏﬂ.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

1 Выберите ТАЙМЕР

ВЫКЛЮЧЕНИЯ и нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ

ÔÂÂ‰ÌËı ÍÌÓÔÓÍ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡. äÓ„‰‡ ˝Ú‡

ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂÌ‡ Ì‡ Çäã, ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ

ÏÓÊÌÓ ÛÔ‡‚ÎﬂÚ¸ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ.

àÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ‰Îﬂ

ÔÂ‰ÓÚ‚‡˘ÂÌËﬂ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ

‰ÂÚ¸ÏË (·ÂÁ ‡ÁÂ¯ÂÌËﬂ Ó‰ËÚÂÎÂÈ).

2 С помощью кнопок

установите период времени.

í‡ÈÏÂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ì‡˜ÌÂÚ ÓÚÒ˜ÂÚ

Á‡‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÔÂËÓ‰‡ ‚ÂÏÂÌË.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

• åÓÊÌÓ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ÔÂËÓ‰ ‚ÂÏÂÌË

‰ÎËÚÂÎ¸ÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ‰Ó 120 ÏËÌÛÚ (2 ˜‡Ò‡)

ÔË‡˘ÂÌËﬂÏË ÔÓ 10 ÏËÌÛÚ.

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

Для отмены этой функции:

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ‰Îﬂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍË “Çõäã”.

àÑ çéåÖê

ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ÌÂ ıÓÚËÚÂ, ˜ÚÓ·˚ ‰ÂÚË ÒÏÓÚÂÎË

ÓÔÂ‰ÂÎÂÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ‚˚ ÏÓÊÂÚÂ

Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î.

ÖÒÎË Â·ÂÌÓÍ ‚˚·ÂÂÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚,

ÔËÒ‚ÓÂÌÌ˚È Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌÓÏÛ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÛ, ˝Í‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ Ë Ì‡ ÌÂÏ

ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÒËÏ‚ÓÎ , Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ

ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ ·Û‰ÂÚ ‚Ë‰ÂÚ¸.

3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения установки.

åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.

• á‡ Ó‰ÌÛ ÏËÌÛÚÛ ‰Ó ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Ì‡‰ÔËÒ¸

“ëèéäéâçéâ çéóà!”.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

Как включить эту

функцию

1 Выберите ИД НОМЕР затем

нажмите кнопку 0 (AV).

Для просмотра

заблокированного

телеканала

1 Выберите номер программы с

заблокированным

телеканалом с помощью

кнопок с цифрами или списка

ПРОГ. ЛИСТ.

ùÍ‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ Ë ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ

çéåÖê).

(àÑ

2 Установите ИД номер.

Для выбора номера:

Ì‡ÊËÏ‡ÈÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍË

• á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ

‚˚·‡Ú¸ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ

Для перемещения курсора:

Ì‡ÊËÏ‡ÈÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍË

2 Нажмите кнопку DISPLAY для

вызова на экран“ИД НОМЕР”.

3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

3 Введите ИД номер с помощью

кнопок с цифрами.

ÅÎÓÍËÓ‚Í‡ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÓÚÏÂÌÂÌ‡, Ú‡Í ˜ÚÓ

ÏÓÊÌÓ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸

Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î.

4 Нажимайте кнопки

выбора телеканала.

для

Если Вы забыли ИД номер :

Ç˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ ˝Ú‡Ô 1, ˜ÚÓ·˚ “ä‡Í ‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸

˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛”. èÓÒÎÂ ÔÓ‰Ú‚ÂÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ àÑ

ÌÓÏÂ‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO ‰Îﬂ

‚˚ıÓ‰‡ ËÁ ÏÂÌ˛.

• ç‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ‡, ÍÓÚÓ‡ﬂ

‚ Ì‡ÒÚÓﬂ˘ËÈ ÏÓÏÂÌÚ Ú‡ÌÒÎËÛÂÚÒﬂ ÔÓ

‚˚·‡ÌÌÓÏÛ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÛ.

5 Нажмите синюю кнопку для

включения этой функции для

данного телеканала.

• ÑÎﬂ ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌÍˆËË àÑ çéåÖê

ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÒÌÓ‚‡ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚ¸ ˝Ú‡Ô “ä‡Í

‚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛”.

èÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ

(àÑ çéåÖê) Ë ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î

·Û‰ÂÚ Á‡·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ì.

Для отмены этой функции :

ëÌÓ‚‡ Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÒËÌ˛˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ.

(àÑ çéåÖê) ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ Ë ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î

·Û‰ÂÚ ‡Á·ÎÓÍËÓ‚‡Ì.

6 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения установки.

åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓ„Ó

‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËË

‚Â˘‡ÌËﬂ, Ú.Â. ÂÒÎË ÓÌ ÌÂ ÔËÌËÏ‡ÂÚ ÒË„Ì‡Î‡

‚ ÚÂ˜ÂÌËÂ ÓÍÓÎÓ 15 ÏËÌÛÚ.

ВКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

ВЫКЛ :

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ ÌÂ

Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ ÓÚÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÒÂÚÂ‚Ó„Ó

ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ ÌÂ

‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ ÇàÑÖé.

VIDEO-3

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ Ô‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÛ˛

Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍÛ VIDEO-3, ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘Û˛

ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡˛˘ÂÏÛ ÓÚ ‚ÌÂ¯ÌÂ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡,

˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-3, ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÛ. èË

ÌÂÔ‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓÈ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÌÂ

·Û‰ÂÚ.

ВИДЕО :

Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÌÓÏ‡Î¸Ì˚È

(ÔÓÎÌ˚È) ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î.

КОМПОНЕНТHЫЙ :

Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ÂÒÎË ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡ÂÚ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚È

‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î (Y/C /C ).

• èÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÔÓ

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËﬂÏ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ” Ì‡

ÒÚ. 36.

• Ñ‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ Ò

Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓÏ (ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚

525P) ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ ÔË ÔÓ‰‡˜Â Ì‡ ‚ıÓ‰

ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌÓ„Ó ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î‡.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

åÂÌ˛ HÄCTPéâäà

• ÑÎﬂ ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÄÇíé èêéÉ.

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

2 После сохранения

телеканалов в списке номеров

программ появится меню

НАСТРОЙКА.

üáõä

åÓÊÌÓ ‚˚·‡Ú¸ ﬂÁ˚Í ÏÂÌ˛ ËÁ ÒÔËÒÍ‡

ﬂÁ˚ÍÓ‚.

1 Выберите ЯЗЫК и нажмите

кнопку MENU/OK.

DISP

2 Нажимайте кнопки

выбора языка.

3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения установки.

åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.

для

• èÓÒÎÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ Â‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸

ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌÍˆËË

çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû. ÅÓÎÂÂ

ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 30.

• ÖÒÎË ÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ÌÂ ·˚Î

ÒÓı‡ÌÂÌ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍÂ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ,

Â„Ó ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡Â„ËÒÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÙÛÌÍˆËË êìóçÄü. ÅÓÎÂÂ

ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 30.

ÄÇíé èêéÉ.

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌÓÒÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓÈ

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË Û‚ÂÂÌÌÓ ÔËÌËÏ‡ÂÏ˚ı

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚ ÔÓ‰ ÌÓÏÂ‡ÏË ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ. ÑÎﬂ

˝ÚÓ„Ó ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÂ.

• îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé èêéÉ. ÌÂ ÒÓı‡ÌﬂÂÚ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î˚ Ì‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÂ Ò ÌÓÏÂÓÏ 0

(AV).

1 Выберите АВТО ПРОГ. и

нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

ÇÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÄÇíé èêéÉ.

èËÌËÏ‡ÂÏ˚Â ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î˚ ·Û‰ÛÚ

‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË ÒÓı‡ÌﬂÚ¸Òﬂ ‚ ÒÔËÒÍÂ

ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.

• ÖÒÎË ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ÌÂ

ÌÛÊÌ‡, Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ MENU/OK ‰Îﬂ

‚˚ıÓ‰‡ ËÁ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ИД :

çÄëíêéâäÄ/

Çêìóçìû

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ Â„ËÒÚËÛÂÚ Ì‡Á‚‡ÌËÂ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ (àÑ).

îÛÌÍˆËË çÄëíêéâäÄ/Çêìóçìû ‰ÂÎﬂÚÒﬂ Ì‡

‰‚‡ ÚËÔ‡:

ВСТАВКА :

Â‰‡ÍÚËÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ÚÂÍÛ˘Ëı ÌÓÏÂÓ‚

ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ (ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ çÄëíêéâäÄ) Ë Û˜Ì‡ﬂ

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËﬂ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚ ‚ ÒÔËÒÓÍ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚

ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ (ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ êìóçÄü).

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ‰Ó·‡‚ÎﬂÂÚ ÌÓ‚˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î Í

ÚÂÍÛ˘ÂÏÛ ÒÔËÒÍÛ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÔÛÚÂÏ

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ÌÓÏÂ‡ CH/CC.

УДАЛИТЬ :

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ Û‰‡ÎﬂÂÚ ÌÂÌÛÊÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î.

ВНИМАНИЕ

• Ç ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËÈ

ìèêÄÇã, ìÑÄãàíú ËÎË ÇëíÄÇäÄ

РУЧНАЯ :

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ Û˜ÌÛ˛

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆË˛ ÌÓ‚Ó„Ó ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ ÔÓ‰

ÌÓÏÂÓÏ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚.

ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ÔÂÂÁ‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡ÌËÂ ÚÂÍÛ˘Â„Ó

ÒÔËÒÍ‡ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.

Ç ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ

ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚ ËÁÏÂÌﬂÚÒﬂ.

3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения настройки.

• ÑÎﬂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ ÔÓ‰ ÌÓÏÂÓÏ êR 0 ‚

ÒÔËÒÍÂ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ ÔÓﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ “AV”.

• ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ·˚Î Á‡ÔÂÚ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

ÙÛÌÍˆËË àÑ çéåÖê ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ÙÛÌÍˆËË êìóçÄü ‰Îﬂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡

ÔË‚Ó‰ËÚ Í ÓÚÏÂÌÂ ÙÛÌÍˆËË àÑ çéåÖê.

• ÖÒÎË ‰Îﬂ ÌÓÏÂ‡ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚ èê 99

ÛÊÂ Ì‡ÁÌ‡˜ÂÌ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ÇëíÄÇäÄ ÔË‚Â‰ÂÚ Í ÒÚË‡ÌË˛ ˝ÚÓ„Ó

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡.

ФУНКЦИИ

УПРАВЛ

1 Нажимайте кнопки

выбора телеканала.

для

1 Выберите НАСТРОЙКА/

ВРУЧНУЮ и нажмите кнопку

MENU/OK.

2 Нажмите кнопку для

включения функции УПРАВЛ.

2 Используйте функцию

согласно ее описанию.

3 С помощью кнопок

выберите новый номер

программы.

УПРАВЛ :

ùÚ‡ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ËÁÏÂÌﬂÂÚ ÌÓÏÂ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡.

Для отмены функции УПРАВЛ :

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

РУЧНАЯ

1 Нажимайте кнопки

4 Нажмите кнопку для

изменения номера программы

телеканала.

для

выбора номера программы,

под которым Вы хотите

зарегистрировать новый

телеканал.

ИД

1 Нажимайте кнопки

выбора телеканала.

для

2 Нажмите синюю кнопку для

включения функции РУЧНАЯ.

2 Нажмите красную кнопку для

включения функции ИД.

3 Введите название телеканала

(ИД).

ë Ô‡‚ÓÈ ÒÚÓÓÌ˚ ÓÚ ÌÓÏÂ‡ CH/CC

ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ëàëíÖåÄ (ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó

ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ) ‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡.

Пользуйтесь кнопками

для выбора знаков.

Пользуйтесь кнопками

для перемещения курсора.

Для отмены функции РУЧНАЯ :

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

3 Нажимайте кнопку для

выбора телевещательной

системы (системы звукового

сопровождения) для

Для отмены функции ИД:

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

4 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для регистрации названия

телеканала.

регистрируемого телеканала.

• ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ ‰Îﬂ

‡ÁÎË˜Ì˚ı Â„ËÓÌÓ‚ Ë ÒÚ‡Ì ÔË‚Â‰ÂÌ˚

‚ Ú‡·ÎËˆÂ “íÖãÖÇÖôÄíÖãúçõÖ

УДАЛИТЬ

ëàëíÖåõ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 12.

1 Нажимайте кнопки

выбора телеканала.

2 Нажмите желтую кнопку для

удаления телеканала.

для

4 Нажмите зеленую или красную

кнопку для поиска

телеканала.

ëÍ‡ÌËÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒﬂ, ÍÓ„‰‡

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ·Û‰ÂÚ Ì‡È‰ÂÌ. ùÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î

ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ.

ä‡Ì‡Î ·Û‰ÂÚ Û‰‡ÎÂÌ ËÁ ÒÔËÒÍ‡ ÌÓÏÂÓ‚

ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

5 Нажимайте зеленую или

красную кнопку до тех пор,

пока не появится нужный

телеканал.

3 С помощью кнопок

выберите“CC” или “CH”

согласно номеру CH/CC

телеканала.

При плохом приеме телеканала :

ë ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÒËÌÂÈ ËÎË ÊÂÎÚÓÈ ÍÌÓÔÍË

‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ ÚÓÌÍÛ˛ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍÛ Ì‡ ˝ÚÓÚ

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î.

Для отмены функции ВСТАВКА :

ç‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ DISPLAY.

4 С помощью кнопок с цифрами

введите оставшийся номер CH/

CC.

Если не удается получить нормальное

звуковое сопровождение даже при

нормальном изображении :

ùÚÓ ÛÍ‡Á˚‚‡ÂÚ Ì‡ ÌÂÔ‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÛ˛

Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍÛ ëàëíÖåA. ç‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ

Ë ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ ëàëíÖåA Ò ÌÓÏ‡Î¸Ì˚Ï

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚˚Ï ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂÏ.

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÒﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏ

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË. èÓ Á‡‚Â¯ÂÌËË

Â„ËÒÚ‡ˆËË Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ.

• çÓÏÂ CH/CC ÛÍ‡Á˚‚‡ÂÚ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚÛ, Ì‡

ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ‚Â‰ÂÚÒﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚Â˘‡ÌËÂ. ÖÒÎË

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÌÂ ÏÓÊÂÚ Ó·Ì‡ÛÊËÚ¸

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ˜‡ÒÚÓÚÂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚Â˘‡ÌËﬂ, Ó·ÓÁÌ‡˜ÂÌÌÓÈ ÌÓÏÂÓÏ

CH/CC, ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Á‡ÒÚ‡‚Í‡, ÛÍ‡Á˚‚‡˛˘‡ﬂ

Ì‡ ÓÚÒÛÚÒÚ‚ËÂ ÒË„Ì‡Î‡.

6 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для регистрации телеканала

под номером программы.

èÓﬂ‚ËÚÒﬂ Ó·˚˜ÌÓÂ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄëíêéâäÄ.

ВСТАВКА

ПОДГОТОВКА

• ç‡È‰ËÚÂ ÌÓÏÂ CH/CC,

ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ÌÓÏÂÛ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡, ‚

Ú‡·Î. Ì‡ ÒÚ. 33.

1 Нажимайте кнопки

для

выбора номера программы,

под которым регистрируется

новый телеканал.

2 Нажмите зеленую кнопку для

включения функции ВСТАВКА.

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

Номер CH/CC

ÖÒÎË ÚÂ·ÛÂÚÒﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÇëíÄÇäÄ, ÓÔËÒ‡ÌÌ‡ﬂ Ì‡ ÒÚ. 32, Ì‡È‰ËÚÂ ÌÓÏÂ CH/CC,

ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÛ, ÔÓ ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ Ú‡·ÎËˆÂ.

US: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ ëòÄ, Ì‡ îËÎËÔÔËÌ‡ı Ë Ú.‰.

CCIR: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚ı Ì‡ ÅÎËÊÌÂÏ ÇÓÒÚÓÍÂ, ‚ û„Ó-ÇÓÒÚÓ˜ÌÓÈ ÄÁËË Ë Ú.‰.

OIRT: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ ÇÓÒÚÓ˜ÌÓÈ Ö‚ÓÔÂ, êÓÒÒËË, Ç¸ÂÚÌ‡ÏÂ Ë Ú.‰.

AUSTRALIA: çÓÏÂ‡ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡ÎÓ‚, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÂÏ˚ı ‚ Ä‚ÒÚ‡ÎËË Ë Ú.‰.

ä‡Ì‡Î

CCIR

OIRT

AUSTRALIA

AU-0

AU-1

AU-2

AU-6

AU-7

AU-8

AU-9

CCIR

S-1

S-2

OIRT

AUSTRALIA

CH 02

CH 03

CH 04

CH 05

CH 06

CH 07

CH 08

CH 09

CH 10

CH 11

CH 12

CH 13

CH 14

CH 15

CH 16

CH 17

CH 18

CH 19

CH 20

CH 21

CH 22

CH 23

CH 24

CH 25

CH 26

CH 27

CH 28

CH 29

CH 30

CH 31

CH 32

CH 33

CH 34

CH 35

CH 36

CH 37

CH 38

CH 39

CH 40

CH 41

CH 42

CH 43

CH 44

CH 45

CH 46

CH 47

CH 48

CH 49

CH 50

CH 51

CH 52

CH 53

CH 54

CH 55

CH 56

CH 57

CH 58

CH 59

CH 60

CH 61

CH 62

CH 63

CH 64

CH 65

CH 66

CH 67

CH 68

CH 69

CH 70

US-2

CC 01

CC 02

CC 03

CC 04

CC 05

CC 06

CC 07

CC 08

CC 09

CC 10

CC 11

CC 12

CC 13

CC 14

CC 15

CC 16

CC 17

CC 18

CC 19

CC 20

CC 21

CC 22

CC 23

CC 24

CC 25

CC 26

CC 27

CC 28

CC 29

CC 30

CC 31

CC 32

CC 33

CC 34

CC 35

CC 36

CC 37

CC 38

CC 39

CC 40

CC 41

CC 42

CC 43

CC 44

CC 45

CC 46

CC 47

CC 48

CC 49

CC 50

CC 51

CC 52

CC 53

CC 54

CC 55

CC 56

CC 57

CC 58

CC 59

CC 60

CC 61

CC 62

CC 63

CC 64

CC 75

CC 76

CC 77

CC 78

CC 79

CC 95

CC 96

CC 97

CC 98

CC 99

AU-5

US-3

US-4

US-5

US-6

US-7

US-8

US-9

S-3

S-4

S-5

S-6

AU-5A

S-7

S-8

US-10

US-11

US-12

US-13

US-14

US-15

US-16

US-17

US-18

US-19

US-20

US-21

US-22

US-23

US-24

US-25

US-26

US-27

US-28

US-29

US-30

US-31

US-32

US-33

US-34

US-35

US-36

US-37

US-38

US-39

US-40

US-41

US-42

US-43

US-44

US-45

US-46

US-47

US-48

US-49

US-50

US-51

US-52

US-53

US-54

US-55

US-56

US-57

US-58

US-59

US-60

US-61

US-62

US-63

US-64

US-65

US-66

US-67

US-68

US-69

E10

E11

E12

R10

R11

R12

AU-10

AU-11

S-9

S-10

S-11

S-12

S-13

S-14

S-15

S-16

S-17

S-18

S-19

S-20

S-21

S-22

S-23

S-24

S-25

S-26

S-27

S-28

S-29

S-30

S-31

S-32

S-33

S-34

S-35

S-36

S-37

S-38

S-39

S-40

S-41

E21

E22

E23

E24

E25

E26

E27

E28

E29

E30

E31

E32

E33

E34

E35

E36

E37

E38

E39

E40

E41

E42

E43

E44

E45

E46

E47

E48

E49

E50

E51

E52

E53

E54

E55

E56

E57

E58

E59

E60

E61

E62

E63

E64

E65

E66

E67

E68

E69

W+1

W+2

W+3

W+4

W+5

W+6

W+7

W+8

W+9

W+10

W+11

W+12

W+13

W+14

W+15

W+16

W+17

W+18

W+19

W+20

W+21

W+22

W+23

W+24

W+25

W+26

W+27

W+28

Z+1

Z+2

AU-3

AU-4

A-5

A-4

A-3

A-2

A-1

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

3 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения настройки.

åÂÌ˛ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÂÚ.

üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ

àÏÂÂÚÒﬂ 4 „ÛÔÔ˚ ﬂÁ˚ÍÓ‚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡. Ç˚·ÂËÚÂ

„ÛÔÔÛ, ÍÓÚÓ‡ﬂ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚ÛÂÚ ﬂÁ˚ÍÛ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚

ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡, ÍÓÚÓÛ˛ ‚˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸.

• Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ‚˚·Ó‡ „ÛÔÔ˚ ﬂÁ˚ÍÓ‚, ‚

ÍÓÚÓÓÈ ÌÂÚ ﬂÁ˚Í‡ ‰‡ÌÌÓÈ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏ˚

ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡, ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ

ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ ÓÚÓ·‡Ê‡Ú¸Òﬂ.

1 Выберите ЯЗЫКТЕЛЕТЕКСТА

и нажмите кнопку MENU/OK.

2 Нажмите кнопки

выбора группы.

для

Группа

Языки

Турецкий, венгерский,

английский, немецкий,

французский, итальянский,

испанский, португальский,

греческий, шведский,

финский

ГPУППА-1

Польский, сербский,

хорватский, словенский,

чешский, словацкий,

румынский, венгерский,

немецкий, французский,

итальянский, шведский,

финский

ГPУППА-2

ГPУППА-3

Русский, болгарский,

латышский, литовский,

эстонский, украинский,

сербский, хорватский,

словенский, чешский,

словацкий, английский,

немецкий

Арабский, чешский,

словацкий, венгерский,

английский, немецкий,

французский,

итальянский, испанский,

португальский, шведский,

финский

ГPУППА-4

ä‡Í ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

åÂÌ˛ ÑÖåé

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÑÖåé Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ

‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÛ˛ ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆË˛ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı

ÙÛÌÍˆËÈ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

Когда функция ДЕМО

установлена на ВКЛ :

ÔË Í‡Ê‰ÓÏ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

Ì‡˜ËÌ‡ÂÚÒﬂ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍ‡ﬂ ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËﬂ.

ÖÒÎË ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËﬂ ÌÂ ÚÂ·ÛÂÚÒﬂ,

ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ ÑÖåé Ì‡ Çõäã.

1 Нажмите кнопку

выбора ВКЛ.

для

ÑÎﬂ ÓÚÏÂÌ˚ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÑÖåé ‚˚·ÂËÚÂ

Çõäã.

2 Нажмите кнопку MENU/OK

для завершения настройки.

îÛÌÍˆËﬂ ÑÖåé ‚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ, ‚

ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ Ì‡˜ÌÂÚÒﬂ ‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËﬂ.

Для отмены демонстрации:

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ Î˛·Û˛ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ.

ДОПОЛНИТЕЛЬНАЯ ПОДГОТОВКА

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ

‚ÌÂ¯ÌËı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌﬂÈÚÂ Í ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÛ ‚ÌÂ¯ÌËÂ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂÏ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÈ

ÒıÂÏ˚ ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËﬂ.

Перед выполнением любого

подсоединения :

• èÓ˜ÚËÚÂ ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó Í ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌﬂÂÏ˚Ï

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï. ëÔÓÒÓ· ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËﬂ

Á‡‚ËÒËÚ ÓÚ ÍÓÌÍÂÚÌ˚ı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ Ë ÏÓÊÂÚ

·˚Ú¸ ÓÚÎË˜Ì˚Ï ÓÚ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡, ÔÓÍ‡Á‡ÌÌÓ„Ó

Ì‡ ÒıÂÏÂ. äÓÏÂ ÚÓ„Ó, ‰Îﬂ Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜ÂÌËﬂ

ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓÈ ‡·ÓÚ˚ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓÚÂ·Ó‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ

ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËÂ Ì‡ÒÚÓÂÍ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ ‚

Á‡‚ËÒËÏÓÒÚË ÓÚ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡ ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËﬂ.

• Ç˚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂ ‚ÒÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡, ‚ ÚÓÏ ˜ËÒÎÂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ.

• Ç ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “íÂıÌË˜ÂÒÍËÂ ‰‡ÌÌ˚Â” Ì‡ ÒÚ.

43 ÒÓ‰ÂÊËÚÒﬂ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆËﬂ Ó Ô‡ÌÂÎﬂı

ÇàÑÖé. Ç ÒÎÛ˜‡Â ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËﬂ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡, ÌÂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌÌÓ„Ó ‚

ÔË‚Â‰ÂÌÌ˚È ÌËÊÂ ÒÔËÒÓÍ, Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸

Í ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “íÂıÌË˜ÂÒÍËÂ ‰‡ÌÌ˚Â” ‰Îﬂ

‚˚·Ó‡ Ì‡Ë·ÓÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰ıÓ‰ﬂ˘ÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË

ÇàÑÖé.

• àÏÂÈÚÂ ‚‚Ë‰Û, ˜ÚÓ ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂÎ¸Ì˚Â

Í‡·ÂÎË ÌÂ ‚ıÓ‰ﬂÚ ‚ ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË.

• èË ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,

ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU LINK,

Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚, ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı AV COMPU

LINK” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 38.

Çå (ÔÓÎÌ˚È ÒË„Ì‡Î)

Çå (ÒË„Ì‡Î S-VIDEO; Y/C)

Çå ‰Îﬂ Á‡ÔËÒË (ÔÓÎÌ˚È ÒË„Ì‡Î)

DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È ÒË„Ì‡Î)

DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÒË„Ì‡Î S-VIDEO; Y/C)

DVD-ÔÎÂÂ (ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚Â

‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î˚; Y/C^B/C^R

)

íÇ-Ë„‡ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È ÒË„Ì‡Î)

íÇ-Ë„‡ (ÒË„Ì‡Î S-VIDEO; Y/C)

ÇË‰ÂÓÍ‡ÏÂ‡ (ÔÓÎÌ˚È ÒË„Ì‡Î)

ÇË‰ÂÓÍ‡ÏÂ‡ (ÒË„Ì‡Î S-VIDEO; Y/C)

ÉÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚

ä‡·ÂÎ¸ AV COMPU LINK

ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ

Подсоединение устройства

через панель VIDEO-3/COMPO-

NENT с помощью видеокабеля :

ëÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó Y/VIDEO ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ë

„ÌÂÁ‰Ó VIDEO OUT (‚Ë‰ÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎÂÈ, ‡ ÌÂ Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ.

á‡ÚÂÏ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ VIDEO-3 Ì‡ ÇàÑÖé

ÒÓ„Î‡ÒÌÓ ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ “VIDEO-3” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 28.

Способы подсоединения

1 Соедините гнездо VIDEO

телевизора с гнездом VIDEO

OUT (видеовыход) устройства

с помощью видеокабеля.

Подсоединение устройства к

телевизору с помощью кабеля

S-VIDEO :

ëÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO OUT (‚˚ıÓ‰ S-

VIDEO) ‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡ Ò ‡Á˙ÂÏÓÏ “S”

(S-VIDEO) ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ Í‡·ÂÎﬂ S-

VIDEO, ‡ ÌÂ ‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ.

àÏÂÈÚÂ ‚‚Ë‰Û, ˜ÚÓ ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÂÒÎË

ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Çå Ò ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ Í‡Í Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ, Ú‡Í Ë Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

Í‡·ÂÎﬂ S-VIDEO.

• ç‡ Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-4 „ÌÂÁ‰Ó VIDEO

Ó·ÓÁÌ‡˜ÂÌÓ Í‡Í “V”.

2 Соединение аудиогнезд AUDIO

(L/MONO и R) телевизора и

гнезд AUDIO OUT (аудиовыход

L/R) с помощью аудиокабелей.

Если звуковой сигнал

устройства является

монофоническим :

ëÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ „ÌÂÁ‰Ó AUDIO OUT ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò

„ÌÂÁ‰ÓÏ L/MONO ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

‡Û‰ËÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ.

Соединение DVD-плеера с

телевизором с помощью

компонентного видеокабеля :

ëÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ ÚË „ÌÂÁ‰‡ (Y/VIDEO, C Ë C )

Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-3 Ë COMPONENT (ÔÓÎÌ˚È

‚Ë‰ÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰) „ÌÂÁ‰‡ DVD-ÔÎÂÂ‡ Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ı ‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎÂÈ, ‡ ÌÂ

Ó‰ÌÓ„Ó ‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ.

á‡ÚÂÏ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ VIDEO-3 Ì‡

äéåèéçÖçíçõâ ÒÓ„Î‡ÒÌÓ ‡Á‰ÂÎÛ

“VIDEO-3” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 28.

Подсоединение устройств

к панели OUTPUT

ëË„Ì‡Î˚ ÔÓÒÏ‡ÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚ı ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È

ÏÓÏÂÌÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ë Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó

ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ ‚˚ıÓ‰ﬂÚ ËÁ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ OUTPUT. èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌË‚ Çå Í

Ô‡ÌÂÎË OUTPUT, ÏÓÊÌÓ Á‡ÔËÒ˚‚‡Ú¸

ÔÓÒÏ‡ÚË‚‡ÂÏ˚Â ‚ ‰‡ÌÌ˚È ÏÓÏÂÌÚ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ.

ÑÎﬂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ‰ÓÒÚ‡ÚÓ˜ÌÓ ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Çå

˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ OUTPUT ÒÓ„Î‡ÒÌÓ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÏ

ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËﬂÏ.

• Ñ‡ÌÌ˚È ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ Ò

Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓÏ (ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓÏ

525P). (ÂÒÎË Ì‡ ‚ıÓ‰ ÔÓ‰‡ÂÚÒﬂ

ÒÓ‚ÏÂÒÚËÏ˚È ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î).

ÖÒÎË DVD-ÔÎÂÂ ÔÓ‰‡ÂÚ Progressive

‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î˚ (ÒË„Ì‡Î˚ 525P) ‚ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â

ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚ı ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚,

ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Ò ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ

ÔÓÒÂ‰ÒÚ‚ÓÏ ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌÓ„Ó

‚Ë‰ÂÓÍ‡·ÂÎﬂ ÔÓÁ‚ÓÎËÚ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸

Á‡ÔËÒ¸ Ì‡ ‰ËÒÍË DVD ‚ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â

ËÒıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ‡ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

1 Соедините гнездо VIDEO

панели OUTPUT с гнездом

VIDEO IN (видеовход)

видеомагнитофона при

помощи видеокабеля.

ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ

2 Соедините гнезда AUDIO (L и

R) панели OUTPUT с гнездами

AUDIO IN (аудиовход L/R)

видеомагнитофона при

Примеры работы системы

дистанционного

управления AV COMPU

LINK

ç‡ÊËÏ‡ﬂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ PLAY ‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡

ËÎË DVD-ÔÎÂÂ‡, ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÒÏ‡ÚË‚‡Ú¸

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ Ì‡ ‚ÌÂ¯ÌÂÏ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Â.

помощи аудиокабеля.

• èË ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ÔÂÍ‡˘‡˛ÚÒﬂ ÒË„Ì‡Î˚ ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸

OUTPUT.

ÖÒÎË Á‡„ÛÁËÚ¸ Á‡ÔËÒ‡ÌÌÛ˛ ÔÎÂÌÍÛ (Ì‡

Í‡ÒÒÂÚÂ Ò Û‰‡ÎÂÌÌ˚Ï Á‡˘ËÚÌ˚Ï ﬂÁ˚˜ÍÓÏ) ‚

Çå, ÏÓÊÌÓ ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ Á‡ÔËÒ¸.

• äÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚Â ÒË„Ì‡Î˚, ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡˛˘ËÂ

˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-3/ CéåPéNENT,

ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ ‚˚‚ÂÒÚË ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ OUTPUT.

ÇÍÎ˛˜‡Ú¸ Ë ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡Ú¸ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ

(Ì‡ıÓ‰ﬂ˘ËÈÒﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ) Ë

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜‡Ú¸ ÂÊËÏ˚ ÇàÑÖé ÏÓÊÌÓ Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÔËÂÏÌËÍ‡ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÄV.

Подсоединение головных

телефонов

• ê‡·ÓÚ‡ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ AV COMPU LINK Á‡‚ËÒËÚ ÓÚ

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡. ëÏ.

ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡ ÔÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï.

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌ˚ ÒÓ

ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍËÏ ÏËÌË¯ÚÂÍÂÓÏ

(‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ 3,5 ÏÏ) Í „ÌÂÁ‰Û „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı

ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ Ì‡ ÔÂÂ‰ÌÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

• èË ‚˚·ÓÂ “áÇìäéÇéÉé

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,

ëéèêéÇéÜÑÖçàü íÇ” ‚ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Â

‚ıÓ‰ÌÓ„Ó ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ‡ Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

ÔËÂÏÌËÍ‡ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ AV ÏÓÊÂÚ

‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍË Ò‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ

ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ áÇìäÄ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡, Ú‡Í

˜ÚÓ Á‚Û˜‡ÌËÂ ËÁ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒﬂ. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ ÒÎÛ˜‡Â

Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÍÌÓÔÓÍ VOLUME-/+ ËÎË

MUTING ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÓÚÏÂÌËÚÂ ÙÛÌÍˆË˛

ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ áÇìäÄ. Ç ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ Á‡Á‚Û˜‡Ú

ÒÌÓ‚‡.

ÔÓ‰‰ÂÊË‚‡˛˘Ëı

AV COMPU LINK

ëËÒÚÂÏ‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ AV

COMPU LINK Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜Ë‚‡ÂÚ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËÂ ÌÂÒÍÓÎ¸ÍËÏË ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ÏË ÔË

‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËË ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ Ó‰ÌËÏ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ.

èËÏÂÌËÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ Í ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÛ, ‚ ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ‚ÌÂ¯ÌËÏ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ ·Û‰ÂÚ

ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ¸ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËÂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ. ÑÎﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡

ÏËÎË ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËﬂ ÂÊËÏÓ‚ ÇàÑÖé ÌÂ

ÚÂ·ÛÂÚÒﬂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ÔÛÎ¸Ú‡

Условия, при которых

можно использовать

систему дистанционного

управления AV COMPU

LINK

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ.

• çÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó, ËÏÂ˛˘ÂÂ

‡Á˙ÂÏ AV COMPU LINK.

ÑéèéãçàíÖãúçÄü èéÑÉéíéÇäÄ

• çÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚ¸ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ë

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ Í‡·ÂÎﬂ AV

COMPU LINK.

ä‡·ÂÎ¸ AV COMPU LINK ÌÂ ‚ıÓ‰ËÚ ‚

ÍÓÏÔÎÂÍÚ ÔÓÒÚ‡‚ÍË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË

Í‡·ÂÎﬂ AV COMPU LINK ÌÂÚ, ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ë ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛

Í‡·ÂÎﬂ, Ì‡ Ó·ÓËı ÍÓÌˆ‡ı ÍÓÚÓÓ„Ó

ËÏÂ˛ÚÒﬂ 3,5 ÏÏ (ÏÓÌÓ) ¯ÚÂÍÂ˚.

• èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚Â ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËË ÔÓ

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌËÂ ‚ÌÂ¯ÌËı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚” Ì‡

ÒÚ. 36.

2 Соедините гнездо AV COMPU

LINK телевизора с гнездом AV

COMPU LINK устройства с

помощью кабеля AV COMPU

LINK.

3 Измените настройку

устройства в соответствии с

панелью VIDEO, с которой оно

соединено.

• ìÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏÓ ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚ¸ Í

ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ÂÈ Ô‡ÌÂÎË ÇàÑÖé Ë

Ô‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ Ì‡ÒÚÓËÚ¸, ËÌ‡˜Â ÒËÒÚÂÏ‡

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ AV COMPU

LINK ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸. ÅÓÎÂÂ

ÔÓ‰Ó·ÌÛ˛ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ÒÏ. ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“ç‡ÒÚÓÈÍ‡ ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ AV COMPU LINK”.

Если ВМ соединен с панелью

VIDEO-1 :

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÍÓ‰ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

• íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‰ÓÎÊÂÌ Ì‡ıÓ‰ËÚ¸Òﬂ ‚ ÂÊËÏÂ

ÓÊË‰‡ÌËﬂ (ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER

‰ÓÎÊÂÌ „ÓÂÚ¸ Í‡ÒÌ˚Ï). ÖÒÎË

‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡ Ì‡ A.

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÓÚÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ ÓÚ ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ‡

ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ (ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂ „ÓËÚ), ÒËÒÚÂÏ‡

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ AV COMPU

LINK ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸ ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ.

Если DVD-плеер соединен с

панелью VIDEO-1 :

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVD-

ÔÎÂÂ‡ Ì‡ DVD2.

Если ВМ соединен с панелью

VIDEO-2 :

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÍÓ‰ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ

Настройка системы

дистанционного

управления AV COMPU LINK

‚Ë‰ÂÓÏ‡„ÌËÚÓÙÓÌ‡ Ì‡ B.

Если DVD-плеер соединен с

панелью VIDEO-2 :

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVD-

ВНИМАНИЕ :

• ëÔÓÒÓ·˚ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ ÓÚÎË˜‡˛ÚÒﬂ ÓÚ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌÌÓ„Ó

ÌËÊÂ ÒÔÓÒÓ·‡. èÂÂ‰ ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËÂÏ

Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË Ó·ﬂÁ‡ÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ

ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚Ó ÔÓ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Û.

ÔÎÂÂ‡ Ì‡ DVD3.

Если DVD-плеер соединен с

панелью VIDEO-3 с помощью

компонентного видеокабеля :

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÂÊËÏ AV COMPULINK DVD-

ÔÎÂÂ‡ Ì‡ DVD1.

1 Подсоедините устройство к

панели VIDEO-1 или VIDEO-2

телевизора.

• àÌÒÚÛÍˆËË ÔÓ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌË˛ Ì‡ÒÚÓÂÍ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ ÒÏ. ‚ ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡ı ÔÓ

ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡Ï.

При подсоединении DVD-

плеера к телевизору с

помощью компонентного

видеокабеля :

• ÖÒÎË ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌﬂÂÏÓÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó ÌÂ

ËÏÂÂÚ ÌË ÍÓ‰‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó

èÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ DVD-ÔÎÂÂ Í Ô‡ÌÂÎË VIDEO-3

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ, ÌË ÂÊËÏ‡ AV COMPULINK,

ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌËÚÂ Â„Ó ˜ÂÂÁ Ô‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-1.

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

Устранение неисправностей

ÖÒÎË ÔË ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÓÏ ‚ÓÁÌËÍ‡ÂÚ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ‡, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ ‡Á‰ÂÎ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ

ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ” ÔÂÂ‰ ÚÂÏ Í‡Í Ó·‡˘‡Ú¸Òﬂ Í Ï‡ÒÚÂÛ. ùÚ‡ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆËﬂ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓÏÓ˜¸ Ç‡Ï ‚

ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËË ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ·ÂÁ ÔÓÒÚÓÓÌÌÂÈ ÔÓÏÓ˘Ë. ÖÒÎË, Ì‡ÔËÏÂ, ‚ËÎÍ‡ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ

‚˚ÒÍÓ˜ËÎ‡ ËÁ ÓÁÂÚÍË ËÎË ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚Ì‡ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ‡, ÏÓÊÂÚ ‚ÓÁÌËÍÌÛÚ¸ ‚ÔÂ˜‡ÚÎÂÌËÂ, ˜ÚÓ

ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ.

Внимание :

• Ç ‰‡ÌÌÓÏ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ ‡ÒÒÏ‡ÚË‚‡˛ÚÒﬂ ÚÓÎ¸ÍÓ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚, ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍË ÍÓÚÓ˚ı ÌÂÓ˜Â‚Ë‰Ì˚.

ÖÒÎË Û Ç‡Ò ‚ÓÁÌËÍÌÛÚ ‚ÓÔÓÒ˚ ÔÓ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌË˛ Í‡ÍËı-ÎË·Ó ÙÛÌÍˆËÈ, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ ÒÌ‡˜‡Î‡

ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ËÈ ‡Á‰ÂÎ ‰‡ÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÍÓ‚Ó‰ÒÚ‚‡, ‡ ÌÂ ‡Á‰ÂÎ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ

ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ”.

• ÖÒÎË ÌË Ò ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÂÍÓÏÂÌ‰‡ˆËÈ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ”, ÌË Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÓÔËÒ‡ÌËﬂ ÒÓÓÚ‚ÂÚÒÚ‚Û˛˘ÂÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÛÒÚ‡ÌËÚ¸ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏÛ ÌÂ Û‰‡ÎÓÒ¸, ‚˚Ì¸ÚÂ

‚ËÎÍÛ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ËÁ ÓÁÂÚÍË Ë Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í Ï‡ÒÚÂÛ. çÂ Ô˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸

ÓÚÂÏÓÌÚËÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ò‡ÏÓÒÚÓﬂÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ, ÌÂ ÓÚÍ˚‚‡ÈÚÂ Á‡‰Ì˛˛ Í˚¯ÍÛ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÌÂ

‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÂÚÒﬂ

èÎÓıÓÂ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Ó

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ

• ÇÒÚ‡‚ÎÂÌ‡ Ì‡ ÎË ‚ËÎÍ‡ ¯ÌÛ‡ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ ‚

ÓÁÂÚÍÛ?

• ÖÒÎË ÔÓÏÂıË ÔÓÎÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ·ÎÓÍËÛ˛Ú

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ (ÒÌÂ„) ÔË˜ËÌ‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ

Á‡ÍÎ˛˜‡Ú¸Òﬂ ‚ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÏ Í‡·ÂÎÂ ËÎË

‡ÌÚÂÌÌÂ. èÓ‚Â¸ÚÂ ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ÂÂ:

• ÉÓËÚ ÎË ËÌ‰ËÍ‡ÚÓ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER?

ÖÒÎË ÓÌ ÌÂ „ÓËÚ, Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ

‚˚ÍÎ˛˜‡ÚÂÎﬂ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ.

è‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ ÎË ÔÓ‰ÒÓÂ‰ËÌÂÌ‡

‡ÌÚÂÌÌ‡ Í ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÛ?

çÂ ÔÓ‚ÂÊ‰ÂÌ ÎË Í‡·ÂÎ¸?

è‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ ÎË ÓËÂÌÚËÓ‚‡Ì‡

‡ÌÚÂÌÌ‡?

çÂÚ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ/

çÂÚ Á‚ÛÍ‡

àÒÔ‡‚Ì‡ ÎË Ò‡Ï‡ ‡ÌÚÂÌÌ‡?

• çÂ ﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ ÎË ÒË„Ì‡Î ‚˚·‡ÌÌÓ„Ó

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ ÒÎË¯ÍÓÏ ÒÎ‡·˚Ï? Ç ˝ÚÓÏ

ÒÎÛ˜‡Â Ò‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ ëàçàâ

îéç – ‚ÂÒ¸ ˝Í‡Ì ÒÚ‡ÌÂÚ ÒËÌËÏ, Á‚ÛÍ

ÔÂÍ‡ÚËÚÒﬂ. ÖÒÎË Ç˚ ‚ÒÂ ÊÂ ıÓÚËÚÂ

ÒÏÓÚÂÚ¸ ˝ÚÓÚ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î, ÔÓ˜ÚËÚÂ

ÓÔËÒ‡ÌËÂ ÙÛÌÍˆËË “ëàçàâ îéç” Ì‡

ÒÚ. 26 Ë ÔÓÔ˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸ ˝ÚÛ

ÙÛÌÍˆË˛ Ì‡ Çõäã.

• ÖÒÎË ‚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓÂ ËÎË ‡ÌÚÂÌÌÂ

Ì‡‚Ó‰ﬂÚÒﬂ ÔÓÏÂıË ÓÚ ‰Û„Ëı ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚,

Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ÏÓ„ÛÚ ÔÓﬂ‚ËÚ¸Òﬂ ÔÓÎÓÒ˚ ËÎË

‰Û„ËÂ ÔÓÏÂıË. ì‰‡ÎËÚÂ Ú‡ÍËÂ

ÔÓÏÂıÓ„ÂÌÂËÛ˛˘ËÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ Í‡Í

ÛÒËÎËÚÂÎË, ÍÓÏÔ¸˛ÚÂ˚, ÙÂÌ˚, ÓÚ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ËÎË ÔÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚÂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚ¸

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ ‰Û„ÓÏ ÏÂÒÚÂ. ÖÒÎË ‚

‡ÌÚÂÌÌÂ Ì‡‚Ó‰ﬂÚÒﬂ ÔÓÏÂıË ÓÚ

• è‡‚ËÎ¸Ì˚ ÎË Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍË ‰Îﬂ ëàëíÖåõ

áÇìäÄ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡? èÓ˜ÚËÚÂ

ÓÔËÒ‡ÌËÂ “äÌÓÔÍ‡ SOUND SYSTEM” Ì‡

ÒÚ. 12 Ë ÔÓÔ˚Ú‡ÈÚÂÒ¸ ÛÒÚ‡ÌËÚ¸

ÔÓ·ÎÂÏÛ.

‡‰ËÓÏ‡˜Ú˚ ËÎË ‚˚ÒÓÍÓ‚ÓÎ¸ÚÌ˚ı ÎËÌËÈ,

Ó·‡ÚËÚÂÒ¸ Í ÏÂÒÚÌÓÏÛ ‰ËÎÂÛ.

• ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÔËÌËÏ‡ÂÚ ÒË„Ì‡Î,

ÓÚ‡ÊÂÌÌ˚È ÓÚ „Ó ËÎË Á‰‡ÌËÈ,

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ·Û‰ÂÚ ‰‚ÓËÚ¸Òﬂ.

èÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚÂ ËÁÏÂÌËÚ¸ ÓËÂÌÚ‡ˆË˛

‡ÌÚÂÌÌ˚ ËÎË Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ¸ ÂÂ ÌÓ‚ÓÈ,

Ó·Î‡‰‡˛˘ÂÈ ÎÛ˜¯ÂÈ Ì‡Ô‡‚ÎÂÌÌÓÒÚ¸˛.

ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ

• ÑÂÎ‡ÈÚÂ ÎË ‚˚ ÔÓÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÍÛ ëàëíÖåÄ

ñÇÖíçéëíà ‰Îﬂ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡

Ô‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ?ÑÎﬂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËﬂ ˝ÚÓÈ

ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “äÌÓÔÍ‡ COLOUR SYSTEM” Ì‡

ÒÚ. 11.

íÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÌÂ

‡·ÓÚ‡ÂÚ

• çÂ ÔÓ‡ ÎË Á‡ÏÂÌËÚ¸ ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË ‚ ÔÛÎ¸ÚÂ

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ?

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ ÌÓ‚˚Â ·‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË ÒÓ„Î‡ÒÌÓ

ËÌÒÚÛÍˆËﬂÏ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚Í‡

·‡Ú‡ÂÂÍ ‚ ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 4.

• è‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ ÎË ÓÚÂ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ì˚ ñÇÖí Ë

üêäé? ÑÎﬂ Â„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂ

ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “êÂ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡ÌËÂ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 20.

• çÂ Ô˚Ú‡ÂÚÂÒ¸ ÎË Ç˚ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ÔÛÎ¸Ú

‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ,

• á‡ÔËÒ¸ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ Ì‡ Çå ÌÂ

ÂÍÓÏÂÌ‰ÛÂÚÒﬂ, Ú.Í. ÓÌ ÏÓÊÂÚ Á‡ÔËÒ‡Ú¸Òﬂ

ÌÂÔ‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ.

Ì‡ıÓ‰ﬂ˘ËÈÒﬂ ÒÁ‡‰Ë ËÎË Ò·ÓÍÛ ËÎË Ì‡

‡ÒÒÚÓﬂÌËË ·ÓÎÂÂ 7 Ï ÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡?

ê‡ÒÔÓÎÓÊËÚÂ ÔÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó

ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ ÒÔÂÂ‰Ë ÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡, Ì‡

‡ÒÒÚÓﬂÌËË ÌÂ ·ÓÎÂÂ 7 Ï ÓÚ ÌÂ„Ó.

• üÍËÂ ·ÂÎ˚Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ (Ì‡ÔËÏÂ,

·ÂÎÓÂ ÔÎ‡Ú¸Â) ÏÓ„ÛÚ ‚˚„Îﬂ‰ÂÚ¸ Ì‡

˝Í‡ÌÂ Í‡Í ˆ‚ÂÚÌ˚Â.

ùÚÓ ÌÂÛÒÚ‡ÌËÏÓÂ ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËÂ,

Ò‚ﬂÁ‡ÌÌÓÂ Ò ÓÒÓ·ÂÌÌÓÒÚﬂÏË ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡,

ÓÌÓ ÌÂ ﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛.

çÂÂÒÚÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚Â ˆ‚ÂÚ‡ ËÒ˜ÂÁÌÛÚ ÔË

ÛıÓ‰Â Ò ˝Í‡Ì‡ ﬂÍÓ„Ó ·ÂÎÓ„Ó

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡

ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÏÂÌ˛ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ. ç‡ÊÏËÚÂ

ÍÌÓÔÍÛ TV/VIDEO ‰Îﬂ ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ Ò

ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡ Ì‡ Ó·˚˜ÌÛ˛ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÛ Ë

ÔÓÒÎÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÔÓÔÓ·ÛÈÚÂ ‚˚Á‚‡Ú¸ ÏÂÌ˛.

• çÂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌ ÎË áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ? ÖÒÎË

ÙÛÌÍˆËﬂ áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ÎÂÌ‡

Ì‡ Çäã, ÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÔÂÂ‰ÌËÏË

ÍÌÓÔÍ‡ÏË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÌÂÎ¸Áﬂ.

ìÒÚ‡ÌÓ‚ËÚÂ áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ Ì‡ Çõäã,

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛﬂ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“áÄåéä éí ÑÖíÖâ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 26.

• èË ÔÓÒÏÓÚÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÈ Ò

ÔÓÏÓ˘¸˛ ÌÂÍÓÚÓ˚ı ËÏÂ˛˘ËıÒﬂ ‚

ÔÓ‰‡ÊÂ Ô‡ÍÂÚÓ‚ ÔÓ„‡ÏÏÌÓ„Ó

Ó·ÂÒÔÂ˜ÂÌËﬂ ‰Îﬂ ‚Ë‰ÂÓ ËÎË

ÌÂÔ‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ Ò‰ÂÎ‡ÌÌ˚ı ‚Ë‰ÂÓÁ‡ÔËÒÂÈ

‚ÂıÌﬂﬂ ˜‡ÒÚ¸ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ÏÓÊÂÚ

ËÏÂÚ¸ ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

• ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÌÂÁ‡ÔÌÓ ÔÂÂÒÚ‡ÂÚ

‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂ ÔËÚ‡ÌËÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÓÈ

ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ. á‡ÚÂÏ Â˘Â ‡Á Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ

‰Îﬂ ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ. ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ

Ì‡˜ËÌ‡ÂÚ ÔÓÒÎÂ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ

‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÓÌ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ.

ùÚÓ Ò‚ﬂÁ‡ÌÓ Ò ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓÏ, ‡ ÌÂ Ò

ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡.

èÎÓıÓÂ Í‡˜ÂÒÚ‚Ó

Á‚ÛÍ‡

• èË ÔËÂÏÂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚

(ÒË„Ì‡ÎÓ‚ 525P) ÒÎÂ‰Û˛˘ËÂ ÙÛÌÍˆËË ÌÂ

‡·ÓÚ‡˛Ú;

èÛÎ¸Ú‡ ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ:

ZOOM, PIP, MULTI, FREEZE Ë ÍÌÓÔÍ‡

STROÇE.

îÛÌÍˆËË åÖçû:

óÖíäé, ñÇ. íéç, ñàîêéÇÄü ëèÇò,

Digipure Ë ZOOM.

• è‡‚ËÎ¸ÌÓ ÎË ÓÚÂ„ÛÎËÓ‚‡Ì˚ ÅÄë Ë

íÖåÅê? ÖÒÎË ÌÂÚ, ‚˚ÔÓÎÌËÚÂ

Â„ÛÎËÓ‚ÍË, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛﬂ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “êÂ„ÛÎËÓ‚Í‡ Á‚ÛÍ‡” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 24.

• èË ÔÎÓıÓÏ ÔËÂÏÂ ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ ÏÓ„ÛÚ

‚ÓÁÌËÍ‡Ú¸ ÚÛ‰ÌÓÒÚË Ò ÔÓÒÎÛ¯Ë‚‡ÌËÂÏ

ÒÚÂÂÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍÓ„Ó ËÎË ‰‚ÛﬂÁ˚˜ÌÓ„Ó

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ. Ç ˝ÚÓÏ

ÒÎÛ˜‡Â, ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛﬂ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ‚

‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “CTEPEO / I • II” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 24,

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ËÚÂÒ¸ Ì‡ ÏÓÌÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ.

ìÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËÂ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚÂÈ

• èË ÔËÍÓÒÌÓ‚ÂÌËË Í ˝Í‡ÌÛ

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ Ó˘Û˘‡Ú¸Òﬂ ÎÂ„ÍËÈ

˝ÎÂÍÚË˜ÂÒÍËÈ ‡Áﬂ‰ ÒÚ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓ„Ó

˝ÎÂÍÚË˜ÂÒÚ‚‡. ùÚÓ ÌÂÛÒÚ‡ÌËÏÓÂ

ﬂ‚ÎÂÌËÂ, Ò‚ﬂÁ‡ÌÌÓÂ Ò ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚ÓÏ

ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡, ÓÌÓ ÌÂ ﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ

ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛. í‡ÍÓÈ ÒÚ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍËÈ

‡Áﬂ‰ ÌÂ ÔË˜ËÌﬂÂÚ ‚Â‰‡ Ó„‡ÌËÁÏÛ

˜ÂÎÓ‚ÂÍ‡.

ÑÛ„ËÂ ÔÓ·ÎÂÏ˚

• èË ‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌÌÓÈ ÙÛÌÍˆËË íÄâåÖê

ÇõäãûóÖçàü ËÎË ÄÇíé ÇõäãûóÖçàÖ

ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ‡‚ÚÓÏ‡ÚË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ

‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËÂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ‚ÌÂÁ‡ÔÌÓ ‚˚ÍÎ˛˜ËÎÒﬂ,

Ì‡ÊÏËÚÂ ÍÌÓÔÍÛ ÔËÚ‡ÌËﬂ POWER ‰Îﬂ Â„Ó

‚ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËﬂ. ÖÒÎË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ Ì‡˜ËÌ‡ÂÚ

ÌÓÏ‡Î¸ÌÓ ‡·ÓÚ‡Ú¸, ÓÌ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ.

• ÖÒÎË ‚˚ ıÓÚËÚÂ, ˜ÚÓ·˚ ÔË ÔÓ‰ÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËË

Ì‡Û¯ÌËÍÓ‚ Á‚ÛÍ ËÁ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ

íÇ ÌÂ ÔÓÒÚÛÔ‡Î, ËÁÏÂÌËÚÂ Ì‡ÒÚÓÈÍÛ TV

ÉêéåäéÉéÇéê. ‚ ÏÂÌ˛ çÄìôçàäà Ì‡

Çõäã. èÓ‰Ó·Ì˚Â Ò‚Â‰ÂÌËﬂ ÒÏ. ÔÓ‰

Á‡„ÓÎÓ‚ÍÓÏ “çÄìôçàäà” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 25.

• ÖÒÎË ‚·ÎËÁË ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÓÍ‡ÊÂÚÒﬂ

Ï‡„ÌËÚÌÓÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó, Ú‡ÍÓÂ Í‡Í

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎ¸, ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË

ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ ËÎË ‚ Û„Î‡ı

˝Í‡Ì‡ ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË ËÒÍ‡ÊÂÌËÂ

ˆ‚ÂÚÓ‚. ì‰‡ÎËÚÂ Ï‡„ÌËÚÌÓÂ ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚Ó

ÓÚ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡. ÖÒÎË ÔÓÏÂıË ‚ÓÁÌËÍ‡˛Ú

ÓÚ „ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ, ÔÂÂÈ‰ËÚÂ Ì‡

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËÂ ˝Í‡ÌËÓ‚‡ÌÌ˚ı

„ÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎÂÈ.

• àÁ-Á‡ ‚ÎËﬂÌËﬂ Ï‡„ÌËÚÌÓ„Ó ÔÓÎﬂ áÂÏÎË

ÏÓÊÂÚ ÔÓËÁÓÈÚË ÔÂÂÍÓÒ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ. ÑÎﬂ ÛÒÚ‡ÌÂÌËﬂ ÔÂÂÍÓÒ‡

ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÛÈÚÂ ËÌÙÓÏ‡ˆË˛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ

“PICTURE TILT” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 23.

• èË ‚˚ÔÓÎÌÂÌËË Ú‡ÍËı ÓÔÂ‡ˆËÈ Í‡Í

ÔÂÂÍÎ˛˜ÂÌËÂ Ò ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î‡ Ì‡

ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î ‚ÓÁÌËÍ‡ÂÚ Í‡ÚÍÓ‚ÂÏÂÌÌ˚È

ÔÂÂ˚‚ ‚ ÔÂÂ‰‡˜Â ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ. ùÚÓ

ÌÂ ﬂ‚ÎﬂÂÚÒﬂ ÌÂËÒÔ‡‚ÌÓÒÚ¸˛. ùÚÓÚ

ÔÂÂ˚‚ ÌÂÓ·ıÓ‰ËÏ ‰Îﬂ ÒÚ‡·ËÎËÁ‡ˆËË

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

• èË ÂÁÍÓÏ ËÁÏÂÌÂÌËË ÚÂÏÔÂ‡ÚÛ˚

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ÏÓÊÂÚ ËÁ‰‡‚‡Ú¸

ÔÓÚÂÒÍË‚‡ÌËÂ. ÖÒÎË ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËÂ Ë

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚ÓÂ ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËÂ ÔË ˝ÚÓÏ

ÌÓÏ‡Î¸Ì˚, ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ ËÒÔ‡‚ÂÌ. ÖÒÎË

ÔË ‡·ÓÚÂ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡ ÔÓÚÂÒÍË‚‡ÌËÂ

ÔÓËÒıÓ‰ËÚ ˜‡ÒÚÓ, ‚ÓÁÏÓÊÌ˚ ‰Û„ËÂ

ÔË˜ËÌ˚ ˝ÚÓ„Ó ﬂ‚ÎÂÌËﬂ – Ì‡ ‚ÒﬂÍËÈ

ÒÎÛ˜‡È ÏÓÊÌÓ ÔÓÔÓÒËÚ¸ Ï‡ÒÚÂ‡

ÔÓ‚ÂËÚ¸ ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ.

Технические данные

íÂÎÂ‚Â˘‡ÚÂÎ¸Ì˚Â ÒËÒÚÂÏ˚:

ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ˆ‚ÂÚÌÓÒÚË:

ä‡Ì‡Î˚ Ë ˜‡ÒÚÓÚ˚

B, G, I, D, K, K1, M

PAL, SECAM, NTSC3.58/4,43 MHz

ä‡Ì‡Î ÌËÁÍÓÈ VHF (VL) = 46,25 - 168,25 Éˆ

ä‡Ì‡Î ‚˚ÒÓÍÓÈ VHF (VH) = 175,25 - 463,25 Éˆ

ä‡Ì‡Î UHF (U)

= 471,25 - 863,25 Éˆ

èËÌËÏ‡ÂÚ Í‡·ÂÎ¸Ì˚Â ÚÂÎÂÍ‡Ì‡Î˚ ‚ ÒÂ‰ÌÂÏ ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌÂ

(X - Z + 2, S1 - S10), ÒÛÔÂ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌÂ (S11 - S20) Ë „ËÔÂ‰Ë‡Ô‡ÁÓÌÂ

(S21 - S41).

ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ÏÛÎ¸ÚËÔÎÂÍÒÌÓ„Ó

Á‚ÛÍÓ‚Ó„Ó ÒÓÔÓ‚ÓÊ‰ÂÌËﬂ

ëËÒÚÂÏ˚ ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡

üÁ˚ÍË ÚÂÎÂÚÂÍÒÚ‡

èËÚ‡ÌËÂ

A2 (B/G), NICAM (B/G, I, D/K)

FLOF (Fastext), WST (World Standard Text)

ëÏ. Ú‡·ÎËˆÛ ‚ ‡Á‰ÂÎÂ “üáõä íÖãÖíÖäëíÄ” Ì‡ ÒÚ. 34.

èÂ. ÚÓÍ 110 - 240 Ç, 50/60 Éˆ

ÄÛ‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰

è‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-1

çÓÏËÌ‡Î¸Ì‡ﬂ ‚˚ıÓ‰Ì‡ﬂ ÏÓ˘ÌÓÒÚ¸: 20 ÇÚ + 20 ÇÚ

ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3, ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO X 1

• ÇË‰ÂÓ‚ıÓ‰, ‚ıÓ‰ S-VIDEO (Y/C) Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.

ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3

è‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-2

• ÇË‰ÂÓ‚ıÓ‰ Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.

è‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-3/COMPONENT ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 5

• ÇË‰ÂÓ‚ıÓ‰/ÍÓÏÔÓÌÂÌÚÌ˚È ‚Ë‰ÂÓ‚ıÓ‰ (Y/C‚/C^R) Ë L/R ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚.

• ç‡ ‚ıÓ‰ ÔÓ‰‡˛ÚÒﬂ Progressive ‚Ë‰ÂÓÒË„Ì‡Î˚ (ÒË„Ì‡Î˚ 525P).

ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3, ‡Á˙ÂÏ S-VIDEO X 1

• ÇË‰ÂÓ‚ıÓ‰, ‚ıÓ‰ S-VIDEO (Y/C) Ë L/R ‡Û‰ËÓ‚ıÓ‰˚.

ê‡Á˙ÂÏ RCA X 3,

è‡ÌÂÎ¸ VIDEO-4

è‡ÌÂÎ¸ OUTPUT

• ÇË‰ÂÓ‚˚ıÓ‰ Ë ‡Û‰ËÓ‚˚ıÓ‰˚ L/R.

ÉÌÂÁ‰Ó „ÓÎÓ‚Ì˚ı ÚÂÎÂÙÓÌÓ‚ ëÚÂÂÓÙÓÌË˜ÂÒÍÓÂ ÏËÌË„ÌÂÁ‰Ó (‰Ë‡ÏÂÚ 3,5 ÏÏ)

ÑÓÔÓÎÌËÚÂÎ¸Ì˚Â ÛÒÚÓÈÒÚ‚‡ èÛÎ¸Ú ‰ËÒÚ‡ÌˆËÓÌÌÓ„Ó ÛÔ‡‚ÎÂÌËﬂ X 1 (RM-C214)

Å‡Ú‡ÂÈÍË AA/R6 X 2

ÉÓÏÍÓ„Ó‚ÓËÚÂÎË

HV-34LPZ: 12 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2. 3.5 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2.

HV-29LPZ: 10 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2. 3.5 ÒÏ, ÍÛ„Î˚Â, x2.

HV-34LPZ: å‡ÍÒËÏ‡Î¸Ì‡ﬂ 255 ÇÚ, ÒÂ‰Ìﬂﬂ 170 ÇÚ

HV-29LPZ: å‡ÍÒËÏ‡Î¸Ì‡ﬂ 254 ÇÚ, ÒÂ‰Ìﬂﬂ 170 ÇÚ

HV-34LPZ: äËÌÂÒÍÓÔ 87ÒÏ ê‡ÁÏÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ 80 ÒÏ

HV-29LPZ: äËÌÂÒÍÓÔ 73ÒÏ ê‡ÁÏÂ ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ 68 ÒÏ

HV-34LPZ: 898 ÏÏ X 728 ÏÏ X 579 ÏÏ

èÓÚÂ·ÎﬂÂÏ‡ﬂ ÏÓ˘ÌÓÒÚ¸

ê‡ÁÏÂ ÍËÌÂÒÍÓÔ‡

(ÔÓ ‰Ë‡„ÓÌ‡ÎË)

É‡·‡ËÚ˚ (Ñ X Ç X ò)

HV-29LPZ: 732 ÏÏ X 588 ÏÏ X 518 ÏÏ

ÇÂÒ

HV-34LPZ: 75 Í„

HV-29LPZ: 48 Í„

Конструкция и технические данные могут быть изменены без

уведомления.

àÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ, ÔÓÎÛ˜‡ÂÏ˚Â Ì‡ ˝Í‡ÌÂ ‚ ÂÁÛÎ¸Ú‡ÚÂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡ÌËﬂ ÙÛÌÍˆËÈ ZOOM

ÚÂÎÂ‚ËÁÓ‡, Á‡ÔÂ˘‡ÂÚÒﬂ ËÒÔÓÎ¸ÁÓ‚‡Ú¸ ‰Îﬂ Í‡ÍËı-ÎË·Ó ÍÓÏÏÂ˜ÂÒÍËı ËÎË

‰ÂÏÓÌÒÚ‡ˆËÓÌÌ˚ı ˆÂÎÂÈ ‚ Ó·˘ÂÒÚ‚ÂÌÌ˚ı ÏÂÒÚ‡ı (Í‡ÙÂ, „ÓÒÚËÌËˆ‡ı Ë Ú.Ô.) ·ÂÁ ÔÓÎÛ˜ÂÌËﬂ

ÔÂ‰‚‡ËÚÂÎ¸ÌÓ„Ó ÒÓ„Î‡ÒËﬂ ÓÚ ‚Î‡‰ÂÎ¸ˆÂ‚ ‡‚ÚÓÒÍËı Ô‡‚ Ì‡ ËÒıÓ‰Ì˚È ËÒÚÓ˜ÌËÍ

ËÁÓ·‡ÊÂÌËﬂ.

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

JVC GM P421U User Manual
Lenovo Computer Hardware 4223 User Manual
LG Electronics LG Life Good Computer Monitor W1943TB User Manual
Moxa Technologies THINKCORE W311 User Manual
Oricom ECO700 User Manual
Panasonic CF VDL02BM User Manual
Panasonic CT 32SX31E User Manual
Philips 25TS56C User Manual
Philips Brilliance 170P6EB User Manual
Philips CD4403B User Manual